summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2024-05-14 03:01:02 +0000
committerNorbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>2024-05-14 03:01:02 +0000
commitf37b07217a41ad15251ba603bade202897769a05 (patch)
tree81a43508517df44f8f920bdba15c92e32482b0fc /info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
parent783a8e848cd9e9023287546627c43afbcae2d2f6 (diff)
CTAN sync 202405140301
Diffstat (limited to 'info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt')
-rw-r--r--info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt8393
1 files changed, 4479 insertions, 3914 deletions
diff --git a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
index 9f3dd169cb..445df28c6e 100644
--- a/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
+++ b/info/latex2e-help-texinfo/latex2e.txt
@@ -19,8 +19,8 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
18 Page styles
19 Spaces
20 Boxes
-21 Color
-22 Graphics
+21 Graphics
+22 Color
23 Special insertions
24 Splitting the input
25 Front/back matter
@@ -35,15 +35,19 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
2.1 Starting and ending
2.2 Output files
2.3 TeX engines
- 2.4 LaTeX command syntax
- 2.5 Environment
- 2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+ 2.4 Input text
+ 2.4.1 Input encodings
+ 2.4.2 Ligatures
+ 2.4.3 Special characters: ‘\ { } % $ & _ ^ # ~’
+ 2.5 LaTeX command syntax
+ 2.6 Environment syntax
+ 2.7 ‘\DocumentMetadata’: Producing tagged PDF output
+ 2.8 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
3 Document classes
3.1 Document class options
- 3.2 Additional packages
- 3.3 Class and package construction
+ 3.2 ‘\usepackage’: Additional packages
+ 3.3 Class and package creation
3.3.1 Class and package structure
- 3.3.2 Class and package commands
4 Fonts
4.1 ‘fontenc’ package
4.1.1 ‘\DeclareFontEncoding’
@@ -77,7 +81,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
6.5 ‘\subsubsection’, ‘\paragraph’, ‘\subparagraph’
6.6 ‘\appendix’
6.7 ‘\frontmatter’, ‘\mainmatter’, ‘\backmatter’
- 6.8 ‘\@startsection’, typesetting sectional unit headings
+ 6.8 ‘\@startsection’: Typesetting sectional unit headings
7 Cross references
7.1 ‘\label’
7.2 ‘\pageref’
@@ -150,11 +154,12 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
9.2 ‘\obeycr’ & ‘\restorecr’
9.3 ‘\newline’
9.4 ‘\-’ (discretionary hyphen)
- 9.5 ‘\discretionary’ (generalized hyphenation point)
- 9.6 ‘\fussy’ & ‘\sloppy’
- 9.6.1 ‘sloppypar’
- 9.7 ‘\hyphenation’
- 9.8 ‘\linebreak’ & ‘\nolinebreak’
+ 9.5 ‘\slash’: breakable ‘/’
+ 9.6 ‘\discretionary’ (generalized hyphenation point)
+ 9.7 ‘\fussy’ & ‘\sloppy’
+ 9.7.1 ‘sloppypar’
+ 9.8 ‘\hyphenation’
+ 9.9 ‘\linebreak’ & ‘\nolinebreak’
10 Page breaking
10.1 ‘\clearpage’ & ‘\cleardoublepage’
10.2 ‘\newpage’
@@ -181,7 +186,25 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
12.10 ‘\newfont’
12.11 ‘\protect’
12.12 ‘\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend’
- 12.13 xspace package
+ 12.13 ‘xspace’ package
+ 12.14 Class and package commands
+ 12.14.1 ‘\AtBeginDvi’ & ‘\AtEndDvi’
+ 12.14.2 ‘\AtEndOfClass’ & ‘\AtEndOfPackage’
+ 12.14.3 ‘\CheckCommand’
+ 12.14.4 ‘\ClassError’ and ‘\PackageError’ and others
+ 12.14.5 ‘\CurrentOption’
+ 12.14.6 ‘\DeclareOption’
+ 12.14.7 ‘\DeclareRobustCommand’
+ 12.14.8 ‘\ExecuteOptions’
+ 12.14.9 ‘\IfFileExists’ & ‘\InputIfFileExists’
+ 12.14.10 ‘\LoadClass’ & ‘\LoadClassWithOptions’
+ 12.14.11 ‘\NeedsTeXFormat’
+ 12.14.12 ‘\OptionNotUsed’
+ 12.14.13 ‘\PassOptionsToClass’ & ‘\PassOptionsToPackage’
+ 12.14.14 ‘\ProcessOptions’
+ 12.14.15 ‘\ProvidesClass’ & ‘\ProvidesPackage’
+ 12.14.16 ‘\ProvidesFile’
+ 12.14.17 ‘\RequirePackage’ & ‘\RequirePackageWithOptions’
13 Counters
13.1 ‘\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol’: Printing counters
13.2 ‘\usecounter’
@@ -221,7 +244,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
16.2.7 Greek letters
16.3 Math functions
16.4 Math accents
- 16.5 Over- and Underlining
+ 16.5 Over- or under math
16.6 Spacing in math mode
16.6.1 ‘\smash’
16.6.2 ‘\phantom’ & ‘\vphantom’ & ‘\hphantom’
@@ -240,6 +263,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
18.2 ‘\pagenumbering’
18.3 ‘\pagestyle’
18.4 ‘\thispagestyle’
+ 18.5 ‘\thepage’
19 Spaces
19.1 ‘\enspace’ & ‘\quad’ & ‘\qquad’
19.2 ‘\hspace’
@@ -250,7 +274,7 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
19.5.2 ‘\frenchspacing’ & ‘\nonfrenchspacing’
19.5.3 ‘\normalsfcodes’
19.6 Backslash-space, ‘\ ’
- 19.7 ‘~’
+ 19.7 ‘~’, ‘\nobreakspace’
19.8 ‘\thinspace’ & ‘\negthinspace’
19.9 ‘\/’
19.10 ‘\hrulefill’ & ‘\dotfill’
@@ -268,27 +292,27 @@ LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
20.5 ‘\sbox’ & ‘\savebox’
20.6 ‘lrbox’
20.7 ‘\usebox’
-21 Color
- 21.1 ‘color’ package options
- 21.2 Color models
- 21.3 Commands for color
- 21.3.1 Define colors
- 21.3.2 Colored text
- 21.3.3 Colored boxes
- 21.3.4 Colored pages
-22 Graphics
- 22.1 ‘graphics’ package options
- 22.2 ‘graphics’ package configuration
- 22.2.1 ‘\graphicspath’
- 22.2.2 ‘\DeclareGraphicsExtensions’
- 22.2.3 ‘\DeclareGraphicsRule’
- 22.3 Commands for graphics
- 22.3.1 ‘\includegraphics’
- 22.3.2 ‘\rotatebox’
- 22.3.3 ‘\scalebox’
- 22.3.4 ‘\resizebox’
+21 Graphics
+ 21.1 ‘graphics’ package options
+ 21.2 ‘graphics’ package configuration
+ 21.2.1 ‘\graphicspath’
+ 21.2.2 ‘\DeclareGraphicsExtensions’
+ 21.2.3 ‘\DeclareGraphicsRule’
+ 21.3 Commands for graphics
+ 21.3.1 ‘\includegraphics’
+ 21.3.2 ‘\rotatebox’
+ 21.3.3 ‘\scalebox’
+ 21.3.4 ‘\resizebox’
+22 Color
+ 22.1 ‘color’ package options
+ 22.2 Color models
+ 22.3 Commands for color
+ 22.3.1 Define colors
+ 22.3.2 Colored text
+ 22.3.3 Colored boxes
+ 22.3.4 Colored pages
23 Special insertions
- 23.1 Reserved characters
+ 23.1 Printing special characters
23.2 Upper and lower case
23.3 Symbols by font position
23.4 Text symbols
@@ -354,8 +378,8 @@ Index
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
***************************************
-This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of January
-2023) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of May 2024)
+for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
1 About this document
*********************
@@ -364,14 +388,14 @@ This is an unofficial reference manual for the LaTeX2e document
preparation system, which is a macro package for the TeX typesetting
program (*note Overview::).
- This document’s home page is <https://latexref.xyz>; it has separate
+ This document's home page is <https://latexref.xyz>; it has separate
web pages for each topic. Alternatively.
<https://latexref.xyz/dev/latex2e.html> has the entire document on a
single page. For other output formats, the sources, and plenty more
information, see <https://latexref.xyz/dev/>.
- In this document, we will mostly just use ‘LaTeX’ rather than
-‘LaTeX2e’, since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
+ In this document, we will mostly just use 'LaTeX' rather than
+'LaTeX2e', since the previous version of LaTeX (2.09) was frozen decades
ago.
LaTeX is maintained by a group of volunteers
@@ -380,7 +404,8 @@ the LaTeX project is available from their web site. The present
document is completely unofficial and has not been written or reviewed
by the LaTeX maintainers. Do not send bug reports or anything else
about this document to them. Instead, please send all comments to
-<latexrefman@tug.org>.
+<latexrefman@tug.org>. This is a public list; you can (un)subscribe,
+view the archives, etc., at <https://lists.tug.org/latexrefman>.
This document is a reference, not a tutorial. There is a vast array
of other information available about LaTeX, at all levels. Here are a
@@ -396,8 +421,7 @@ few introductions.
A longer introduction to LaTeX, translated to many languages.
<https://tug.org/begin.html>
- Introduction to the TeX system, including LaTeX, with further
- references.
+ Overview of getting started with TeX and LaTeX.
2 Overview of LaTeX
*******************
@@ -413,17 +437,17 @@ with interspersed commands. The default encoding for the text is UTF-8
(as of 2018). The commands specify, for example, how the text should be
formatted.
- LaTeX is implemented as a set of related so-called “macros” which use
-Donald E. Knuth’s TeX typesetting program or one of its derivatives,
-collectively known as “engines”. Thus, the user produces output,
-typically PDF, by giving the input file to a TeX engine. (The following
-sections describe all this in more detail.)
+ LaTeX is implemented as a set of so-called "macros" (a TeX “format”)
+which use Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program or one of its
+derivatives, collectively known as "engines". Thus, the user produces
+output, typically PDF, by giving the input file to a TeX engine. The
+following sections describe all this in more detail.
The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
the input document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
available to a LaTeX user.
- The name LaTeX is short for “Lamport TeX”. It is pronounced LAH-teck
+ The name LaTeX is short for "Lamport TeX". It is pronounced LAH-teck
or LAY-teck, or sometimes LAY-tecks. Inside a document, produce the
logo with ‘\LaTeX’. Where use of the logo is not sensible, such as in
plain text, write it as ‘LaTeX’.
@@ -432,7 +456,7 @@ plain text, write it as ‘LaTeX’.
=======================
LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
-and ending. This is a small example.
+and ending. Here is a small example:
\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
@@ -443,18 +467,18 @@ Every LaTeX document has a ‘\begin{document}’ line and an
‘\end{document}’ line.
Here, the ‘article’ is the “document class”. It is implemented in a
-file ‘article.cls’. You can use any document class on your system. A
-few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and vast array of
-others are widely available. *Note Document classes::.
+file ‘article.cls’. You can use any document class available on your
+system. A few document classes are defined by LaTeX itself, and a vast
+array of others are available. *Note Document classes::.
You can include other LaTeX commands between the ‘\documentclass’ and
the ‘\begin{document}’ commands. This area is called the “preamble”.
- The ‘\begin{document}’, ‘\end{document}’ pair defines an
+ The ‘\begin{document}’ ... ‘\end{document}’ pair defines an
“environment”; the ‘document’ environment (and no others) is required in
-all LaTeX documents (*note document::). LaTeX make available to you
-many environments that are documented here (*note Environments::). Many
-more are available to you from external packages, most importantly those
+all LaTeX documents (*note document::). LaTeX provides many
+environments that are documented here (*note Environments::). Many more
+are available to you from external packages, most importantly those
available at CTAN (*note CTAN::).
The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output
@@ -464,7 +488,7 @@ from a LaTeX input file.
================
LaTeX produces a main output file and at least two auxiliary files. The
-main output file’s name ends in either ‘.dvi’ or ‘.pdf’.
+main output file's name ends in either ‘.dvi’ or ‘.pdf’.
‘.dvi’
If LaTeX is invoked with the system command ‘latex’ then it
@@ -492,8 +516,8 @@ main output file’s name ends in either ‘.dvi’ or ‘.pdf’.
‘.aux’
Auxiliary information is used by LaTeX for things such as cross
references. For example, the first time that LaTeX finds a forward
- reference—a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared
- in the source—it will appear in the output as a doubled question
+ reference--a cross reference to something that has not yet appeared
+ in the source--it will appear in the output as a doubled question
mark ‘??’. When the referred-to spot does eventually appear in the
source then LaTeX writes its location information to this ‘.aux’
file. On the next invocation, LaTeX reads the location information
@@ -509,10 +533,10 @@ particular class may create others; the list is open-ended.
2.3 TeX engines
===============
-LaTeX is a large set of commands that is executed by a TeX program
-(*note Overview::). Such a set of commands is called a “format”, and is
-embodied in a binary ‘.fmt’ file, which can be read much more quickly
-than the corresponding TeX source.
+LaTeX is a large set of commands (macros) that is executed by a TeX
+program (*note Overview::). Such a set of commands is called a
+“format”, and is embodied in a binary ‘.fmt’ file, which can be read
+much more quickly than the corresponding TeX source.
This section gives a terse overview of the TeX programs that are
commonly available (see also *note Command line interface::).
@@ -525,7 +549,7 @@ commonly available (see also *note Command line interface::).
‘latex’, the main output is a ‘.dvi’ file; as ‘pdflatex’, the main
output is a ‘.pdf’ file.
- pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth’s original
+ pdfTeX incorporates the e-TeX extensions to Knuth's original
program (<https://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty
of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the
@@ -533,13 +557,14 @@ commonly available (see also *note Command line interface::).
In other TeX distributions, ‘latex’ may invoke e-TeX rather than
pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be
- available in LaTeX.
+ available in LaTeX, and a few extensions beyond e-TeX, particularly
+ for file manipulation.
‘lualatex’
If LaTeX is invoked via the system command ‘lualatex’, the LuaTeX
engine is run (<https://ctan.org/pkg/luatex>). This program allows
code written in the scripting language Lua (<http://luatex.org>) to
- interact with TeX’s typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode
+ interact with TeX's typesetting. LuaTeX handles UTF-8 Unicode
input natively, can handle OpenType and TrueType fonts, and
produces a ‘.pdf’ file by default. There is also ‘dvilualatex’ to
produce a ‘.dvi’ file.
@@ -557,6 +582,12 @@ commonly available (see also *note Command line interface::).
process is automatic. The ‘.xdv’ file is only useful for
debugging.
+‘hilatex’
+ If LaTeX is invoked via the system command ‘hilatex’, the HiTeX
+ engine is run (<https://ctan.org/pkg/hitex>). This program
+ produces its own format, named HINT, designed especially for
+ high-quality typesetting on mobile devices.
+
‘platex’
‘uplatex’
These commands provide significant additional support for Japanese
@@ -564,7 +595,7 @@ commonly available (see also *note Command line interface::).
<https://ctan.org/pkg/ptex> and <https://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>.
As of 2019, there is a companion ‘-dev’ command and format for all of
-the above:
+the above, except ‘hitex’:
‘dvilualatex-dev’
‘latex-dev’
@@ -588,28 +619,174 @@ the above:
undergo the same extensive regression testing by the LaTeX team
before being released.
- For more information, see “The LaTeX release workflow and the LaTeX
- ‘dev’ formats” by Frank Mittelbach, ‘TUGboat’ 40:2,
+ For more information, see "The LaTeX release workflow and the LaTeX
+ ‘dev’ formats" by Frank Mittelbach, ‘TUGboat’ 40:2,
<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb40-2/tb125mitt-dev.pdf>.
-2.4 LaTeX command syntax
+2.4 Input text
+==============
+
+To a first approximation, most input characters in LaTeX print as
+themselves. But there are exceptions, as discussed in the following
+sections.
+
+2.4.1 Input encodings
+---------------------
+
+The input to TeX (or any computer program) ultimately consists of a
+sequence of bytes. (Nowadays, a byte is almost universally an eight-bit
+number, i.e., an integer between 0 and 255, inclusive.) The input
+encoding defines how to interpret that sequence of bytes, and thus how
+LaTeX behaves.
+
+ Today, by far the most common way to encode text is with “UTF-8”, a
+so-called "Unicode Transformation Format" which specifies how to
+transform a sequence of 8-bit bytes to Unicode code points, which are
+defined independent of any particular representation. The Unicode
+encoding defines code points for virtually all characters used today in
+written text.
+
+ When TeX was created, Unicode and UTF-8 did not exist and the 7-bit
+ASCII encoding was by far the most widely used. So TeX does not require
+Unicode for text input. UTF-8 is a superset of ASCII, so a pure 7-bit
+ASCII document is also UTF-8.
+
+ Since 2018, the default input encoding for LaTeX is UTF-8. Some
+methods for handling documents written in some other encoding, such as
+ISO-8859-1 (Latin 1), are explained in *note inputenc package::.
+
+ You can easily find more about all these topics in any introductory
+computer text or online. For example, you might start at:
+<https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unicode>.
+
+2.4.2 Ligatures
+---------------
+
+A “ligature” combines two or more letters (more generally, characters)
+into a single glyph. For example, in Latin-based typography, the two
+letters ‘f’ and ‘i’ are often combined into the glyph 'fi'.
+
+ TeX supports ligatures automatically. To continue the example, if
+the input has the word ‘fine’, written as four separate ASCII
+characters, TeX will output the word 'fine' (with the default fonts),
+with three typeset glyphs.
+
+ In traditional TeX, the available ligatures, if any, are defined by
+the current font. TeX also uses the ligature mechanism to produce a few
+typographical characters which were not available in any computer
+encoding when TeX was invented. In all, in the original Computer Modern
+fonts, the following input character sequences are defined to lead to
+ligatures:
+
+‘ff’
+ ff (ff ligature, U+FB00)
+‘fi’
+ fi (fi ligature, U+FB01)
+‘fl’
+ fl (fl ligature, U+FB02)
+‘ffi’
+ ffi (ffi ligature, U+FB03)
+‘ffl’
+ ffl (ffl ligature, U+FB04)
+‘``’
+ " (left double quotation mark, U+201C)
+‘''’
+ " (right double quotation mark, U+201D)
+‘--’
+ - (en-dash, U+2013)
+‘---’
+ -- (em-dash, U+2014)
+‘!`’
+ !' (inverted exclamation mark, U+00A1)
+‘?`’
+ ?' (inverted question mark, U+00BF)
+
+(For the f-ligatures above, the text in parentheses shows the individual
+characters, so in the typeset output you can easily see the difference
+between the ligature and the original character sequence.)
+
+ Nowadays it's usually possible to directly input the punctuation
+characters as Unicode characters, and LaTeX supports that (see previous
+section). But even today, it can still often be useful to use the ASCII
+ligature input form; for example, the difference between an en-dash and
+em-dash, as a single glyph, can be all but impossible to discern, but
+the difference between two and three ASCII hyphen characters is clear.
+Similarly with quotation marks, in some fonts.
+
+ Thus, even the engines with native support for UTF-8, namely LuaTeX
+and XeTeX, also support the ASCII ligature input sequences by default,
+independent of the font used. They also need to do so for
+compatibility.
+
+ By the way, the f-ligatures are also available in Unicode (the
+"Alphabetic Presentation Forms" block starting at U+FB00), but it's
+almost never desirable to use them as input characters, since in
+principle it should be up to the typesetter and the current font whether
+to use ligatures. Also, in practice, using them will typically cause
+searches to fail, that is, a search for the two characters ‘fi’ will not
+be matched by the ligature 'fi' at U+FB01.
+
+2.4.3 Special characters: ‘\ { } % $ & _ ^ # ~’
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Besides ligatures (see previous section), a few individual characters
+have special meaning to LaTeX. They are called “reserved characters” or
+“special characters”. Here they are:
+
+‘\’
+ Introduces a command name, as seen throughout this manual.
+
+‘{’
+‘}’
+ Delimits a required argument to a command or a level of grouping,
+ as seen throughout this manual.
+
+‘%’
+ Starts a comment: the ‘%’ and all remaining characters on the
+ current line are ignored.
+
+‘$’
+ Starts and ends math mode (*note Math formulas::).
+
+‘&’
+ Separates cells in a table (*note tabular::).
+
+‘_’
+‘^’
+ Introduce a subscript or superscript, respectively, in math (*note
+ Subscripts & superscripts::); they produce an error outside math
+ mode. As a little-used special feature, two superscript characters
+ in a row can introduce special notation for an arbitrary character.
+
+‘#’
+ Stands for arguments in a macro definition (*note \newcommand &
+ \renewcommand::).
+
+‘~’
+ Produces a nonbreakable interword space (*note ~::).
+
+ *Note Printing special characters::, for how to typeset these
+characters when you need them literally.
+
+2.5 LaTeX command syntax
========================
In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
character, ‘\’. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
letters or (b) a single non-letter.
- LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that ‘\pagebreak’ differs
-from ‘\Pagebreak’ (the latter is not a standard command). Most command
-names are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the
-same case as they are defined.
+ LaTeX commands names are case sensitive; for example, ‘\pagebreak’
+differs from ‘\Pagebreak’ (the latter is not a standard command). Most
+command names are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all
+commands in the same case as they are defined.
A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
contained in curly braces, ‘{...}’. Optional arguments are contained in
square brackets, ‘[...]’. Generally, but not universally, if the
command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any
-required arguments.
+required arguments; optional arguments could come after required
+arguments, or both before and after.
Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
bracket (‘]’) hide it inside curly braces, as in ‘\item[closing bracket
@@ -618,20 +795,20 @@ argument after it, then to make the first character of the following
text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.
LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a ‘*’ form that is
-related to the form without a ‘*’, such as ‘\chapter’ and ‘\chapter*’.
-The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.
+closely related to the form without a ‘*’, such as ‘\chapter’ and
+‘\chapter*’. The difference in behavior varies from command to command.
This manual describes all accepted options and ‘*’-forms for the
commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
As of the 2020-10-01 release of LaTeX, the ‘expl3’ and ‘xparse’
packages are part of the LaTeX2e format. They provide a completely
-different underlying programming language syntax. We won’t try to cover
-them in this document; see the related package documentation and other
+different underlying programming language syntax. We won't try to cover
+that in this document; see the related package documentation and other
LaTeX manuals.
-2.5 Environment
-===============
+2.6 Environment syntax
+======================
Synopsis:
@@ -662,28 +839,55 @@ the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
\begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
- ... rows of table ...
+ ... ROWS-OF-TABLE ...
\end{tabular}
-2.6 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
+2.7 ‘\DocumentMetadata’: Producing tagged PDF output
+====================================================
+
+The ‘\DocumentMetadata’ command was added to LaTeX in 2022. It enables
+so-called "tagging" of the PDF output, aiding accessibility of the PDF.
+It is supported best with LuaLaTeX; pdfLaTeX and XeLaTeX are supported
+as well as possible (*note TeX engines::).
+
+ It is unlike nearly any other command in LaTeX in that it must occur
+before the ‘\documentclass’ command that starts a LaTeX document proper
+(*note \documentclass::). Therefore it must be called with
+‘\RequirePackage’ rather than ‘\usepackage’ (*note \RequirePackage::).
+
+ This support is still in development, so we will not try to list all
+the possible settings. Please see the ‘documentmetadata-support-doc’
+document, part of the ‘latex-lab’ package
+(<https://ctan.org/pkg/latex-lab>). Here is a simple example which
+enables most tagging currently implemented:
+
+ \DocumentMetadata{testphase={phase-III,firstaid}}
+ \documentclass{article}
+ ...
+
+ As you can see from the key name ‘testphase’, this is all still in an
+experimental phase. The LaTeX developers strongly encourage users to
+give it a try and report problems, so it can be improved.
+
+2.8 CTAN: The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network
===============================================
The Comprehensive TeX Archive Network, CTAN, is the TeX and LaTeX
-community’s repository of free material. It is a set of Internet sites
+community's repository of free material. It is a set of Internet sites
around the world that offer material related to LaTeX for download.
Visit CTAN on the web at <https://ctan.org>.
This material is organized into packages, discrete bundles that
typically offer some coherent functionality and are maintained by one
person or a small number of people. For instance, many publishers have
-a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher’s
+a package that allows authors to format papers to that publisher's
specifications.
- In addition to the massive holdings, the ‘ctan.org’ web site offers
+ In addition to its massive holdings, the ‘ctan.org’ web site offers
features such as search by name or by functionality.
CTAN is not a single host, but instead is a set of hosts, one of
-which is the so-called “master”. The master host actively manages the
+which is the so-called "master". The master host actively manages the
material, for instance, by accepting uploads of new or updated packages.
For many years, it has been hosted by the German TeX group, DANTE e.V.
@@ -696,13 +900,13 @@ The list of mirrors is at <https://ctan.org/mirrors>.
3 Document classes
******************
-The document’s overall class is defined with this command, which is
-normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.
+The document's overall class is defined with the ‘\documentclass’
+command, which is normally the first command in a LaTeX source file.
\documentclass[OPTIONS]{CLASS}
- The following document CLASS names are built into LaTeX. (Many other
-document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)
+ The following document CLASS names are built into LaTeX. Many other
+document classes are available as separate packages (*note Overview::).
‘article’
For a journal article, a presentation, and miscellaneous general
@@ -721,10 +925,10 @@ document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)
technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
‘slides’
- For slide presentations—rarely used nowadays. The ‘beamer’ package
- is perhaps the most prevalent (<https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer>).
- *Note beamer template::, for a small template for a beamer
- document.
+ For slide presentations--rarely used nowadays. The ‘beamer’
+ package is perhaps the most prevalent replacement
+ (<https://ctan.org/pkg/beamer>). *Note beamer template::, for a
+ small template for a beamer document.
Standard OPTIONS are described in the next section.
@@ -737,15 +941,18 @@ specify more than one OPTION, separate them with a comma.
\documentclass[OPTION1,OPTION2,...]{CLASS}
+ LaTeX automatically passes options specified for ‘\documentclass’ on
+to any other loaded classes that can handle them.
+
Here is the list of the standard class options.
All of the standard classes except ‘slides’ accept the following
-options for selecting the typeface size (default is ‘10pt’):
+options for selecting the typeface size; the default is ‘10pt’:
10pt 11pt 12pt
All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
-paper size (these show height by width):
+paper size (dimensions are listed height by width):
‘a4paper’
210 by 297mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
@@ -767,12 +974,12 @@ paper size (these show height by width):
When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX (*note
TeX engines::), options other than ‘letterpaper’ set the print area but
-you must also set the physical paper size. One way to do that is to put
-‘\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth’ and ‘\pdfpageheight=\paperheight’ in your
-document’s preamble.
-
- The ‘geometry’ package provides flexible ways of setting the print
-area and physical page size.
+you must also set the physical paper size. Usually, the ‘geometry’
+package is the best way to do that; it provides flexible ways of setting
+the print area and physical page size. Otherwise, setting the paper
+size is engine-dependent. For example, with pdfLaTeX, you could include
+‘\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth’ and ‘\pdfpageheight=\paperheight’ in the
+preamble.
Miscellaneous other options:
@@ -792,7 +999,7 @@ area and physical page size.
right side.
‘openbib’
- Use “open” bibliography format.
+ Use "open" bibliography format.
‘titlepage’
‘notitlepage’
@@ -815,7 +1022,7 @@ area and physical page size.
For one-sided printing, the text is centered on the page. For
two-sided printing, the ‘\evensidemargin’ (‘\oddsidemargin’)
parameter determines the distance on even (odd) numbered pages
- between the left side of the page and the text’s left margin, with
+ between the left side of the page and the text's left margin, with
‘\oddsidemargin’ being 40% of the difference between ‘\paperwidth’
and ‘\textwidth’, and ‘\evensidemargin’ is the remainder.
@@ -827,24 +1034,34 @@ area and physical page size.
The ‘slides’ class offers the option ‘clock’ for printing the time at
the bottom of each note.
-3.2 Additional packages
-=======================
+3.2 ‘\usepackage’: Additional packages
+======================================
-Load a package PKG, with the package options given in the
-comma-separated list OPTIONS, as here.
+To load a package PKG, with the package options given in the
+comma-separated list OPTIONS:
- \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}.
+ \usepackage[OPTIONS]{PKG}[MINDATE]
To specify more than one package you can separate them with a comma,
as in ‘\usepackage{PKG1,PKG2,...}’, or use multiple ‘\usepackage’
commands.
- Any options given in the ‘\documentclass’ command that are unknown to
-the selected document class are passed on to the packages loaded with
-‘\usepackage’.
+ If the MINDATE optional argument is given, LaTeX gives a warning if
+the loaded package has an earlier date, i.e., is too old. The MINDATE
+argument must be in the form ‘YYYY/MM/DD’. More info on this:
+<https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/47743>.
-3.3 Class and package construction
-==================================
+ ‘\usepackage’ must be used in the document preamble, between the
+‘\documentclass’ declaration and the ‘\begin{document}’. Occasionally
+it is necessary to load packages before the ‘\documentclass’; see
+‘\RequirePackage’ for that (*note \RequirePackage::).
+
+ Any options given in the global ‘\documentclass’ command that are
+unknown to the selected document class are passed on to the packages
+loaded with ‘\usepackage’.
+
+3.3 Class and package creation
+==============================
You can create new document classes and new packages. For instance, if
your memos must satisfy some local requirements, such as a standard
@@ -854,22 +1071,26 @@ and begin your documents with ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’.
What separates a package from a document class is that the commands
in a package are useful across classes while those in a document class
are specific to that class. Thus, a command to set page headers is for
-a package while a command to make the page headers say ‘Memo from the
-SMC Math Department’ is for a class.
-
- Inside of a class or package file you can use the at-sign ‘@’ as a
-character in command names without having to surround the code
-containing that command with ‘\makeatletter’ and ‘\makeatother’. *Note
-\makeatletter & \makeatother::. This allow you to create commands that
-users will not accidentally redefine. Another technique is to preface
-class- or package-specific commands with some string to prevent your
-class or package from interfering with others. For instance, the class
-‘smcmemo’ might have commands ‘\smc@tolist’, ‘\smc@fromlist’, etc.
+a package while a command to make the page headers be ‘Memo from the SMC
+Math Department’ is for a class.
+
+ Inside of a class or package definition you can use the at-sign ‘@’
+as a character in command names without having to surround the code
+containing that command with ‘\makeatletter’ and ‘\makeatother’ (*note
+\makeatletter & \makeatother::). This allows you to create commands
+that users will not accidentally redefine.
+
+ It is also highly desirable to prefix class- or package-specific
+commands with your package name or similar string, to prevent your
+definitions from clashing with those from other packages. For instance,
+the class ‘smcmemo’ might have commands ‘\smc@tolist’, ‘\smc@fromlist’,
+etc.
3.3.1 Class and package structure
---------------------------------
A class file or package file typically has four parts.
+
1. In the “identification part”, the file says that it is a LaTeX
package or class and describes itself, using the ‘\NeedsTeXFormat’
and ‘\ProvidesClass’ or ‘\ProvidesPackage’ commands.
@@ -905,358 +1126,15 @@ file.
It identifies itself, handles the class options via the default of
passing them all to the ‘article’ class, and then loads the ‘article’
-class to provide the basis for this class’s code.
+class to provide the basis for this class's code.
For more, see the official guide for class and package writers, the
-Class Guide, at
-<https://www.latex-project.org/help/documentation/clsguide.pdf> (much of
-the descriptions here derive from this document), or the tutorial
-<https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf>.
-
-3.3.2 Class and package commands
---------------------------------
-
-These are the commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
-
-‘\AtBeginDvi{specials}’
- Save in a box register things that are written to the ‘.dvi’ file
- at the beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document.
-
-‘\AtEndOfClass{CODE}’
-‘\AtEndOfPackage{CODE}’
- Hook to insert CODE to be executed when LaTeX finishes processing
- the current class or package. You can use these hooks multiple
- times; the ‘code’ will be executed in the order that you called it.
- See also *note \AtBeginDocument::.
-
-‘\CheckCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}’
-‘\CheckCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}’
- Like ‘\newcommand’ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::) but does
- not define CMD; instead it checks that the current definition of
- CMD is exactly as given by DEFINITION and is or is not “long” as
- expected. A long command is a command that accepts ‘\par’ within
- an argument. The CMD command is expected to be long with the
- unstarred version of ‘\CheckCommand’. Raises an error when the
- check fails. This allows you to check before you start redefining
- ‘cmd’ yourself that no other package has already redefined this
- command.
-
-‘\ClassError{CLASS NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}’
-‘\ClassWarning{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}’
-‘\ClassWarningNoLine{CLASS NAME}{WARNING TEXT}’
-‘\ClassInfo{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}’
-‘\ClassInfoNoLine{CLASS NAME}{INFO TEXT}’
-‘\PackageError{PACKAGE NAME}{ERROR TEXT}{HELP TEXT}’
-‘\PackageWarning{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}’
-‘\PackageWarningNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING TEXT}’
-‘\PackageInfo{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}’
-‘\PackageInfoNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO TEXT}’
- Produce an error message, or warning or informational messages.
-
- For ‘\ClassError’ and ‘\PackageError’ the message is ERROR TEXT,
- followed by TeX’s ‘?’ error prompt. If the user then asks for help
- by typing ‘h’, they see the HELP TEXT.
-
- The four warning commands are similar except that they write
- WARNING TEXT on the screen with no error prompt. The four info
- commands write INFO TEXT only in the transcript file. The ‘NoLine’
- versions do not show the number of the line generating the message,
- while the other versions do show that number.
-
- To format the messages, including the HELP TEXT: use ‘\protect’ to
- stop a command from expanding, get a line break with
- ‘\MessageBreak’, and get a space with ‘\space’ when a space
- character does not allow it, like after a command. Note that LaTeX
- appends a period to the messages.
-
-‘\CurrentOption’
- Expands to the name of the currently-being-processed option. Can
- only be used within the CODE argument of either ‘\DeclareOption’ or
- ‘\DeclareOption*’.
-
-‘\DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}’
-‘\DeclareOption*{CODE}’
- Make an option available to a user to invoke in their
- ‘\documentclass’ command. For example, the ‘smcmemo’ class could
- have an option ‘\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}’ allowing users to
- put the institutional logo on the first page. The class file must
- contain ‘\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}’ (and later,
- ‘\ProcessOptions’).
-
- If you request an option that has not been declared, by default
- this will produce a warning like ‘Unused global option(s):
- [badoption].’ Change this behavior with the starred version
- ‘\DeclareOption*{CODE}’. For example, many classes extend an
- existing class, using a command such as ‘\LoadClass{article}’, and
- for passing extra options to the underlying class use code such as
- this.
-
- \DeclareOption*{%
- \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
- }
-
- Another example is that the class ‘smcmemo’ may allow users to keep
- lists of memo recipients in external files. Then the user could
- invoke ‘\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}’ and it will read the file
- ‘math.memo’. This code handles the file if it exists and otherwise
- passes the option to the ‘article’ class.
-
- \DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}{}{%
- \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
-
-‘\DeclareRobustCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}’
-‘* \DeclareRobustCommand*{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}’
- Like ‘\newcommand’ and ‘\newcommand*’ (*note \newcommand &
- \renewcommand::) but these declare a robust command, even if some
- code within the DEFINITION is fragile. (For a discussion of robust
- and fragile commands *note \protect::.) Use this command to define
- new robust commands or to redefine existing commands and make them
- robust. Unlike ‘\newcommand’ these do not give an error if macro
- CMD already exists; instead, a log message is put into the
- transcript file if a command is redefined.
-
- Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those
- defined using ‘\newcommand’ so unless the command’s data is fragile
- and the command is used within a moving argument, use
- ‘\newcommand’.
-
- The ‘etoolbox’ package offers the commands ‘\newrobustcmd’,
- ‘\newrobustcmd*’, as well as the commands ‘\renewrobustcmd’,
- ‘\renewrobustcmd*’, and the commands ‘\providerobustcmd’, and
- ‘\providerobustcmd*’. These are similar to ‘\newcommand’,
- ‘\newcommand*’, ‘\renewcommand’, ‘\renewcommand*’,
- ‘\providecommand’, and ‘\providecommand*’, but define a robust CMD
- with two advantages as compared to ‘\DeclareRobustCommand’:
- 1. They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than
- the higher level LaTeX ‘\protect’ mechanism, so they do not
- incur the slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
- 2. They make the same distinction between ‘\new...’, ‘\renew...’,
- and ‘\provide...’, as the standard commands, so they do not
- just make a log message when you redefine CMD that already
- exists, in that case you need to use either ‘\renew...’ or
- ‘\provide...’ or you get an error.
-
-‘\IfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}’
-‘\InputIfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE CODE}{FALSE CODE}’
- Execute TRUE CODE if LaTeX finds the file ‘FILE NAME’ or FALSE CODE
- otherwise. In the first case it executing TRUE CODE and then
- inputs the file. Thus the command
-
- \IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
- \includegraphics{img.pdf}}{\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
-
- will include the graphic ‘img.pdf’ if it is found and otherwise
- give a warning.
-
- This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX
- uses, not only in the current directory. To look only in the
- current directory do something like ‘\IfFileExists{./filename}{TRUE
- CODE}{FALSE CODE}’. If you ask for a filename without a ‘.tex’
- extension then LaTeX will first look for the file by appending the
- ‘.tex’; for more on how LaTeX handles file extensions see *note
- \input::.
-
-‘\LoadClass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
-‘\LoadClassWithOptions{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
- Load a class, as with ‘\documentclass[OPTIONS LIST]{CLASS
- NAME}[RELEASE INFO]’. An example is
- ‘\LoadClass[twoside]{article}’.
-
- The OPTIONS LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
- RELEASE DATE is optional. If present it must have the form
- YYYY/MM/DD.
-
- If you request a RELEASE DATE and the date of the package installed
- on your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the screen and
- in the log like this.
-
- You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
- document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
- Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
-
- The command version ‘\LoadClassWithOptions’ uses the list of
- options for the current class. This means it ignores any options
- passed to it via ‘\PassOptionsToClass’. This is a convenience
- command that lets you build classes on existing ones, such as the
- standard ‘article’ class, without having to track which options
- were passed.
-
-‘\ExecuteOptions{OPTIONS-LIST}’
- For each option OPTION in the OPTIONS-LIST, in order, this command
- executes the command ‘\ds@OPTION’. If this command is not defined
- then that option is silently ignored.
-
- It can be used to provide a default option list before
- ‘\ProcessOptions’. For example, if in a class file you want the
- default to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
- ‘\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax’.
-
-‘\NeedsTeXFormat{FORMAT}[FORMAT DATE]’
- Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often
- issued as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
- ‘\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}’. When a document using that class is
- processed, the format name given here must match the format that is
- actually being run (including that the FORMAT string is case
- sensitive). If it does not match then execution stops with an
- error like ‘This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `xxx'.’
-
- To specify a version of the format that you know to have certain
- features, include the optional FORMAT DATE on which those features
- were implemented. If present it must be in the form ‘YYYY/MM/DD’.
- If the format version installed on your system is earlier than
- FORMAT DATE then you get a warning like this.
-
- You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
- release `2016/02/01' is available.
-
-‘\OptionNotUsed’
- Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be
- used within the CODE argument of either ‘\DeclareOption’ or
- ‘\DeclareOption*’.
-
-‘\PassOptionsToClass{OPTION LIST}{CLASS NAME}’
-‘\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTION LIST}{PACKAGE NAME}’
- Adds the options in the comma-separated list OPTION LIST to the
- options used by any future ‘\RequirePackage’ or ‘\usepackage’
- command for package PACKAGE NAME or the class CLASS NAME.
-
- The reason for these commands is: you may load a package any number
- of times with no options but if you want options then you may only
- supply them when you first load the package. Loading a package
- with options more than once will get you an error like ‘Option
- clash for package foo.’ (LaTeX throws an error even if there is no
- conflict between the options.)
-
- If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can
- collapse that to once, for example replacing the two
- ‘\RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}’ and
- ‘\RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}’ with the single command
- ‘\RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}’.
-
- However, imagine that you are loading ‘firstpkg’ and inside that
- package it loads ‘secondpkg’, and you need the second package to be
- loaded with option ‘draft’. Then before doing the first package
- you must queue up the options for the second package, like this.
-
- \PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
- \RequirePackage{firstpkg}
-
- (If ‘firstpkg.sty’ loads an option in conflict with what you want
- then you may have to alter its source.)
-
- These commands are useful for general users as well as class and
- package writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the
- ‘graphicx’ package with the option ‘draft’ and also wants to use a
- class ‘foo’ that loads the ‘graphicx’ package, but without that
- option. The user could start their LaTeX file with
- ‘\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx}\documentclass{foo}’.
-
-‘\ProcessOptions’
-‘\ProcessOptions*\@OPTIONS’
- Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked.
- Include it in the class file as ‘\ProcessOptions\relax’ (because of
- the existence of the starred command).
-
- Options come in two types. “Local options” have been specified for
- this particular package in the OPTIONS argument of
- ‘\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTIONS}’, ‘\usepackage[OPTIONS]’, or
- ‘\RequirePackage[OPTIONS]’. “Global options” are those given by
- the class user in ‘\documentclass[OPTIONS]’ (If an option is
- specified both locally and globally then it is local.)
-
- When ‘\ProcessOptions’ is called for a package ‘pkg.sty’, the
- following happens:
- 1. For each option OPTION so far declared with ‘\DeclareOption’,
- it looks to see if that option is either a global or a local
- option for ‘pkg’. If so then it executes the declared code.
- This is done in the order in which these options were given in
- ‘pkg.sty’.
- 2. For each remaining local option, it executes the command
- ‘\ds@’OPTION if it has been defined somewhere (other than by a
- ‘\DeclareOption’); otherwise, it executes the default option
- code given in ‘\DeclareOption*’. If no default option code
- has been declared then it gives an error message. This is
- done in the order in which these options were specified.
-
- When ‘\ProcessOptions’ is called for a class it works in the same
- way except that all options are local, and the default CODE for
- ‘\DeclareOption*’ is ‘\OptionNotUsed’ rather than an error.
-
- The starred version ‘\ProcessOptions*’ executes the options in the
- order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order
- of declaration in the class or package. For a package this means
- that the global options are processed first.
-
-‘\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]’
-‘\ProvidesClass{CLASS NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
-‘\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE BRIEF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]’
-‘\ProvidesPackage{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
- Identifies the class or package, printing a message to the screen
- and the log file.
-
- When you load a class or package, for example with
- ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’ or ‘\usepackage{test}’, LaTeX inputs a
- file. If the name of the file does not match the class or package
- name declared in it then you get a warning. Thus, if you invoke
- ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’, and the file ‘smcmemo.cls’ has the
- statement ‘\ProvidesClass{xxx}’ then you get a warning like ‘You
- have requested document class `smcmemo', but the document class
- provides 'xxx'.’ This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
- processing the rest of the class file normally.
-
- If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
- before any spaces, of the form ‘YYYY/MM/DD’. The rest of the
- optional argument is free-form, although it traditionally
- identifies the class, and is written to the screen during
- compilation and to the log file. Thus, if your file ‘smcmemo.cls’
- contains the line ‘\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
- class]’ and your document’s first line is ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’
- then you will see ‘Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo
- class’.
-
- The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to
- ask to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier
- than RELEASE DATE. For instance, a user could enter
- ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]’ or
- ‘\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]’ to require a class or package with
- certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier
- than the given date. (Although, in practice package users only
- rarely include a date, and class users almost never do.)
-
-‘\ProvidesFile{FILENAME}[ADDITIONAL INFORMATION]’
- Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as
- configuration files or font definition files. Put this command in
- that file and you get in the log a string like ‘File: test.config
- 2017/10/12 config file for test.cls’ for FILENAME equal to
- ‘test.config’ and ADDITIONAL INFORMATION equal to ‘2017/10/12
- config file for test.cls’.
-
-‘\RequirePackage[OPTION LIST]{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
-‘\RequirePackageWithOptions{PACKAGE NAME}[RELEASE DATE]’
- Load a package, like the command ‘\usepackage’ (*note Additional
- packages::). The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of
- these commands over Plain TeX’s ‘\input’; see the Class Guide. An
- example is ‘\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}’.
-
- The OPTION LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
- RELEASE DATE, if present, must have the form YYYY/MM/DD. If the
- release date of the package as installed on your system is earlier
- than RELEASE DATE then you get a warning like ‘You have requested,
- on input line 9, version `2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but only
- version `2000/01/01' is available’.
-
- The ‘\RequirePackageWithOptions’ version uses the list of options
- for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to
- it via ‘\PassOptionsToClass’. This is a convenience command to
- allow easily building classes on existing ones without having to
- track which options were passed.
-
- The difference between ‘\usepackage’ and ‘\RequirePackage’ is
- small. The ‘\usepackage’ command is intended for the document file
- while ‘\RequirePackage’ is intended for package and class files.
- Thus, using ‘\usepackage’ before the ‘\documentclass’ command
- causes LaTeX to give error like ‘\usepackage before
- \documentclass’, but you can use ‘\RequirePackage’ there.
+Class Guide, at <https://ctan.org/pkg/clsguide> (much of the description
+here derives from this document), or the tutorial at
+<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb26-3/tb84heff.pdf>.
+
+ *Note Class and package commands::, for some of the commands
+specifically intended for class and package writers.
4 Fonts
*******
@@ -1313,7 +1191,7 @@ character codes to the font glyphs that are used to typeset your output.
engines::). If you use the ‘xelatex’ or ‘lualatex’ engine then instead
use the ‘fontspec’ package.
- TeX’s original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character
+ TeX's original font family, Computer Modern, has a limited character
set. For instance, to make common accented characters you must use
‘\accent’ (*note \accent::) but this disables hyphenation. TeX users
have agreed on a number of standards to access the larger sets of
@@ -1332,17 +1210,17 @@ to directly enter accented characters into your source file.)
blurry or do not magnify well then your fonts may be bitmapped,
sometimes called raster or Type 3. You want vector fonts. Use a
package such as ‘lmodern’ or ‘cm-super’ to get a font that extends
-LaTeX’s default using vector fonts.
+LaTeX's default using vector fonts.
For each FONT_ENCODING given as an option but not already declared,
this package loads the encoding definition files, named
‘FONT_ENCODINGenc.def’. It also sets ‘\encodingdefault’ to be the last
encoding in the option list.
- These are the common values for FONT_ENCODING.
+ These are the common values for FONT_ENCODING:
‘OT1’
- The original encoding for TeX. Limited to mostly English
+ The original 7-bit encoding for TeX. Limited to mostly English
characters.
‘OMS, OML’
@@ -1350,14 +1228,14 @@ encoding in the option list.
‘T1’
TeX text extended. Sometimes called the Cork encoding for the
- Users Group meeting where it was developed. Gives access to most
- European accented characters. The most common option for this
+ users group meeting where it was developed (1990). Gives access to
+ most European accented characters. The most common option for this
package.
‘TS1’
Text Companion encoding.
-LaTeX’s default is to load ‘OML’, ‘T1’, ‘OT1’, and then ‘OMS’, and set
+LaTeX's default is to load ‘OML’, ‘T1’, ‘OT1’, and then ‘OMS’, and set
the default to ‘OT1’.
Even if you do not use accented letters, you may need to specify a
@@ -1368,7 +1246,7 @@ family then you may need to load the package that selects your fonts
before loading ‘fontenc’, to prevent the system from loading any
‘T1’ encoded fonts from the default.
- The LaTeX team reserve encoding names starting with: ‘T’ for the
+ The LaTeX team reserves encoding names starting with: ‘T’ for the
standard text encodings with 256 characters, ‘TS’ for symbols that
extend the corresponding T encodings, ‘X’ for test encodings, ‘M’ for
standard math encodings with 256 characters, ‘A’ for special
@@ -1603,9 +1481,9 @@ Symbols defined in this way are for use in text, not mathematics.
For example, this line from ‘t1enc.def’ declares the number of the
glyph to use for «, the left guillemet.
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemotleft}{T1}{19}
+ \DeclareTextSymbol{\guillemetleft}{T1}{19}
-The command ‘\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{T1}{\char 19}’ has the
+The command ‘\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemetleft}{T1}{\char 19}’ has the
same effect but is slower (*note \DeclareTextCommand &
\ProvideTextCommand::).
@@ -1710,7 +1588,7 @@ form. But shown after it in parenthesis is the corresponding
arguments, as in ‘{\itshape TEXT}’. The scope of the declaration form
lasts until the next type style command or the end of the current group.
In addition, each has an environment form such as
-‘\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}’, which we’ll describe further at the
+‘\begin{itshape}...\end{itshape}’, which we'll describe further at the
end of the section.
These commands, in any of the three forms, are cumulative; for
@@ -1829,9 +1707,9 @@ switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
‘\mathversion{normal}’ restores the default.
Finally, the command ‘\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}’ will typeset so-called
-“old-style” numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
-sometimes widths) from the standard “lining” numerals, which all have
-the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX’s default fonts support
+"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
+sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals, which all have
+the same height as uppercase letters. LaTeX's default fonts support
this, and will respect ‘\textbf’ (but not other styles; there are no
italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other fonts have
old-style numerals also; sometimes package options are provided to make
@@ -1872,7 +1750,7 @@ end of the current group, so you could enclose it in curly braces
Trying to use these commands in math, as with ‘$\small mv^2/2$’,
results in ‘LaTeX Font Warning: Command \small invalid in math mode’,
-and the font size doesn’t change. To work with a too-large formula,
+and the font size doesn't change. To work with a too-large formula,
often the best option is to use the ‘displaymath’ environment (*note
Math formulas::), or one of the environments from the ‘amsmath’ package.
For inline mathematics, such as in a table of formulas, an alternative
@@ -1884,7 +1762,7 @@ also changes a number of other aspects of how mathematics is typeset.
An “environment form” of each of these commands is also defined; for
instance, ‘\begin{tiny}...\end{tiny}’. However, in practice this form
can easily lead to unwanted spaces at the beginning and/or end of the
-environment without careful consideration, so it’s generally less
+environment without careful consideration, so it's generally less
error-prone to stick to the declaration form.
(Aside: Technically, due to the way LaTeX defines ‘\begin’ and
@@ -1904,7 +1782,7 @@ ones.
‘\fontencoding{ENCODING}’
Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There
are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are ‘OT1’,
- Knuth’s original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+ Knuth's original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
‘T1’, also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
(German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows TeX to
@@ -2106,7 +1984,7 @@ following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
‘\dblfloatpagefraction’
For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum
fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of
- blank space. LaTeX’s default is ‘0.5’. Change it with
+ blank space. LaTeX's default is ‘0.5’. Change it with
‘\renewcommand’.
‘\dblfloatsep’
@@ -2126,7 +2004,7 @@ following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
default is ‘2’.
- This example uses ‘\twocolumn’’s optional argument of to create a
+ This example uses ‘\twocolumn’'s optional argument of to create a
title that spans the two-column article:
\documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
@@ -2214,7 +2092,7 @@ option (*note Document class options::).
Width of the current line, decreased for each nested ‘list’ (*note
list::). That is, the nominal value for ‘\linewidth’ is to equal
‘\textwidth’ but for each nested list the ‘\linewidth’ is decreased
- by the sum of that list’s ‘\leftmargin’ and ‘\rightmargin’ (*note
+ by the sum of that list's ‘\leftmargin’ and ‘\rightmargin’ (*note
itemize::).
‘\marginparpush’
@@ -2246,13 +2124,13 @@ option (*note Document class options::).
‘\oddsidemargin’
‘\evensidemargin’
The ‘\oddsidemargin’ length is the extra distance between the left
- side of the page and the text’s left margin, on odd-numbered pages
+ side of the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages
when the document class option ‘twoside’ is chosen and on all pages
when ‘oneside’ is in effect. When ‘twoside’ is in effect, on
even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
‘\evensidemargin’.
- LaTeX’s default is that ‘\oddsidemargin’ is 40% of the difference
+ LaTeX's default is that ‘\oddsidemargin’ is 40% of the difference
between ‘\paperwidth’ and ‘\textwidth’, and ‘\evensidemargin’ is
the remainder.
@@ -2323,14 +2201,14 @@ baseline to baseline.
Ordinarily document authors do not directly change ‘\baselineskip’
while writing. Instead, it is set by the low level font selection
command ‘\fontsize’ (*note low level font commands fontsize::). The
-‘\baselineskip’’s value is reset every time a font change happens and so
+‘\baselineskip’'s value is reset every time a font change happens and so
any direct change to ‘\baselineskip’ would vanish the next time there
was a font switch. For how to influence line spacing, see the
discussion of ‘\baselinestretch’ below.
- Usually, a font’s size and baseline skip is assigned by the font
+ Usually, a font's size and baseline skip is assigned by the font
designer. These numbers are nominal in the sense that if, for instance,
-a font’s style file has the command ‘\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}’ then that
+a font's style file has the command ‘\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}’ then that
does not mean that the characters in the font are 10pt tall; for
instance, parentheses and accented capitals may be taller. Nor does it
mean that if the lines are spaced less than 12pt apart then they risk
@@ -2340,7 +2218,7 @@ touching. Rather these numbers are typographic judgements. (Often, the
The ‘\baselineskip’ is not a property of each line but of the entire
paragraph. As a result, large text in the middle of a paragraph, such
as a single ‘{\Huge Q}’, will be squashed into its line. TeX will make
-sure it doesn’t scrape up against the line above but won’t change the
+sure it doesn't scrape up against the line above but won't change the
‘\baselineskip’ for that one line to make extra room above. For the
fix, use a ‘\strut’ (*note \strut::).
@@ -2361,7 +2239,7 @@ less than ‘\baselineskip’ then TeX inserts vertical glue to make up the
difference. There are two fine points. The first is that if the lines
would be too close together, closer than ‘\lineskiplimit’, then TeX
instead uses ‘\lineskip’ as the interline glue. The second is that TeX
-doesn’t actually use the depth of the previous line. Instead it uses
+doesn't actually use the depth of the previous line. Instead it uses
‘\prevdepth’, which usually contains that depth. But at the beginning
of the paragraph (or any vertical list) or just after a rule,
‘\prevdepth’ has the value -1000pt and this special value tells TeX not
@@ -2386,9 +2264,9 @@ spacing, take FACTOR to be 1.6 and for one-and-a-half spacing use 1.3.
These numbers are rough: for instance, since the ‘\baselineskip’ is
about 1.2 times the font size, multiplying by 1.6 gives a baseline skip
to font size ratio of about 2. (The ‘\linespread’ command is defined as
-‘\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}’ so it also won’t take effect
+‘\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}’ so it also won't take effect
until a font setting happens. But that always takes place at the start
-of a document, so there you don’t need to follow it with ‘\selectfont’.)
+of a document, so there you don't need to follow it with ‘\selectfont’.)
A simpler approach is the ‘setspace’ package. The basic example:
@@ -2442,41 +2320,41 @@ below. The default for both ‘figure’ and ‘table’, in both ‘article’
‘book’ classes, is ‘tbp’.
‘t’
- (Top)—at the top of a text page.
+ (Top)--at the top of a text page.
‘b’
- (Bottom)—at the bottom of a text page. (However, ‘b’ is not
+ (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. (However, ‘b’ is not
allowed for full-width floats (‘figure*’) with double-column
output. To ameliorate this, use the ‘stfloats’ or ‘dblfloatfix’
package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
<https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-2colfloat>.
‘h’
- (Here)—at the position in the text where the ‘figure’ environment
+ (Here)--at the position in the text where the ‘figure’ environment
appears. However, ‘h’ is not allowed by itself; ‘t’ is
automatically added.
- To absolutely force a float to appear “here”, you can
+ To absolutely force a float to appear "here", you can
‘\usepackage{float}’ and use the ‘H’ specifier which it defines.
For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
<https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-figurehere>.
‘p’
- (Page of floats)—on a separate “float page”, which is a page
+ (Page of floats)--on a separate “float page”, which is a page
containing no text, only floats.
‘!’
Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
- page. The ‘!’ specifier does _not_ mean “put the float here”; see
+ page. The ‘!’ specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
above.
Note: the order in which letters appear in the PLACEMENT argument
does not change the order in which LaTeX tries to place the float; for
instance, ‘btp’ has the same effect as ‘tbp’. All that PLACEMENT does
is that if a letter is not present then the algorithm does not try that
-location. Thus, LaTeX’s default of ‘tbp’ is to try every location
+location. Thus, LaTeX's default of ‘tbp’ is to try every location
except placing the float where it occurs in the source.
To prevent LaTeX from moving floats to the end of the document or a
@@ -2551,10 +2429,10 @@ a command of the form ‘\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}’):
The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
<https://www.texfaq.org/FAQ-floats> contains suggestions for relaxing
-LaTeX’s default parameters to reduce the problem of floats being pushed
+LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the problem of floats being pushed
to the end. A full explanation of the float placement algorithm is in
-Frank Mittelbach’s article “How to influence the position of float
-environments like figure and table in LaTeX?”
+Frank Mittelbach's article "How to influence the position of float
+environments like figure and table in LaTeX?"
(<https://www.latex-project.org/publications/2014-FMi-TUB-tb111mitt-float-placement.pdf>).
5.7.1 ‘\caption’
@@ -2645,7 +2523,7 @@ For instance, declare the start of a subsection as with
‘\subsection{Motivation}’.
The table has each SECTIONING-COMMAND in LaTeX. All are available in
-all of LaTeX’s standard document classes ‘book’, ‘report’,
+all of LaTeX's standard document classes ‘book’, ‘report’,
and ‘article’, except that ‘\chapter’ is not available in ‘article’.
Sectioning unit Command Level
@@ -2676,7 +2554,7 @@ TOC-TITLE for these other places.
The level number in the table above determines which sectional units
are numbered, and which appear in the table of contents. If the
-sectioning command’s LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the
+sectioning command's LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the
counter ‘secnumdepth’ then the titles for this sectioning command will
be numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::). And, if LEVEL is less
than or equal to the value of the counter ‘tocdepth’ then the table of
@@ -2706,7 +2584,7 @@ commands.
‘secnumdepth’ is 1 in an ‘article’ then a ‘\section{Introduction}’
command will produce output like ‘1 Introduction’ while
‘\subsection{Discussion}’ will produce output like ‘Discussion’,
- without the number. LaTeX’s default ‘secnumdepth’ is 3 in
+ without the number. LaTeX's default ‘secnumdepth’ is 3 in
‘article’ class and 2 in the ‘book’ and ‘report’ classes.
‘tocdepth’
@@ -2715,7 +2593,7 @@ commands.
sectioning units at LEVEL be the smallest ones listed (*note
\setcounter::). See the above table for the level numbers. For
instance, if ‘tocdepth’ is 1 then the table of contents will list
- sections but not subsections. LaTeX’s default ‘tocdepth’ is 3 in
+ sections but not subsections. LaTeX's default ‘tocdepth’ is 3 in
‘article’ class and 2 in the ‘book’ and ‘report’ classes.
6.1 ‘\part’
@@ -2744,7 +2622,7 @@ LaTeX outputs TITLE, also alone on its line, in bold and in even larger
type. In class ‘book’, the LaTeX default puts each part alone on its
own page. If the book is two-sided then LaTeX will skip a page if
needed to have the new part on an odd-numbered page. In ‘report’ it is
-again alone on a page, but LaTeX won’t force it onto an odd-numbered
+again alone on a page, but LaTeX won't force it onto an odd-numbered
page. In an ‘article’ LaTeX does not put it on a fresh page, but
instead outputs the part number and part title onto the main document
page.
@@ -2818,7 +2696,7 @@ there. This shows the full name in the chapter title,
\chapter[Weyl]{Hermann Klaus Hugo (Peter) Weyl (1885--1955)}
but only ‘Weyl’ on the contents page. This puts a line break in the
-title but that doesn’t work well with running headers so it omits the
+title but that doesn't work well with running headers so it omits the
break in the contents
\chapter[Given it all; my story]{Given it all\\ my story}
@@ -3121,7 +2999,7 @@ Synopsis, one or more of:
Format a ‘book’ class document differently according to which part of
the document is being produced. All three commands are optional.
- Traditionally, a book’s front matter contains such things as the
+ Traditionally, a book's front matter contains such things as the
title page, an abstract, a table of contents, a preface, a list of
notations, a list of figures, and a list of tables. (Some of these
front matter pages, such as the title page, are traditionally not
@@ -3129,7 +3007,7 @@ numbered.) The back matter may contain such things as a glossary,
notes, a bibliography, and an index.
The ‘\frontmatter’ command makes the pages numbered in lowercase
-roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter’s title
+roman, and makes chapters not numbered, although each chapter's title
appears in the table of contents; if you use other sectioning commands
here, use the ‘*’-version (*note Sectioning::).
@@ -3142,7 +3020,7 @@ switches the chapters back to being not numbered.
*Note Larger book template::, for an example using these three
commands.
-6.8 ‘\@startsection’, typesetting sectional unit headings
+6.8 ‘\@startsection’: Typesetting sectional unit headings
=========================================================
Synopsis:
@@ -3152,14 +3030,14 @@ Synopsis:
Used to help redefine the behavior of commands that start sectioning
divisions such as ‘\section’ or ‘\subsection’.
- Note that the ‘titlesec’ package makes manipulation of sectioning
-easier. Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
+ The ‘titlesec’ package makes manipulation of sectioning easier.
+Further, while most requirements for sectioning commands can be
satisfied with ‘\@startsection’, some cannot. For instance, in the
standard LaTeX ‘book’ and ‘report’ classes the commands ‘\chapter’ and
-‘\report’ are not constructed in this way. To make such a command you
+‘\report’ are not constructed using this. To make such a command you
may want to use the ‘\secdef’ command.
- Technically, ‘\@startsection’ has the form
+ The ‘\@startsection’ macro is used like this:
\@startsection{NAME}
{LEVEL}
@@ -3178,7 +3056,7 @@ so that issuing
{STYLE}}
redefines ‘\section’ while keeping its standard calling form
-‘\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}’ (in which, for reminder, the star ‘*’ is
+‘\section*[TOCTITLE]{TITLE}’ (in which, as a reminder, the star ‘*’ is
optional). *Note Sectioning::. This implies that when you write a
command like ‘\renewcommand{\section}{...}’, the ‘\@startsection{...}’
must come last in the definition. See the examples below.
@@ -3188,7 +3066,7 @@ NAME
counter must be defined separately. Most commonly this is either
‘section’, ‘subsection’, or ‘paragraph’. Although in those cases
the counter name is the same as the sectioning command itself, you
- don’t have to use the same name.
+ don't have to use the same name.
Then ‘\the’NAME displays the title number and ‘\’NAME‘mark’ is for
the page headers. See the third example below.
@@ -3201,9 +3079,9 @@ LEVEL
‘secnumdepth’ then titles for this sectioning command will be
numbered (*note Sectioning/secnumdepth::). For instance, if
‘secnumdepth’ is 1 in an ‘article’ then the command
- ‘\section{Introduction}’ will produce output like “1 Introduction”
+ ‘\section{Introduction}’ will produce output like "1 Introduction"
while ‘\subsection{Discussion}’ will produce output like
- “Discussion”, without the number prefix.
+ "Discussion", without the number prefix.
If LEVEL is less than or equal to the value of the counter TOCDEPTH
then the table of contents will have an entry for this sectioning
@@ -3219,11 +3097,11 @@ INDENT
BEFORESKIP
The absolute value of this length is the amount of vertical space
- that is inserted before this sectioning unit’s title. This space
+ that is inserted before this sectioning unit's title. This space
will be discarded if the sectioning unit happens to start at the
beginning of a page. If this number is negative then the first
- paragraph following the header is not indented, if it is
- non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Note that the
+ paragraph following the header is not indented; if it is
+ non-negative then the first paragraph is indented. (Example: the
negative of ‘1pt plus 2pt minus 3pt’ is ‘-1pt plus -2pt minus
-3pt’.)
@@ -3235,7 +3113,7 @@ BEFORESKIP
flexibility in making up the page (*note Lengths::).
The full accounting of the vertical space between the baseline of
- the line prior to this sectioning unit’s header and the baseline of
+ the line prior to this sectioning unit's header and the baseline of
the header is that it is the sum of the ‘\parskip’ of the text
font, the ‘\baselineskip’ of the title font, and the absolute value
of the BEFORESKIP. This space is typically rubber so it may
@@ -3246,7 +3124,7 @@ BEFORESKIP
AFTERSKIP
This is a length. If AFTERSKIP is non-negative then this is the
- vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit’s title header.
+ vertical space inserted after the sectioning unit's title header.
If it is negative then the title header becomes a run-in header, so
that it becomes part of the next paragraph. In this case the
absolute value of the length gives the horizontal space between the
@@ -3259,13 +3137,13 @@ AFTERSKIP
flexibility in putting together the page.
If ‘afterskip’ is non-negative then the full accounting of the
- vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit’s header
+ vertical space between the baseline of the sectioning unit's header
and the baseline of the first line of the following paragraph is
that it is the sum of the ‘\parskip’ of the title font, the
‘\baselineskip’ of the text font, and the value of AFTER. That
space is typically rubber so it may stretch or shrink. (Note that
because the sign of ‘afterskip’ changes the sectioning unit
- header’s from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
+ header's from standalone to run-in, you cannot use a negative
‘afterskip’ to cancel part of the ‘\parskip’.)
STYLE
@@ -3278,7 +3156,7 @@ STYLE
STYLE to ‘\bfseries\MakeUppercase’ would produce titles that are
bold and uppercase.
- These are LaTeX’s defaults for the first three sectioning units that
+ These are LaTeX's defaults for the first three sectioning units that
are defined with ‘\@startsection’, for the ‘article’, ‘book’, and
‘report’ classes.
@@ -3302,7 +3180,7 @@ mode.’ means that you forgot this.) *Note \makeatletter &
\makeatother::.
This will put section titles in large boldface type, centered. It
-says ‘\renewcommand’ because LaTeX’s standard classes have already
+says ‘\renewcommand’ because LaTeX's standard classes have already
defined a ‘\section’. For the same reason it does not define a
‘section’ counter, or the commands ‘\thesection’ and ‘\l@section’.
@@ -3380,10 +3258,10 @@ references changes; you get the same warning and the output contains the
old reference information. In both cases, resolve this by compiling the
document a second time.
- The ‘cleveref’ package enhances LaTeX’s cross referencing features.
+ The ‘cleveref’ package enhances LaTeX's cross referencing features.
You can arrange that if you enter
‘\begin{thm}\label{th:Nerode}...\end{thm}’ then ‘\cref{th:Nerode}’ will
-output ‘Theorem 3.21’, without you having to enter the “Theorem.”
+output ‘Theorem 3.21’, without you having to enter the "Theorem."
7.1 ‘\label’
============
@@ -3476,7 +3354,7 @@ Synopsis:
Produces the number of the sectional unit, equation, footnote,
figure, ..., of the corresponding ‘\label’ command (*note \label::). It
-does not produce any text, such as the word ‘Section’ or ‘Figure’, just
+does not produce any text, such as the word 'Section' or 'Figure', just
the bare number itself.
If there is no ‘\label{KEY}’ then you get something like ‘LaTeX
@@ -3660,7 +3538,7 @@ features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.
is that ‘array’ entries are typeset in math mode, in textstyle (*note
Math styles::) except if the COLS definition specifies the column with
‘p{...}’, which causes the entry to be typeset in text mode. The second
-is that, instead of ‘tabular’’s parameter ‘\tabcolsep’, LaTeX’s
+is that, instead of ‘tabular’'s parameter ‘\tabcolsep’, LaTeX's
intercolumn space in an ‘array’ is governed by ‘\arraycolsep’, which
gives half the width between columns. The default for this is ‘5pt’ so
that between two columns comes 10pt of space.
@@ -3719,7 +3597,7 @@ space between the last two lines.
the School of Environmental Engineering
\end{center}
- In this example, depending on the page’s line width, LaTeX may choose
+ In this example, depending on the page's line width, LaTeX may choose
a line break for the part before the double backslash. If so, it will
center each of the two lines and if not it will center the single line.
Then LaTeX will break at the double backslash, and will center the
@@ -3732,7 +3610,7 @@ ending.
\end{center}
A double backslash after the final line is optional. If present it
-doesn’t add any vertical space.
+doesn't add any vertical space.
In a two-column document the text is centered in a column, not in the
entire page.
@@ -3753,7 +3631,7 @@ or
Center the material in its scope. It is most often used inside an
environment such as ‘figure’, or in a ‘parbox’.
- This example’s ‘\centering’ declaration causes the graphic to be
+ This example's ‘\centering’ declaration causes the graphic to be
horizontally centered.
\begin{figure}
@@ -3765,7 +3643,7 @@ horizontally centered.
The scope of this ‘\centering’ ends with the ‘\end{figure}’.
Unlike the ‘center’ environment, the ‘\centering’ command does not
-add vertical space above and below the text. That’s its advantage in
+add vertical space above and below the text. That's its advantage in
the above example; there is not an excess of space.
It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
@@ -3790,7 +3668,7 @@ Synopsis:
...
\end{description}
- Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item’s LABEL is
+ Environment to make a list of labeled items. Each item's LABEL is
typeset in bold and is flush left, so that long labels continue into the
first line of the item text. There must be at least one item; having
none causes the LaTeX error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
@@ -3858,17 +3736,17 @@ environment (*note equation::).
displayed equation facilities. For example, there are a number of ways
in that package for having math text broken across lines.
- The construct ‘\[MATH\]’ is a synonym for the environment
+ The construct ‘\[ MATH \]’ is a synonym for the environment
‘\begin{displaymath} MATH \end{displaymath}’ but the latter is easier to
work with in the source; for instance, searching for a square bracket
may get false positives but the word ‘displaymath’ will likely be
unique.
- (Aside: The construct ‘$$MATH$$’ from Plain TeX is sometimes
-mistakenly used as a synonym for ‘displaymath’. It is not a synonym,
-and is not officially supported in LaTeX at all; ‘$$’ doesn’t support
-the ‘fleqn’ option (*note Document class options::), has different
-vertical spacing, and doesn’t perform consistency checks.)
+ The construct ‘$$MATH$$’ from Plain TeX is sometimes used as a
+synonym for LaTeX's ‘displaymath’. It is not a synonym, and is not
+officially supported in LaTeX at all; ‘$$’ doesn't support the ‘fleqn’
+option (*note Document class options::), has different vertical spacing,
+and doesn't perform consistency checks.
The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
@@ -3952,7 +3830,7 @@ optional text, which may contain multiple paragraphs.
Enumerations may be nested within other ‘enumerate’ environments, or
within any paragraph-making environment such as ‘itemize’ (*note
-itemize::), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX’s default for the
+itemize::), up to four levels deep. This gives LaTeX's default for the
format at each nesting level, where 1 is the top level, the outermost
level.
@@ -3989,7 +3867,7 @@ with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period.
The ‘eqnarray’ environment is obsolete. It has infelicities, including
spacing that is inconsistent with other mathematics elements. (See
-“Avoid eqnarray!” by Lars Madsen
+"Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). New documents should
include the ‘amsmath’ package and use the displayed mathematics
environments provided there, such as the ‘align’ environment. We
@@ -4052,8 +3930,8 @@ that LaTeX puts an equation number flush to the right margin. The
equation number is generated using the ‘equation’ counter.
You should have no blank lines between ‘\begin{equation}’ and
-‘\begin{equation}’, or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing
-dollar sign.
+‘\end{equation}’, or LaTeX will tell you that there is a missing dollar
+sign.
The package ‘amsmath’ package has extensive displayed equation
facilities. New documents should include this package.
@@ -4080,7 +3958,7 @@ or:
Figures are for material that is not part of the normal text. An
example is material that you cannot have split between two pages, such
as a graphic. Because of this, LaTeX does not typeset figures in
-sequence with normal text but instead “floats” them to a convenient
+sequence with normal text but instead "floats" them to a convenient
place, such as the top of a following page (*note Floats::).
The FIGURE BODY can consist of imported graphics (*note Graphics::),
@@ -4229,7 +4107,7 @@ in a ‘parbox’. For the environment form see *note flushleft::.
Unlike the ‘flushleft’ environment, the ‘\raggedright’ command does
not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
declaration must contain the blank line or ‘\end’ command that ends the
paragraph unit.
@@ -4282,13 +4160,12 @@ a ‘parbox’. For the environment form see *note flushright::.
Unlike the ‘flushright’ environment, the ‘\raggedleft’ command does
not start a new paragraph; it only changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit’s format, the scope of the
+units. To affect a paragraph unit's formatting, the scope of the
declaration must contain the blank line or ‘\end’ command that ends the
paragraph unit.
- For an example related to this environment, see *note \raggedright::,
-where one just have mutatis mutandis to replace ‘\raggedright’ by
-‘\raggedleft’.
+ *Note \raggedright::, for an example related to this environment;
+just replace ‘\raggedright’ there by ‘\raggedleft’.
8.14 ‘itemize’
==============
@@ -4312,8 +4189,8 @@ the LaTeX error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’.
\item Rice portrait
\end{itemize}
-With the default locale—without loading e.g. ‘babel’ package with
-another language than USenglish—as a top-level list each label would
+With the default locale--without loading e.g. ‘babel’ package with
+another language than USenglish--as a top-level list each label would
come out as a bullet, •. The format of the labeling depends on the
nesting level; see below.
@@ -4374,8 +4251,9 @@ within a single item (‘\parskip’ is not list-specific, *note \parindent
\newenvironment{itemize*}%
{\begin{itemize}%
\setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}}%
- \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}}%
+ \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}%
+ \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
+ }%
{\end{itemize}}
8.15 ‘letter’ environment: writing letters
@@ -4461,7 +4339,7 @@ different than the values shown here.) See also the figure that follows
the list. Each is a length (*note Lengths::). The vertical spaces are
normally rubber lengths, with ‘plus’ and ‘minus’ components, to give TeX
flexibility in setting the page. Change each with a command such as
-‘\setlength{itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}’. For some effects these
+‘\setlength{\itemsep}{2pt plus1pt minus1pt}’. For some effects these
lengths should be zero or negative.
‘\itemindent’
@@ -4470,7 +4348,7 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
‘\itemsep’
Vertical space between items, beyond the ‘\parsep’. The defaults
- for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and
+ for the first three levels in LaTeX's ‘article’, ‘book’, and
‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: ‘4pt plus2pt minus1pt’,
‘\parsep’ (that is, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’), and ‘\topsep’ (that
is, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’). The defaults at 11 point are: ‘4.5pt
@@ -4482,7 +4360,7 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
‘\labelsep’
Horizontal space between the label and text of an item. The
- default for LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes is
+ default for LaTeX's ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes is
‘0.5em’.
‘\labelwidth’
@@ -4490,18 +4368,18 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
wide. If ‘\makelabel’ returns text that is wider than this then
the first line of the item will be indented to make room for this
extra material. If ‘\makelabel’ returns text of width less than or
- equal to ‘\labelwidth’ then LaTeX’s default is that the label is
+ equal to ‘\labelwidth’ then LaTeX's default is that the label is
typeset flush right in a box of this width.
The left edge of the label box is
‘\leftmargin’+‘\itemindent’-‘\labelsep’-‘\labelwidth’ from the left
margin of the enclosing environment.
- The default for LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at
+ The default for LaTeX's ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at
the top level is ‘\leftmargini’-‘\labelsep’, (which is ‘2em’ in one
column mode and ‘1.5em’ in two column mode). At the second level
it is ‘\leftmarginii’-‘\labelsep’, and at the third level it is
- ‘\leftmarginiii’-‘\labelsep’. These definitions make the label’s
+ ‘\leftmarginiii’-‘\labelsep’. These definitions make the label's
left edge coincide with the left margin of the enclosing
environment.
@@ -4517,7 +4395,7 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
‘\leftmarginvi’. (Nesting greater than level five generates the
error message ‘Too deeply nested’.)
- The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’,
+ The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's ‘article’,
‘book’, and ‘report’ classes are: ‘\leftmargini’ is ‘2.5em’ (in two
column mode, ‘2em’), ‘\leftmarginii’ is ‘2.2em’, and
‘\leftmarginiii’ is ‘1.87em’.
@@ -4525,12 +4403,12 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
‘\listparindent’
Horizontal space of additional line indentation, beyond
‘\leftmargin’, for second and subsequent paragraphs within a list
- item. A negative value makes this an “outdent”. Its default value
+ item. A negative value makes this an "outdent". Its default value
is ‘0pt’.
‘\parsep’
Vertical space between paragraphs within an item. The defaults for
- the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’
+ the first three levels in LaTeX's ‘article’, ‘book’, and ‘report’
classes at 10 point size are: ‘4pt plus2pt minus1pt’, ‘2pt plus1pt
minus1pt’, and ‘0pt’. The defaults at 11 point size are: ‘4.5pt
plus2pt minus1pt’, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’, and ‘0pt’. The defaults
@@ -4544,7 +4422,7 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
changes spacing at both the top and bottom of the list; whether the
line following the list is blank does not matter.)
- The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’,
+ The defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's ‘article’,
‘book’, and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: ‘2pt plus1
minus1pt’, ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’, and ‘1pt plus0pt minus1pt’. The
defaults at 11 point are: ‘3pt plus1pt minus1pt’, ‘3pt plus1pt
@@ -4560,7 +4438,7 @@ lengths should be zero or negative.
‘\topsep’
Vertical space added to both the top and bottom of the list, in
addition to ‘\parskip’ (*note \parindent & \parskip::). The
- defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX’s ‘article’, ‘book’,
+ defaults for the first three levels in LaTeX's ‘article’, ‘book’,
and ‘report’ classes at 10 point size are: ‘8pt plus2pt minus4pt’,
‘4pt plus2pt minus1pt’, and ‘2pt plus1pt minus1pt’. The defaults
at 11 point are: ‘9pt plus3pt minus5pt’, ‘4.5pt plus2pt minus1pt’,
@@ -4626,11 +4504,11 @@ H4
H5
‘\rightmargin’
- The list’s left and right margins, shown above as H3 and H5, are with
+ The list's left and right margins, shown above as H3 and H5, are with
respect to the ones provided by the surrounding environment, or with
respect to the page margins for a top-level list. The line width used
for typesetting the list items is ‘\linewidth’ (*note Page layout
-parameters::). For instance, set the list’s left margin to be one
+parameters::). For instance, set the list's left margin to be one
quarter of the distance between the left and right margins of the
enclosing environment with ‘\setlength{\leftmargin}{0.25\linewidth}’.
@@ -4723,7 +4601,7 @@ Synopsis:
A restricted version of the list environment, in which margins are
not indented and an ‘\item’ without an optional argument produces no
text. It is most often used in macros, to define an environment where
-the ‘\item’ command is part of the environment’s definition. For
+the ‘\item’ command is part of the environment's definition. For
instance, the ‘center’ environment is defined essentially like this:
\newenvironment{center}
@@ -4812,11 +4690,11 @@ aligns with the surrounding material.
‘t’
Align the baseline of the top line in the ‘minipage’ with the
- baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX’s ‘\vtop’).
+ baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX's ‘\vtop’).
‘b’
Align the baseline of the bottom line in the ‘minipage’ with the
- baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX’s ‘\vbox’).
+ baseline of the surrounding text (plain TeX's ‘\vbox’).
To see the effects of these, contrast running this
@@ -4828,7 +4706,7 @@ with the results of changing ‘c’ to ‘b’ or ‘t’.
The optional argument HEIGHT is a rigid length (*note Lengths::). It
sets the height of the ‘minipage’. You can enter any value larger than,
-or equal to, or smaller than the ‘minipage’’s natural height and LaTeX
+or equal to, or smaller than the ‘minipage’'s natural height and LaTeX
will not give an error or warning. You can also set it to a height of
zero or a negative value.
@@ -4850,7 +4728,7 @@ is the value of POSITION).
stretchable space.
The INNER-POS argument makes sense when the HEIGHT option is set to a
-value larger than the ‘minipage’’s natural height. To see the effect of
+value larger than the ‘minipage’'s natural height. To see the effect of
the options, run this example with the various choices in place of ‘b’.
Text before
@@ -4933,7 +4811,7 @@ or
PICTURE COMMAND
\end{picture}
-Where there may be any number of PICTURE COMMAND’s.
+Where there may be any number of PICTURE COMMAND's.
An environment to create simple pictures containing lines, arrows,
boxes, circles, and text. This environment is not obsolete, but new
@@ -4941,7 +4819,7 @@ documents typically use much more powerful graphics creation systems,
such as TikZ, PSTricks, MetaPost, or Asymptote. None of these are
covered in this document; see CTAN.
- To start, here’s an example showing the parallelogram law for adding
+ To start, here's an example showing the parallelogram law for adding
vectors.
\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
@@ -4959,7 +4837,7 @@ positive real numbers (WIDTH,HEIGHT). Multiply these by the value
‘\unitlength’ to get the nominal size of the output, i.e. the space that
LaTeX reserves on the output page. This nominal size need not be how
large the picture really is; LaTeX will draw things from the picture
-outside the picture’s box.
+outside the picture's box.
This environment also has an optional argument (XOFFSET,YOFFSET). It
is used to shift the origin. Unlike most optional arguments, this one
@@ -4973,7 +4851,7 @@ point at the lower-left corner of the picture.
\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
produces a box of width 100 millimeters and height 200 millimeters. The
-picture’s origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
+picture's origin is the point (10mm,20mm) and so the lower-left corner
is there, and the upper-right corner is at (110mm,220mm). When you
first draw a picture you typically omit the optional argument, leaving
the origin at the lower-left corner. If you then want to modify your
@@ -4988,7 +4866,7 @@ length in multiples of the unit length ‘\unitlength’, so if
‘\unitlength’ has been set to ‘1cm’, then the coordinate ‘2.54’
specifies a length of 2.54 centimeters.
- LaTeX’s default for ‘\unitlength’ is ‘1pt’. It is a rigid length
+ LaTeX's default for ‘\unitlength’ is ‘1pt’. It is a rigid length
(*note Lengths::). Change it with the ‘\setlength’ command (*note
\setlength::). Make this change only outside of a ‘picture’
environment.
@@ -5044,7 +4922,7 @@ exact location. For example:
The red X will be precisely a quarter of the ‘\textwidth’ from the left
margin, and ‘0.35\textwidth’ up from the bottom of the picture. Another
example of this usage is to put similar code in the page header to get
-repeat material on each of a document’s pages.
+repeat material on each of a document's pages.
8.19.1 ‘\put’
-------------
@@ -5105,8 +4983,8 @@ line at (X3,Y3).
\qbezier(1,1)(1.25,0.75)(1,0)
-The curve’s tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
-curve’s tangent line at (1,0).
+The curve's tangent line at (1,1) contains (1.25,0.75), as does the
+curve's tangent line at (1,0).
The optional argument NUM gives the number of calculated intermediate
points. The default is to draw a smooth curve whose maximum number of
@@ -5135,7 +5013,7 @@ Synopsis:
\graphpaper(X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
\graphpaper[SPACING](X_INIT,Y_INIT)(X_DIMEN,Y_DIMEN)
- Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the ‘graphpap’ package. The grid’s
+ Draw a coordinate grid. Requires the ‘graphpap’ package. The grid's
origin is ‘(X_INIT,Y_INIT)’. Grid lines come every SPACING units (the
default is 10). The grid extends X_DIMEN units to the right and Y_DIMEN
units up. All arguments must be positive integers.
@@ -5159,8 +5037,8 @@ Synopsis:
\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}
Draw a line. It slopes such that it vertically rises Y_RISE for
-every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change—it is
-not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special
+every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the total horizontal change--it
+is not the length of the vector, it is the change in x. In the special
case of vertical lines, where (X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), the TRAVEL gives the
change in y.
@@ -5176,8 +5054,8 @@ length of the line, it is the change in x.
The arguments X_RUN and Y_RISE are integers that can be positive,
negative, or zero. (If both are 0 then LaTeX treats the second as 1.)
With ‘\put(X_INIT,Y_INIT){\line(X_RUN,Y_RISE){TRAVEL}}’, if X_RUN is
-negative then the line’s ending point has a first coordinate that is
-less than X_INIT. If Y_RISE is negative then the line’s ending point
+negative then the line's ending point has a first coordinate that is
+less than X_INIT. If Y_RISE is negative then the line's ending point
has a second coordinate that is less than Y_INIT.
If TRAVEL is negative then you get ‘LaTeX Error: Bad \line or \vector
@@ -5321,7 +5199,7 @@ is smaller than that between the third and last row. You can adjust row
heights and depths either by putting in the usual interline spacing with
‘\shortstack{X\\ \strut o\\o\\X}’ (*note \strut::), or explicitly, via
an zero-width box ‘\shortstack{X \\ \rule{0pt}{12pt} o\\o\\X}’ or by
-using ‘\\’’s optional argument ‘\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}’.
+using ‘\\’'s optional argument ‘\shortstack{X\\[2pt] o\\o\\X}’.
The ‘\shortstack’ command is also available outside the ‘picture’
environment.
@@ -5335,7 +5213,7 @@ Synopsis:
Draw a line ending in an arrow. The slope of that line is: it
vertically rises Y_RISE for every horizontal X_RUN. The TRAVEL is the
-total horizontal change—it is not the length of the vector, it is the
+total horizontal change--it is not the length of the vector, it is the
change in x. In the special case of vertical vectors, if
(X_RUN,Y_RISE)=(0,1), then TRAVEL gives the change in y.
@@ -5458,7 +5336,7 @@ and height RECT-HEIGHT units.
\put(0,0){\dashbox{0.1}(5,0.5){My hovercraft is full of eels.}}
-Each dash will be ‘0.1\unitlength’ long, the box’s width is
+Each dash will be ‘0.1\unitlength’ long, the box's width is
‘5\unitlength’ and its height is ‘0.5\unitlength’.
As in that example, a dashed box looks best when RECT-WIDTH and
@@ -5582,12 +5460,12 @@ They are all fragile (*note \protect::).
Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
i.e., everything from the most recent ‘\>’, ‘\<’, ‘\'’, ‘\\’, or
‘\kill’ command, to the previous column and aligned to the right,
- flush against the current column’s tab stop.
+ flush against the current column's tab stop.
‘\` (tabbing)’
Allows you to put text flush right against any tab stop, including
- tab stop 0. However, it can’t move text to the right of the last
- column because there’s no tab stop there. The ‘\`’ command moves
+ tab stop 0. However, it can't move text to the right of the last
+ column because there's no tab stop there. The ‘\`’ command moves
all the text that follows it, up to the ‘\\’ or ‘\end{tabbing}’
command that ends the line, to the right margin of the ‘tabbing’
environment. There must be no ‘\>’ or ‘\'’ command between the
@@ -5730,7 +5608,7 @@ illustrates many of the features.
\end{tabular}
The output will have two left-aligned columns with a vertical bar
-between them. This is specified in ‘tabular’’s argument ‘{l|l}’. Put
+between them. This is specified in ‘tabular’'s argument ‘{l|l}’. Put
the entries into different columns by separating them with an ampersand,
‘&’. The end of each row is marked with a double backslash, ‘\\’. Put
a horizontal rule below a row, after a double backslash, with ‘\hline’.
@@ -5740,7 +5618,7 @@ follows to put a rule below the table.
The required and optional arguments to ‘tabular’ consist of:
POS
- Optional. Specifies the table’s vertical position. The default is
+ Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is
to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of
the surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: ‘t’
aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the
@@ -5773,7 +5651,7 @@ COLS
(*note \protect::).
If between two column specifiers there is no @-expression then
- LaTeX’s ‘book’, ‘article’, and ‘report’ classes will put on
+ LaTeX's ‘book’, ‘article’, and ‘report’ classes will put on
either side of each column a space of width ‘\tabcolsep’,
which by default is 6pt. That is, by default adjacent columns
are separated by 12pt (so ‘\tabcolsep’ is misleadingly named
@@ -5907,7 +5785,7 @@ spanned by the single heading ‘Name’.
‘\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}’ the parts are ‘|r|’, ‘c’, ‘c’,
and ‘p{1.5in}|’.
- The COLS argument overrides the ‘array’ or ‘tabular’ environment’s
+ The COLS argument overrides the ‘array’ or ‘tabular’ environment's
intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn entry. To affect
that area, this argument can contain vertical bars ‘|’ indicating the
placement of vertical rules, and ‘@{...}’ expressions. Thus if COLS is
@@ -5928,7 +5806,7 @@ bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical rule;
although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the second
COLS does have a starting one. Between entry two and entry three there
is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
-surrounding ‘multicolumn’’s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
+surrounding ‘multicolumn’'s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
rule. Between entry three and entry four there is no vertical rule; the
default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three ‘\multicolumn’
leaves it out, and that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four
@@ -5936,7 +5814,7 @@ there is a vertical rule because of the default.
The number of spanned columns NUMCOLS can be 1. Besides giving the
ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
-override for one row the ‘tabular’ definition’s default intercolumn area
+override for one row the ‘tabular’ definition's default intercolumn area
specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
In the example below, in the ‘tabular’ definition the first column is
@@ -5957,25 +5835,25 @@ center those two columns on the page range en-dash.
Although the ‘tabular’ specification by default puts a vertical rule
between the first and second columns, no such vertical rule appears in
-the first row here. That’s because there is no vertical bar in the COLS
-part of the first row’s first ‘\multicolumn’ command.
+the first row here. That's because there is no vertical bar in the COLS
+part of the first row's first ‘\multicolumn’ command.
8.23.2 ‘\vline’
---------------
Draw a vertical line in a ‘tabular’ or ‘array’ environment extending the
-full height and depth of an entry’s row. Can also be used in an
+full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be used in an
@-expression, although its synonym vertical bar ‘|’ is more common.
-This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table’s
-vertical lines are specified in ‘tabular’’s COLS argument and overridden
+This command is rarely used in the body of a table; typically a table's
+vertical lines are specified in ‘tabular’'s COLS argument and overridden
as needed with ‘\multicolumn’ (*note tabular::).
- The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row’s
+ The example below illustrates some pitfalls. In the first row's
second entry the ‘\hfill’ moves the ‘\vline’ to the left edge of the
cell. But that is different than putting it halfway between the two
columns, so between the first and second columns there are two vertical
rules, with the one from the ‘{c|cc}’ specifier coming before the one
-produced by the ‘\vline\hfill’. In contrast, the first row’s third
+produced by the ‘\vline\hfill’. In contrast, the first row's third
entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two columns. In
the second row, the ‘ghi’ is the widest entry in its column so in the
‘\vline\hfill’ the ‘\hfill’ has no effect and the vertical line in that
@@ -6012,13 +5890,13 @@ height.
---------------
Draw a horizontal line the width of the enclosing ‘tabular’ or ‘array’
-environment. It’s most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
+environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
and between the rows of a table.
In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one
above the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a
single rule spanning both columns. Because of the ‘\hline’, the
-‘tabular’ second row’s line ending double backslash ‘\\’ is required.
+‘tabular’ second row's line ending double backslash ‘\\’ is required.
\begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
Baseball &Red Sox \\
@@ -6070,7 +5948,7 @@ tradition is to use ‘9’ for bibliographies with less than 10 references,
To change it there are two cases. In the ‘book’ and ‘report’ classes,
where the top level sectioning is ‘\chapter’ and the default title is
‘Bibliography’, that title is in the macro ‘\bibname’. For ‘article’,
-where the class’s top level sectioning is ‘\section’ and the default is
+where the class's top level sectioning is ‘\section’ and the default is
‘References’, the title is in macro ‘\refname’. Change it by redefining
the command, as with ‘\renewcommand{\refname}{Cited references}’, after
‘\begin{document}’.
@@ -6211,14 +6089,14 @@ sophisticated approach to managing bibliographies is provided by the
BibTeX program. This is only an introduction; see the full
documentation on CTAN (*note CTAN::).
- With BibTeX, you don’t use the ‘thebibliography’ environment directly
+ With BibTeX, you don't use the ‘thebibliography’ environment directly
(*note thebibliography::). Instead, include these lines:
\bibliographystyle{BIBSTYLE}
\bibliography{BIBFILE1, BIBFILE2, ...}
The BIBSTYLE refers to a file ‘BIBSTYLE.bst’, which defines how your
-citations will look. The standard BIBSTYLE’s distributed with BibTeX
+citations will look. The standard BIBSTYLE's distributed with BibTeX
are:
‘alpha’
@@ -6257,7 +6135,7 @@ that format.
}
Only the bibliographic entries referred to via ‘\cite’ and ‘\nocite’
-will be listed in the document’s bibliography. Thus you can keep all
+will be listed in the document's bibliography. Thus you can keep all
your sources together in one file, or a small number of files, and rely
on BibTeX to include in this document only those that you used.
@@ -6393,16 +6271,18 @@ already be converted to a token list along the catcode regime in effect
when the macro was called. However, the ‘cprotect’ package can help
with this.
- One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. There
-are packages that are an improvement the ‘verbatim’ environment. For
-instance, one improvement is to allow the verbatim inclusion of external
-files, or parts of those files. Such packages include ‘listings’, and
-‘minted’.
+ One common use of verbatim input is to typeset computer code. Some
+packages offer many features not provided by the ‘verbatim’ environment;
+two of the most popular are ‘listings’ and ‘minted’. For example, they
+are capable of pretty-printing, line numbering, and selecting parts of
+files for a continuing listing.
A package that provides many more options for verbatim environments
is ‘fancyvrb’. Another is ‘verbatimbox’.
- For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (*note CTAN::).
+ For a list of all the relevant packages, see CTAN (*note CTAN::),
+particularly the topics ‘listing’ (<https://ctan.org/topic/listing>) and
+‘verbatim’ (<https://ctan.org/topic/verbatim>).
8.27.1 ‘\verb’
--------------
@@ -6424,9 +6304,9 @@ The first ‘\verb’ has its LITERAL-TEXT surrounded with exclamation
point, ‘!’. The second instead uses plus, ‘+’, because the exclamation
point is part of ‘literal-text’.
- The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT—it must be
-the same character before and after. No spaces come between ‘\verb’ or
-‘\verb*’ and CHAR, or between CHAR and LITERAL-TEXT, or between
+ The single-character delimiter CHAR surrounds LITERAL-TEXT--it must
+be the same character before and after. No spaces come between ‘\verb’
+or ‘\verb*’ and CHAR, or between CHAR and LITERAL-TEXT, or between
LITERAL-TEXT and the second occurrence of CHAR (the synopsis shows a
space only to distinguish one component from the other). The delimiter
must not appear in LITERAL-TEXT. The LITERAL-TEXT cannot include a line
@@ -6443,9 +6323,6 @@ word ‘with’:
For typesetting Internet addresses, urls, the package ‘url’ is a
better option than the ‘\verb’ command, since it allows line breaks.
- For computer code there are many packages with advantages over
-‘\verb’. One is ‘listings’, another is ‘minted’.
-
You cannot use ‘\verb’ in the argument to a macro, for instance in
the argument to a ‘\section’. It is not a question of ‘\verb’ being
fragile (*note \protect::), instead it just cannot work, as the ‘\verb’
@@ -6468,7 +6345,7 @@ Synopsis:
An environment for poetry.
- Here are two lines from Shakespeare’s Romeo and Juliet.
+ Here are two lines from Shakespeare's Romeo and Juliet.
Then plainly know my heart's dear love is set \\
On the fair daughter of rich Capulet.
@@ -6534,8 +6411,8 @@ The starred form, ‘\\*’, tells LaTeX not to start a new page between the
two lines, by issuing a ‘\nobreak’.
Explicit line breaks in the main text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
-particular, don’t start new paragraphs with ‘\\’. Instead leave a blank
-line between the two paragraphs. And don’t put in a sequence of ‘\\’’s
+particular, don't start new paragraphs with ‘\\’. Instead leave a blank
+line between the two paragraphs. And don't put in a sequence of ‘\\’'s
to make vertical space. Instead use ‘\vspace{LENGTH}’, or
‘\leavevmode\vspace{LENGTH}’, or ‘\vspace*{LENGTH}’ if you want the
space to not be thrown out at the top of a new page (*note \vspace::).
@@ -6581,7 +6458,7 @@ command restores normal line-breaking behavior.
This is not the way to show verbatim text or computer code. Use
‘verbatim’ (*note verbatim::) instead.
- With LaTeX’s usual defaults, this
+ With LaTeX's usual defaults, this
aaa
bbb
@@ -6668,7 +6545,18 @@ require that it break there. You can force a split with something like
‘Hef-\linebreak feron’. Of course, if you later change the text then
this forced break may look out of place, so this approach requires care.
-9.5 ‘\discretionary’ (generalized hyphenation point)
+9.5 ‘\slash’: breakable ‘/’
+===========================
+
+The ‘\slash’ command produces a ‘/’ character and then a penalty of the
+same value as an explicit ‘-’ character (‘\exhyphenpenalty’). This
+allows TeX to break a line at the ‘/’, similar to a hyphen. Hyphenation
+is allowed in the word part preceding the ‘/’, but not after. For
+example:
+
+ The input\slash output of the program is complicated.
+
+9.6 ‘\discretionary’ (generalized hyphenation point)
====================================================
Synopsis:
@@ -6684,14 +6572,14 @@ POST-BREAK at the start of the next line. If there is no line break
here then TeX puts NO-BREAK.
In ‘difficult’ the three letters ‘ffi’ form a ligature. But TeX can
-nonetheless break between the two ‘f’’s with this.
+nonetheless break between the two ‘f’'s with this.
di\discretionary{f-}{fi}{ffi}cult
Note that users do not have to do this. It is typically handled
-automatically by TeX’s hyphenation algorithm.
+automatically by TeX's hyphenation algorithm.
-9.6 ‘\fussy’ & ‘\sloppy’
+9.7 ‘\fussy’ & ‘\sloppy’
========================
Declarations to make TeX more picky or less picky about line breaking.
@@ -6705,7 +6593,7 @@ at the blank line or ‘\par’ or displayed equation ending that paragraph.
So to affect the line breaks, include that paragraph-ending material in
the scope of the command.
-9.6.1 ‘sloppypar’
+9.7.1 ‘sloppypar’
-----------------
Synopsis:
@@ -6733,7 +6621,7 @@ Synopsis:
there were anyone at leisure to answer her or not.
\end{sloppypar}
-9.7 ‘\hyphenation’
+9.8 ‘\hyphenation’
==================
Synopsis:
@@ -6742,17 +6630,17 @@ Synopsis:
Declares allowed hyphenation points within the words in the list.
The words in that list are separated by spaces. Show permitted points
-for hyphenation with a dash character, ‘-’.
+for hyphenation with an ASCII dash character, ‘-’.
Here is an example:
\hyphenation{hat-er il-lit-e-ra-ti tru-th-i-ness}
Use lowercase letters. TeX will only hyphenate if the word matches
-exactly, no inflections are tried. Multiple ‘\hyphenation’ commands
+exactly; no inflections are tried. Multiple ‘\hyphenation’ commands
accumulate.
-9.8 ‘\linebreak’ & ‘\nolinebreak’
+9.9 ‘\linebreak’ & ‘\nolinebreak’
=================================
Synopses, one of:
@@ -6792,7 +6680,7 @@ with its usual aplomb. But if you are writing commands, or tweaking the
final version of a document, then you may need to understand how to
influence its actions.
- LaTeX’s algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
+ LaTeX's algorithm for splitting a document into pages is more complex
than just waiting until there is enough material to fill a page and
outputting the result. Instead, LaTeX typesets more material than would
fit on the page and then chooses a break that is optimal in some way (it
@@ -6807,9 +6695,9 @@ extra line falls on the second page). Another example is where LaTeX
uses available vertical shrinkage to fit on a page not just the header
for a new section but also the first two lines of that section.
- But LaTeX does not optimize over the entire document’s set of page
+ But LaTeX does not optimize over the entire document's set of page
breaks. So it can happen that the first page break is great but the
-second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn’t look as far
+second one is lousy; to break the current page LaTeX doesn't look as far
ahead as the next page break. So occasionally you may want to influence
page breaks while preparing a final version of a document.
@@ -6834,7 +6722,7 @@ content a right-hand page, an odd-numbered page, if necessary inserting
a blank page. The ‘\clearpage’ command is robust while
‘\cleardoublepage’ is fragile (*note \protect::).
- LaTeX’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+ LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
commands.
@@ -6848,7 +6736,7 @@ this command.
{\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
}
-If you want LaTeX’s standard ‘\chapter’ command to do this then add the
+If you want LaTeX's standard ‘\chapter’ command to do this then add the
line ‘\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage’. (Of course this
affects all uses of ‘\cleardoublepage’, not just the one in ‘\chapter’.)
@@ -6866,7 +6754,7 @@ Synopsis:
End the current page. This command is robust (*note \protect::).
- LaTeX’s page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
+ LaTeX's page breaks are optimized so ordinarily you only use this
command in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
commands.
@@ -6935,7 +6823,7 @@ prevent the break. But for instance ‘\nopagebreak[1]’ suggests to LaTeX
that another spot might be preferable. The higher the number, the more
insistent the request. Both commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
- LaTeX’s page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use these
+ LaTeX's page endings are optimized so ordinarily you only use these
commands in a document body to polish the final version, or inside
commands.
@@ -6956,11 +6844,10 @@ strange, and if ‘\flushbottom’ is in effect this can cause you to get
‘Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has occurred while \output is active’.
*Note \newpage::, for a command that does not have these effects.
- (There is an obsolete declaration ‘\samepage’, which tries to only
-allow a break between two paragraphs. There is a related environment
-‘samepage’, also obsolete. Neither of these work reliably. For more on
-keeping material on the same page, see the FAQ entry
-<https://texfaq.org/FAQ-nopagebrk>.)
+ A declaration ‘\samepage’ and corresponding ‘samepage’ environment
+try to only allow breaks between paragraphs. They are not perfectly
+reliable. For more on keeping material on the same page, see the FAQ
+entry <https://texfaq.org/FAQ-nopagebrk>.)
11 Footnotes
************
@@ -6989,7 +6876,8 @@ Synopsis, one of:
\footnote{TEXT}
\footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}
- Place a footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page.
+ Place a footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page, with a
+footnote marker at the current position in the text.
There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
\textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{%
@@ -7014,12 +6902,16 @@ you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
‘\footnoterule’
Produces the rule separating the main text on a page from the
- page’s footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document
- classes (except ‘slides’, where it does not appear) is: vertical
+ page's footnotes. Default dimensions in the standard document
+ classes (except ‘slides’, where it does not appear) are: vertical
thickness of ‘0.4pt’, and horizontal size of ‘0.4\columnwidth’
long. Change the rule with something like this.
- \renewcommand{\footnoterule}{% Kerns avoid vertical space
+ % \footnoterule is expanded in vertical mode, thus \kern
+ % commands ensure that no vertical space is created,
+ % and the rule is separated vertically with 2pt
+ % above the note text.
+ \renewcommand*{\footnoterule}{%
\kern -3pt % This -3 is negative
\hrule width \textwidth height 1pt % of the sum of this 1
\kern 2pt} % and this 2
@@ -7034,7 +6926,7 @@ you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
The ‘\footnote’ command is fragile (*note \protect::).
- LaTeX’s default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+ LaTeX's default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
‘\footnote’; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
sectioning command such as ‘\chapter’ (it can only be used in outer
paragraph mode; *note Modes::). There are some workarounds; see
@@ -7072,7 +6964,8 @@ footnote markers referring to the same footnote.
If there are intervening footnotes then you must remember the value
of the number of the common mark. This example gives the same
institutional affiliation to both the first and third authors (‘\thanks’
-is a version of ‘\footnote’), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
+is a version of ‘\footnote’), by explicitly specifying the number of the
+footnote (‘1’).
\title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
\author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
@@ -7081,17 +6974,6 @@ is a version of ‘\footnote’), by-hand giving the number of the footnote.
\begin{document}
\maketitle
- This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third
-sentence is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
-
- \newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
- All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
- Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
- Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
- Captain Hook.}
- Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
- Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
-
This example accomplishes the same by using the package ‘cleveref’.
\usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % in preamble
@@ -7103,6 +6985,17 @@ sentence is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
It will work with the package ‘hyperref’.
+ This uses a counter to remember the footnote number. The third
+sentence is followed by the same footnote marker as the first.
+
+ \newcounter{footnoteValueSaver}
+ All babies are illogical.\footnote{%
+ Lewis Carroll.}\setcounter{footnoteValueSaver}{\value{footnote}}
+ Nobody is despised who can manage a crocodile.\footnote{%
+ Captain Hook.}
+ Illogical persons are despised.\footnotemark[\value{footnoteValueSaver}]
+ Therefore, anyone who can manage a crocodile is not a baby.
+
11.3 ‘\footnotetext’
====================
@@ -7130,7 +7023,7 @@ causes the footnote to appear at the bottom of the page where the
section starts, as usual, but also at the bottom of the table of
contents, where it is not likely to be desired. The simplest way to
have it not appear on the table of contents is to use the optional
-argument to ‘\section’
+argument to ‘\section’.
\section[Please]{Please\footnote{%
Don't footnote in chapter and section headers!}}
@@ -7185,7 +7078,7 @@ of the regular footnote sequence, use the ‘\footnotemark’ and
Little is known other than her death.}%
\stepcounter{mpFootnoteValueSaver}%
\footnotetext[\value{mpFootnoteValueSaver}]{%
- Relationship is unresolved in XXI.}
+ Relationship is unresolved.}
\end{center}
For a floating ‘table’ environment (*note table::), use the
@@ -7213,7 +7106,7 @@ other footnotes.
Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
-‘bigfoot’ extends LaTeX’s default footnote mechanism in many ways,
+‘bigfoot’ extends LaTeX's default footnote mechanism in many ways,
including allow these two, as in this example.
\usepackage{bigfoot} % in preamble
@@ -7241,7 +7134,7 @@ Synopses, one of (three regular forms, three starred forms):
\newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS]{DEFN}
\newcommand*{\CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
-or all the same possibilities with ‘\renewcommand’ instead of
+or the same six possibilities with ‘\renewcommand’ instead of
‘\newcommand’:
\renewcommand{\CMD}{DEFN}
@@ -7255,8 +7148,9 @@ or all the same possibilities with ‘\renewcommand’ instead of
*note Class and package commands::).
The starred form of these two forbids the arguments from containing
-multiple paragraphs of text (in plain TeX terms: the commands are not
-‘\long’). With the default form, arguments can be multiple paragraphs.
+multiple paragraphs of text (i.e., a ‘\par’ token; in plain TeX terms:
+the commands are not ‘\long’). With the default form, arguments can be
+multiple paragraphs.
These are the parameters (examples follow):
@@ -7399,7 +7293,7 @@ whitespace in the output (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand:: and *note
simply print ‘Hello!’ (if you use the Emacs info viewer, turn on the
‘whitespace-mode’ minor mode to see the trailing spaces):
- Hel\relax
+ Hel\relax
lo!
This is because blanks after ‘\relax’, including the newline, are
@@ -7457,7 +7351,7 @@ backslash, followed by letters, category 11 characters (except that a
command name can also consist of a category 0 character followed by a
single non-letter symbol).
- LaTeX’s source code has the convention that some commands use ‘@’ in
+ LaTeX's source code has the convention that some commands use ‘@’ in
their name. These commands are mainly intended for package or class
writers. The convention prevents authors who are just using a package
or class from accidentally replacing such a command with one of their
@@ -7465,7 +7359,7 @@ own, because by default the at-sign has catcode 12.
Use the pair ‘\makeatletter’ and ‘\makeatother’ inside a ‘.tex’ file,
typically in the preamble, when you are defining or redefining commands
-named with ‘@’, by having them surround your definition. Don’t use
+named with ‘@’, by having them surround your definition. Don't use
these inside ‘.sty’ or ‘.cls’ files since the ‘\usepackage’ and
‘\documentclass’ commands already arrange that the at-sign has the
character code of a letter, catcode 11.
@@ -7524,7 +7418,7 @@ will return "not starry blue sky" while ‘\ciel*{night}’ will return
\makeatother
In the next example, the starred variant takes a different number of
-arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007’s
+arguments than the unstarred one. With this definition, Agent 007's
‘``My name is \agentsecret*{Bond}, \agentsecret{James}{Bond}.''’ is
equivalent to entering the commands ‘``My name is \textsc{Bond},
\textit{James} textsc{Bond}.''’
@@ -7734,7 +7628,7 @@ defined. Or name \end... illegal, see p.192 of the manual’. If you try
to redefine an environment and the name has not yet been used then you
get something like ‘LaTeX Error: Environment hank undefined.’.
- This example gives an environment like LaTeX’s ‘quotation’ except
+ This example gives an environment like LaTeX's ‘quotation’ except
that it will be set in smaller type.
\newenvironment{smallquote}{%
@@ -7761,7 +7655,7 @@ environment that cites the author.
\end{quotation}
}
-The author’s name is optional, and defaults to ‘Shakespeare’. In the
+The author's name is optional, and defaults to ‘Shakespeare’. In the
document, use the environment like this.
\begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
@@ -7827,7 +7721,7 @@ TITLE
NUMBERED_WITHIN
Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a
sectional unit such as ‘chapter’ or ‘section’. When the
- NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment’s
+ NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment's
counter will also be reset.
If this optional argument is not used then the command ‘\theNAME’
@@ -7855,7 +7749,7 @@ results in ‘Definition 1’ and ‘Definition 2’ in the output.
\end{defn}
This example has the same document body as the prior one. But here
-‘\newtheorem’’s optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN is given as ‘section’,
+‘\newtheorem’'s optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN is given as ‘section’,
so the output is like ‘Definition 1.1’ and ‘Definition 2.1’.
\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
@@ -7911,9 +7805,9 @@ backslash, ‘\’.
The FONT DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional “at
clause”. LaTeX will look on your system for a file named
‘FONTNAME.tfm’. The at clause can have the form either ‘at DIMEN’ or
-‘scaled FACTOR’, where a FACTOR of ‘1000’ means no scaling. For LaTeX’s
+‘scaled FACTOR’, where a FACTOR of ‘1000’ means no scaling. For LaTeX's
purposes, all this does is scale all the character and other font
-dimensions relative to the font’s design size, which is a value defined
+dimensions relative to the font's design size, which is a value defined
in the ‘.tfm’ file.
This defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few characters in
@@ -7928,53 +7822,59 @@ each.
================
All LaTeX commands are either “fragile” or “robust”. A fragile command
-can break when it is used in the argument to certain other commands.
-Commands that contain data that LaTeX writes to an auxiliary file and
-re-reads later are fragile. This includes material that goes into a
-table of contents, list of figures, list of tables, etc. Fragile
-commands also include line breaks, any command that has an optional
-argument, and many more. To prevent such commands from breaking, one
-solution is to preceded them with the command ‘\protect’.
+can break when it is used in the argument to certain other commands,
+typically those that write material to the table of contents, the
+cross-reference file, etc. To prevent fragile commands from causing
+errors, one solution is to precede them with the command ‘\protect’.
For example, when LaTeX runs the ‘\section{SECTION NAME}’ command it
writes the SECTION NAME text to the ‘.aux’ auxiliary file, moving it
there for use elsewhere in the document such as in the table of
-contents. Any argument that is internally expanded by LaTeX without
-typesetting it directly is referred to as a “moving argument”. A
-command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX
-code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the
-‘\caption{...}’ command (*note figure::), in the ‘\thanks{...}’ command
-(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the ‘tabular’ and ‘array’
-environments (*note tabular::).
+contents. Such an argument that is used in multiple places is referred
+to as a “moving argument”. A command is fragile if it can expand during
+this process into invalid TeX code. Some examples of moving arguments
+are those that appear in the ‘\caption{...}’ command (*note figure::),
+in the ‘\thanks{...}’ command (*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions
+in the ‘tabular’ and ‘array’ environments (*note tabular::).
If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
-preceding it with ‘\protect’. Every fragile commands must be protected
+preceding it with ‘\protect’. Each fragile command must be protected
with their own ‘\protect’.
- Although usually a ‘\protect’ command doesn’t hurt, length commands
-are robust and should not be preceded by a ‘\protect’ command. Nor can
-a ‘\protect’ command be used in the argument to ‘\addtocounter’ or
-‘\setcounter’ command.
+ Although usually a ‘\protect’ command doesn't hurt, length commands
+such as ‘\parindent’ should not be preceded by a ‘\protect’ command
+(*note Lengths::. Nor can a ‘\protect’ command be used in the argument
+to ‘\addtocounter’ or ‘\setcounter’ command (*note \setcounter:: and
+*note \addtocounter::. These commands are already robust.
- In this example the ‘\caption’ command gives a mysterious error about
-an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each ‘\raisebox’
-command with ‘\protect’.
+ As of the October 2019 release of LaTeX
+(<https://www.latex-project.org/news/latex2e-news/ltnews30.pdf>), most
+commands that had been previously fragile were fixed to be robust. For
+example, any command taking an optional argument, such as ‘\root’ or
+‘\raisebox’, was fragile, but is now robust. Similarly, ‘\(...\)’ math
+was fragile and is now robust (‘$...$’ has always been robust).
+
+ Perhaps the most commonly used remaining fragile command is ‘\verb’;
+for example,
\begin{figure}
...
- \caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
+ \caption{This \verb|\command| causes an error.}
\end{figure}
- In the next example the ‘\tableofcontents’ command gives an error
-because the ‘\(..\)’ in the section title expands to illegal TeX in the
-‘.toc’ file. You can solve this by changing ‘\(..\)’ to
-‘\protect\(..\protect\)’.
+ Adding ‘\protect’ does not help here. It's usually feasible to
+rewrite the caption (or section heading or whatever) to use ‘\texttt’,
+often the simplest solution.
- \begin{document}
- \tableofcontents
- ...
- \section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
- ...
+ Alternatively, to use ‘\verb’, you can apply the ‘\cprotect’ command
+from ‘cprotect’ package (<https://ctan.org/pkg/cprotect>) to the
+‘\caption’:
+
+ \cprotect\caption{This \verb|\command| is ok with \verb|\cprotect|.}
+
+ ‘\cprotect’ also allows use of ‘\begin...\end’ environments in moving
+arguments, where they are normally not allowed, via a similar prefix
+command ‘\cprotEnv’.
12.12 ‘\ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend’
=============================================
@@ -8051,10 +7951,10 @@ make the vertical space disappear, but that is inconvenient. The
solution is to change to
‘\newenvironment{eq}{\begin{equation}}{\end{equation}\ignorespacesafterend}’.
-12.13 xspace package
-====================
+12.13 ‘xspace’ package
+======================
-Synopsis:
+This is an add-on package, not part of core LaTeX. Synopsis:
\usepackage{xspace}
...
@@ -8064,15 +7964,15 @@ Synopsis:
adds a space unless the command is followed by certain punctuation
characters.
- After a command control sequence that is a control word (*note
-Control sequences::, as opposed to control symbols such as ‘\$’), TeX
-gobbles blank characters. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output
-has ‘Vermont’ placed snugly against the period, without any intervening
-space.
+ After a control sequence that is a control word (*note Control
+sequences::, as opposed to control symbols such as ‘\$’), TeX gobbles
+blank characters. Thus, in the first sentence below, the output has
+‘Vermont’ placed snugly against the period, without any intervening
+space, despite the space in the input.
\newcommand{\VT}{Vermont}
Our college is in \VT .
- The \VT{} summers are nice.
+ \VT{} summers are nice.
But because of the gobbling, the second sentence needs the empty
curly braces or else there would be no space separating ‘Vermont’ from
@@ -8091,28 +7991,513 @@ In this example, the empty braces are not needed.
The default exception list contains the characters ‘,.'/?;:!~-)’, the
open curly brace and the backslash-space command discussed above, and
-the commands ‘\footnote’ or ‘\footnotemark’. Add to that list as with
-‘\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}’ which adds ‘\myfni’ and ‘\myfnii’
-to the list, and remove from that list as with
+the commands ‘\footnote’ or ‘\footnotemark’. You can add to that list
+as with ‘\xspaceaddexceptions{\myfni \myfnii}’ which adds ‘\myfni’
+and ‘\myfnii’ to the list; and you can remove from that list as with
‘\xspaceremoveexception{!}’.
A comment: many experts prefer not to use ‘\xspace’. Putting it in a
definition means that the command will usually get the spacing right.
-But it isn’t easy to predict when to enter empty braces because
+But it isn't easy to predict when to enter empty braces because
‘\xspace’ will get it wrong, such as when it is followed by another
command, and so ‘\xspace’ can make editing material harder and more
-error-prone than instead always inserting the empty braces.
+error-prone than instead of always inserting the empty braces.
+
+12.14 Class and package commands
+================================
+
+These are commands designed to help writers of classes or packages.
+
+12.14.1 ‘\AtBeginDvi’ & ‘\AtEndDvi’
+-----------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \AtBeginDvi{CODE}
+ \AtEndDvi{CODE}
+
+ ‘\AtBeginDvi’ saves, in a box register, CODE to be executed at the
+beginning of the shipout of the first page of the document. Despite the
+name, it applies to DVI, PDF, and XDV output. It fills the
+‘shipout/firstpage’ hook; new code should use that hook directly.
+
+ Similarly, ‘\AtEndDvi’ (previously available only with the ‘atenddvi’
+package) is code executed when finalizing the main output document.
+
+12.14.2 ‘\AtEndOfClass’ & ‘\AtEndOfPackage’
+-------------------------------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \AtEndOfClass{CODE}
+ \AtEndOfPackage{CODE}
+
+ Hooks to insert CODE to be executed when LaTeX finishes processing
+the current class resp. package.
+
+ These hooks can be used multiple times; each ‘code’ segment will be
+executed in the order called. Many packages and classes use these
+commands.
+
+ See also *note \AtBeginDocument::.
+
+12.14.3 ‘\CheckCommand’
+-----------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \CheckCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}
+ \CheckCommand* (same parameters)
+
+ Like ‘\newcommand’ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::) but does not
+define CMD; instead it checks that the current definition of CMD is
+exactly as given by DEFINITION and is or is not “‘\long’” as expected.
+A long command is a command that accepts ‘\par’ within an argument.
+
+ With the unstarred version of ‘\CheckCommand’, CMD is expected to be
+‘\long’; with the starred version, CMD must not be ‘\long’
+
+ ‘\CheckCommand’ raises an error when the check fails. This allows
+you to check before you start redefining ‘cmd’ yourself that no other
+package has already redefined this command.
+
+12.14.4 ‘\ClassError’ and ‘\PackageError’ and others
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+Produce error, warning, and informational messages for classes:
+
+‘\ClassError{CLASS NAME}{ERROR-TEXT}{HELP-TEXT}’
+‘\ClassWarning{CLASS NAME}{WARNING-TEXT}’
+‘\ClassWarningNoLine{CLASS NAME}{WARNING-TEXT}’
+‘\ClassInfo{CLASS NAME}{INFO-TEXT}’
+‘\ClassInfoNoLine{CLASS NAME}{INFO-TEXT}’
+
+and the same for packages:
+‘\PackageError{PACKAGE NAME}{ERROR-TEXT}{HELP-TEXT}’
+‘\PackageWarning{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING-TEXT}’
+‘\PackageWarningNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{WARNING-TEXT}’
+‘\PackageInfo{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO-TEXT}’
+‘\PackageInfoNoLine{PACKAGE NAME}{INFO-TEXT}’
+
+ For ‘\ClassError’ and ‘\PackageError’ the message is ERROR-TEXT,
+followed by TeX's '‘?’' error prompt. If the user then asks for help by
+typing ‘h’, they see the HELP TEXT.
+
+ The four ‘Warning’ commands are similar except that they write
+WARNING-TEXT on the screen with no error prompt. The four ‘Info’
+commands write INFO-TEXT only in the transcript file. The ‘NoLine’
+versions omit the number of the line generating the message, while the
+other versions do show that number.
+
+ To format the messages, including the HELP-TEXT: use ‘\protect’ to
+stop a command from expanding, get a line break with ‘\MessageBreak’,
+and get a space with ‘\space’ when a space character is ignore, most
+commonly after a command.
+
+ LaTeX appends a period to the messages.
+
+12.14.5 ‘\CurrentOption’
+------------------------
+
+Expands to the name of the option currently being processed. This can
+only be used within the CODE argument of either ‘\DeclareOption’ or
+‘\DeclareOption*’.
+
+12.14.6 ‘\DeclareOption’
+------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareOption{OPTION}{CODE}
+ \DeclareOption*{OPTION}{CODE}
+
+ Define an option a user can include in their ‘\documentclass’
+command. For example, a class ‘smcmemo’ could have an option ‘logo’
+allowing users to put the institutional logo on the first page. The
+document would start with ‘\documentclass[logo]{smcmemo}’. To enable
+this, the class file must contain ‘\DeclareOption{logo}{CODE}’ (and
+later, ‘\ProcessOptions’).
+
+ If you request an option that has not been declared, by default this
+will produce a warning like ‘Unused global option(s): [badoption].’ This
+can be changed by using ‘\DeclareOption*{CODE}’, which executes CODE for
+any unknown option.
+
+ For example, many classes extend an existing class, using code such
+as ‘\LoadClass{article}’ (*note \LoadClass::). In this case, it makes
+sense to pass any otherwise-unknown options to the underlying class,
+like this:
+
+ \DeclareOption*{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}%
+ }
+
+ As another example, our class ‘smcmemo’ might allow users to keep
+lists of memo recipients in external files, so the user could invoke
+‘\documentclass[math]{smcmemo}’ and it will read the file ‘math.memo’.
+This code inputs the file if it exists, while if it doesn't, the option
+is passed to the ‘article’ class:
+
+ \DeclareOption*{\InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.memo}
+ {}{%
+ \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}}
+
+12.14.7 ‘\DeclareRobustCommand’
+-------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{CMD}[NUM][DEFAULT]{DEFINITION}
+ \DeclareRobustCommand* (same parameters
+
+ ‘\DeclareRobustCommand’ and its starred form are generally like
+‘\newcommand’ and ‘\newcommand*’ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::),
+with the addition that they define a so-called “robust” command, even if
+some code within the DEFINITION is fragile. (For a discussion of robust
+and fragile commands, *note \protect::.)
+
+ Also unlike ‘\newcommand’, these do not give an error if macro CMD
+already exists; instead, a log message is put into the transcript file
+if a command is redefined. Thus, ‘\DeclareRobustCommand’ can be used to
+define new robust commands or to redefine existing commands, making them
+robust.
+
+ The starred form, ‘\DeclareRobustCommand*’, disallows the arguments
+from containing multiple paragraphs, just like the starred form of
+‘\newcommand’ and ‘\renewcommand’. The meaning of the arguments is the
+same.
+
+ Commands defined this way are a bit less efficient than those defined
+using ‘\newcommand’ so unless the command's data is fragile and the
+command is used within a moving argument, use ‘\newcommand’.
+
+ Related to this, the ‘etoolbox’ package offers three commands and
+their starred forms: ‘\newrobustcmd’(‘*’) ‘\renewrobustcmd’(‘*’), and
+‘\providerobustcmd’(‘*’). They are similar to ‘\newcommand’,
+‘\renewcommand’, and ‘\providecommand’ and their own starred forms, but
+define a robust CMD. They have two possible advantages compared to
+‘\DeclareRobustCommand’:
+
+ 1. They use the low-level e-TeX protection mechanism rather than the
+ higher-level LaTeX ‘\protect’ mechanism, so they do not incur the
+ slight loss of performance mentioned above, and
+
+ 2. They make the same distinction between ‘\new...’, ‘\renew...’, and
+ ‘\provide...’, as the standard commands. That is, they do not just
+ write a log message when you redefine CMD that already exists; you
+ need to use either ‘\renew...’ or ‘\provide...’, or you get an
+ error. This may or may not be a benefit.
+
+12.14.8 ‘\ExecuteOptions’
+-------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ExecuteOptions{OPTION-LIST}
+
+ For each option OPTION in OPTION-LIST, in order, this command
+executes the command ‘\ds@OPTION’. If this command is not defined then
+that option is silently ignored.
+
+ This can be used to provide a default option list before
+‘\ProcessOptions’. For example, if in a class file you want the default
+to be 11pt fonts then you could specify
+‘\ExecuteOptions{11pt}\ProcessOptions\relax’.
+
+12.14.9 ‘\IfFileExists’ & ‘\InputIfFileExists’
+----------------------------------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \IfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE-CODE}{FALSE-CODE}
+ \InputIfFileExists{FILENAME}{TRUE-CODE}{FALSE-CODE}
+
+ ‘\IfFileExists’ executes TRUE-CODE if LaTeX finds the file ‘FILENAME’
+or FALSE-CODE otherwise. In the first case it executing TRUE-CODE and
+then inputs the file. Thus the command
+
+ \IfFileExists{img.pdf}{%
+ \includegraphics{img.pdf}}
+ {\typeout{!! img.pdf not found}
+
+will include the graphic ‘img.pdf’ if it is found and otherwise give a
+warning.
+
+ This command looks for the file in all search paths that LaTeX uses,
+not only in the current directory. To look only in the current
+directory do something like
+‘\IfFileExists{./FILENAME}{TRUE-CODE}{FALSE-CODE}’. If you ask for a
+filename without a ‘.tex’ extension then LaTeX will first look for the
+file by appending the ‘.tex’; for more on how LaTeX handles file
+extensions see *note \input::.
+
+ ‘\InputIfFileExists’ is similar, but, as the name states,
+automatically ‘\input’s FILENAME if it exists. The TRUE-CODE is
+executed just before the ‘\input’; if the file doesn't exist, the
+FALSE-CODE is executed. An example:
+
+ \InputIfFileExists{mypkg.cfg}
+ {\PackageInfo{Loading mypkg.cfg for configuration information}}
+ {\PackageInfo{No mypkg.cfg found}}
+
+12.14.10 ‘\LoadClass’ & ‘\LoadClassWithOptions’
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \LoadClass[OPTIONS-LIST]{CLASS-NAME}[RELEASE-DATE]
+ \LoadClassWithOptions{CLASS-NAME}[RELEASE-DATE]
+
+ Load a class, as with
+‘\documentclass[OPTIONS-LIST]{CLASS-NAME}[RELEASE-DATE]’. An example:
+‘\LoadClass[twoside]{article}’.
+
+ The OPTIONS-LIST, if present, is a comma-separated list. The
+RELEASE-DATE is also optional. If present it must have the form
+‘YYYY/MM/DD’.
+
+ If you request RELEASE-DATE and the date of the package installed on
+your system is earlier, then you get a warning on the screen and in the
+log like this:
+
+ You have requested, on input line 4, version `2038/01/19' of
+ document class article, but only version `2014/09/29 v1.4h
+ Standard LaTeX document class' is available.
+
+ The command version ‘\LoadClassWithOptions’ uses the list of options
+for the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it
+via ‘\PassOptionsToClass’. This is a convenience command that lets you
+build classes on existing ones, such as the standard ‘article’ class,
+without having to track which options were passed.
+
+12.14.11 ‘\NeedsTeXFormat’
+--------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \NeedsTeXFormat{FORMAT}[FORMAT-DATE]
+
+ Specifies the format that this class must be run under. Often issued
+as the first line of a class file, and most often used as:
+‘\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}’. When a document using that class is
+processed, the format being run must exactly match the FORMAT name
+given, including case. If it does not match then execution stops with
+an error like ‘This file needs format `LaTeX2e' but this is `plain'.’.
+
+ To require a version of the format that you know to have certain
+features, include the optional FORMAT-DATE on which those features were
+implemented. If present, it must be in the form ‘YYYY/MM/DD’. If the
+format version installed on your system is earlier than FORMAT DATE then
+you get a warning like this.
+
+ You have requested release `2038/01/20' of LaTeX, but only
+ release `2016/02/01' is available.
+
+12.14.12 ‘\OptionNotUsed’
+-------------------------
+
+Adds the current option to the list of unused options. Can only be used
+within the CODE argument of either ‘\DeclareOption’ or
+‘\DeclareOption*’.
+
+12.14.13 ‘\PassOptionsToClass’ & ‘\PassOptionsToPackage’
+--------------------------------------------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \PassOptionsToClass{OPTIONS}{CLSNAME}
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{OPTION}{PKGNAME}
+
+ Adds the options in the comma-separated list OPTIONS to the options
+used by any future ‘\RequirePackage’ or ‘\usepackage’ command for the
+class CLSNAME or the package PKGNAME, respectively.
+
+ The reason for these commands is that although you may load a package
+any number of times with no options, if you can specify options only the
+first time you load the package. Loading a package with options more
+than once will get you an error like ‘Option clash for package foo.’.
+LaTeX throws an error even if there is no conflict between the options.
+
+ If your own code is bringing in a package twice then you can combine
+the calls; for example, replacing the two
+
+ \RequirePackage[landscape]{geometry}
+ \RequirePackage[margins=1in]{geometry}
+
+with the single command
+
+ \RequirePackage[landscape,margins=1in]{geometry}
+
+ However, suppose you are loading ‘firstpkg’ and inside that package
+it loads ‘secondpkg’, and you need ‘secondpkg’ to be loaded with option
+‘draft’. Then before load the first package you must tell LaTeX about
+the desired options for the second package, like this:
+
+ \PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{secondpkg}
+ \RequirePackage{firstpkg}
+
+If ‘firstpkg.sty’ loads an option in conflict with what you want then
+you may have to alter its source, or yours.
+
+ These commands are useful for general users as well as class and
+package writers. For instance, suppose a user wants to load the
+‘graphicx’ package with the option ‘draft’ and also wants to use a class
+‘foo’ that loads the ‘graphicx’ package, but without that option. The
+user could start their LaTeX file with
+‘\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphicx} \documentclass{foo}’.
+
+12.14.14 ‘\ProcessOptions’
+--------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ProcessOptions\@OPTIONS
+ \ProcessOptions*\@OPTIONS
+
+ Execute the code for each option that the user has invoked. Invoke
+it in the class file as ‘\ProcessOptions\relax’ (because of the
+existence of the starred version, described below).
+
+ Options come in two types. “Local options” have been specified for
+this particular package in ‘\usepackage[OPTIONS]’,
+‘\RequirePackage[OPTIONS]’, or the OPTIONS argument of
+‘\PassOptionsToPackage{OPTIONS}’. “Global options” are those given by
+the class user in ‘\documentclass[OPTIONS]’. If an option is specified
+both locally and globally then it is local.
+
+ When ‘\ProcessOptions’ is called for a package ‘pkg.sty’, the
+following happens:
+
+ 1. For each option OPTION so far declared with ‘\DeclareOption’,
+ ‘\ProcessOptions’ looks to see if that option is either global or
+ local for ‘pkg’. If so, then it executes the declared code. This
+ is done in the order in which these options were given in
+ ‘pkg.sty’.
+
+ 2. For each remaining local option, it executes the command
+ ‘\ds@’OPTION if it has been defined somewhere (other than by a
+ ‘\DeclareOption’); otherwise, it executes the default option code
+ given in ‘\DeclareOption*’. If no default option code has been
+ declared then it gives an error message. This is done in the order
+ in which these options were specified.
+
+ When ‘\ProcessOptions’ is called for a class it works in the same way
+except that all options are local, and the default CODE for
+‘\DeclareOption*’ is ‘\OptionNotUsed’ rather than an error.
+
+ The starred version ‘\ProcessOptions*’ executes the options in the
+order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order of
+declaration in the class or package. For a package, this means that the
+global options are processed first.
+
+12.14.15 ‘\ProvidesClass’ & ‘\ProvidesPackage’
+----------------------------------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \ProvidesClass{CLSNAME}[RELEASE-DATE [INFO-TEXT]]
+ \ProvidesPackage{PKGNAME}[RELEASE-DATE [INFO-TEXT]]
+
+ Identifies the class or package being defined, printing a message to
+the screen and the log file.
+
+ When you load a class or package, for example with
+‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’ or ‘\usepackage{test}’, LaTeX inputs a file
+(‘smcmemo.cls’ and ‘test.sty’, respectively). If the name of the file
+does not match the class or package name declared in it then you get a
+warning. Thus, if you invoke ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’, and the file
+‘smcmemo.cls’ has the statement ‘\ProvidesClass{foo}’ then you get a
+warning like ‘You have requested document class `smcmemo', but the
+document class provides 'foo'.’ This warning does not prevent LaTeX from
+processing the rest of the class file normally.
+
+ If you include the optional argument then you must include a date,
+before any spaces, of the form ‘YYYY/MM/DD’. The rest of the optional
+argument is free-form, although it traditionally identifies the class.
+It is written to the screen during compilation and to the log file.
+Thus, if your file ‘smcmemo.cls’ contains the line
+‘\ProvidesClass{smcmemo}[2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class]’ and your
+document's first line is ‘\documentclass{smcmemo}’ then you will see
+‘Document Class: smcmemo 2008/06/01 v1.0 SMC memo class’.
+
+ The date in the optional argument allows class and package users to
+ask to be warned if the version of the class or package is earlier than
+RELEASE DATE. For instance, a user could enter
+‘\documentclass{smcmemo}[2018/10/12]’ or
+‘\usepackage{foo}[[2017/07/07]]’ to require a class or package with
+certain features by specifying that it must be released no earlier than
+the given date. Perhaps more importantly, the date serves as
+documentation of the last release. (In practice, package users rarely
+include a date, and class users almost never do.)
+
+12.14.16 ‘\ProvidesFile’
+------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \ProvidesFile{FILENAME}[INFO-TEXT]
+
+ Declare a file other than the main class and package files, such as a
+configuration or font definition file. It writes the given information
+to the log file, essentially like ‘\ProvidesClass’ and
+‘\ProvidesPackage’ (see the previous section).
+
+ For example:
+
+ \ProvidesFile{smcmemo.cfg}[2017/10/12 config file for smcmemo.cls]
+
+writes this into the log:
+
+ File: smcmemo.cfg 2017/10/12 config file for smcmemo.cls
+
+12.14.17 ‘\RequirePackage’ & ‘\RequirePackageWithOptions’
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \RequirePackage[OPTION-LIST]{PKGNAME}[RELEASE-DATE]
+ \RequirePackageWithOptions{PKGNAME}[RELEASE-DATE]
+
+ Load a package, like the command ‘\usepackage’ (*note Additional
+packages::). An example:
+‘\RequirePackage[landscape,margin=1in]{geometry}’
+
+ The initial optional argument OPTION-LIST, if present, must be a
+comma-separated list. The trailing optional argument RELEASE-DATE, if
+present, must have the form ‘YYYY/MM/DD’. If the release date of the
+package as installed on your system is earlier than RELEASE-DATE then
+you get a warning like ‘You have requested, on input line 9, version
+`2017/07/03' of package jhtest, but only version `2000/01/01' is
+available’.
+
+ The ‘\RequirePackageWithOptions’ variant uses the list of options for
+the current class. This means it ignores any options passed to it via
+‘\PassOptionsToClass’. This is a convenience command to allow easily
+building classes on existing ones without having to track which options
+were passed.
+
+ The difference between ‘\usepackage’ and ‘\RequirePackage’ is small.
+The ‘\usepackage’ command is intended to be used in documents, while
+‘\RequirePackage’ is intended for package and class files. The most
+significant difference in practice is that ‘\RequirePackage’ can be used
+in a document before the ‘\documentclass’ command, while ‘\usepackage’
+gives an error there. The most common need for this nowadays is for the
+‘\DocumentMetadata’ command (*note \DocumentMetadata::).
+
+ The LaTeX development team strongly recommends use of these and
+related commands over Plain TeX's ‘\input’; see the Class Guide
+(<https://ctan.org/pkg/clsguide>).
13 Counters
***********
Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
name of the counter is often the same as the name of the environment or
-command associated with the number, except that the counter’s name has
+command associated with the number, except that the counter's name has
no backslash ‘\’. Thus, associated with the ‘\chapter’ command is the
‘chapter’ counter that keeps track of the chapter number.
- Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX’s standard document
+ Below is a list of the counters used in LaTeX's standard document
classes to control numbering.
part paragraph figure enumi
@@ -8142,12 +8527,12 @@ instance, ‘\alph{enumi}’. Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.
‘\alph{COUNTER}’
- Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: ‘a’, ‘b’, ... If
- the counter’s value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get
+ Print the value of COUNTER in lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ... If
+ the counter's value is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get
‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large.’
‘\Alph{COUNTER}’
- Print in uppercase letters: ‘A’, ‘B’, ... If the counter’s value
+ Print in uppercase letters: 'A', 'B', ... If the counter's value
is less than 1 or more than 26 then you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter
too large.’
@@ -8155,19 +8540,19 @@ with a backslash.
Print in Arabic numbers such as ‘5’ or ‘-2’.
‘\roman{COUNTER}’
- Print in lowercase roman numerals: ‘i’, ‘ii’, ... If the counter’s
+ Print in lowercase roman numerals: 'i', 'ii', ... If the counter's
value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
does not print anything in the output.
‘\Roman{COUNTER}’
- Print in uppercase roman numerals: ‘I’, ‘II’, ... If the counter’s
+ Print in uppercase roman numerals: 'I', 'II', ... If the counter's
value is less than 1 then you get no warning or error but LaTeX
does not print anything in the output.
‘\fnsymbol{COUNTER}’
Prints the value of COUNTER using a sequence of nine symbols that
are traditionally used for labeling footnotes. The value of
- COUNTER should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the counter’s
+ COUNTER should be between 1 and 9, inclusive. If the counter's
value is less than 0 or more than 9 then you get ‘LaTeX Error:
Counter too large’, while if it is 0 then you get no error or
warning but LaTeX does not output anything.
@@ -8253,7 +8638,7 @@ Synopsis:
\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}
Globally set the counter COUNTER to have the value of the VALUE
-argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a counter’s value
+argument, which must be an integer. Thus, you can set a counter's value
as ‘\setcounter{section}{5}’. Note that the counter name does not start
with a backslash.
@@ -8289,7 +8674,7 @@ Synopsis:
Globally increments the value of COUNTER by one, as does
‘\stepcounter’ (*note \stepcounter::). The difference is that this
command resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
-definition of “counters numbered within”, *note \newcounter::.)
+definition of "counters numbered within", *note \newcounter::.)
In addition, this command also defines the current ‘\ref’ value to be
the result of ‘\thecounter’.
@@ -8305,7 +8690,7 @@ Synopsis:
\stepcounter{COUNTER}
Globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all counters numbered within
-it. (For the definition of “counters numbered within”, *note
+it. (For the definition of "counters numbered within", *note
\newcounter::.)
This command differs from ‘\refstepcounter’ in that this one does not
@@ -8357,10 +8742,10 @@ TeX to stretch or shrink the length to optimize placement.
\newcommand{\showhbox}[2]{%
\fboxsep=0pt\fbox{\hbox to #1{#2}}}
-This example uses those commands to show a black bar 100 points long
-between ‘XXX’ and ‘YYY’. This length is rigid.
+This next example uses those commands to show a black bar 100 points
+long between ‘ABC’ and ‘XYZ’. This length is rigid.
- XXX\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}YYY
+ ABC\showhbox{100pt}{\blackbar{100pt}}XYZ
As for rubber lengths, shrinking is simpler one: with ‘1cm minus
0.05cm’, the natural length is 1cm but TeX can shrink it down as far as
@@ -8368,15 +8753,15 @@ between ‘XXX’ and ‘YYY’. This length is rigid.
first one works fine, producing a space of 98 points between the two
bars.
- XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ ABC\showhbox{300pt}{%
\blackbar{101pt}\hspace{100pt minus 2pt}\blackbar{101pt}}YYY
- XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ ABC\showhbox{300pt}{%
\blackbar{105pt}\hspace{100pt minus 1pt}\blackbar{105pt}}YYY
But the second one gets a warning like ‘Overfull \hbox (1.0pt too wide)
detected at line 17’. In the output the first ‘Y’ is overwritten by the
-end of the black bar, because the box’s material is wider than the 300pt
+end of the black bar, because the box's material is wider than the 300pt
allocated, as TeX has refused to shrink the total to less than
309 points.
@@ -8384,16 +8769,16 @@ allocated, as TeX has refused to shrink the total to less than
beyond the given amount, it will do it. Here the first line is fine,
producing a space of 110 points between the bars.
- XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ ABC\showhbox{300pt}{%
\blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 10pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
- XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ ABC\showhbox{300pt}{%
\blackbar{95pt}\hspace{100pt plus 1pt}\blackbar{95pt}}YYY
In the second line TeX needs a stretch of 10 points and only 1 point was
specified. TeX stretches the space to the required length but it gives
you a warning like ‘Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) detected at line
-22’. (We won’t discuss badness.)
+22’. (We won't discuss badness.)
You can put both stretch and shrink in the same length, as in ‘1ex
plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex’.
@@ -8401,20 +8786,20 @@ plus 0.05ex minus 0.02ex’.
If TeX is setting two or more rubber lengths then it allocates the
stretch or shrink in proportion.
- XXX\showhbox{300pt}{%
+ ABC\showhbox{300pt}{%
\blackbar{100pt}% left
\hspace{0pt plus 50pt}\blackbar{80pt}\hspace{0pt plus 10pt}% middle
\blackbar{100pt}}YYY % right
The left and right bars take up 100 points, so the middle needs another
-100. The middle bar is 80 points so the two ‘\hspace’’s must stretch
+100. The middle bar is 80 points so the two ‘\hspace’'s must stretch
20 points. Because the two are ‘plus 50pt’ and ‘plus 10pt’, TeX gets
5/6 of the stretch from the first space and 1/6 from the second.
The ‘plus’ or ‘minus’ component of a rubber length can contain a
“fill” component, as in ‘1in plus2fill’. This gives the length infinite
stretchability or shrinkability so that TeX could set it to any
-distance. Here the two figures will be equal-spaced across the page.
+distance. Here the two figures will be equally spaced across the page.
\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
\hspace{0pt plus 1fill}\includegraphics{godel.png}%
@@ -8506,7 +8891,7 @@ rubber length (*note Lengths::). It can be positive, negative or zero,
and can be in any units that LaTeX understands (*note Units of
length::).
- Below, with LaTeX’s defaults the first paragraph will be indented
+ Below, with LaTeX's defaults the first paragraph will be indented
while the second will not.
I told the doctor I broke my leg in two places.
@@ -8742,7 +9127,7 @@ So ‘\the\glueexpr 5pt plus 1pt * 2 \relax’ results in ‘10pt plus 2pt’.
TeX will coerce other numerical types in the same way as it does when
doing register assignment. Thus ‘\the\numexpr\dimexpr 1pt\relax\relax’
will result in ‘65536’, which is ‘1pt’ converted to scaled points (*note
-‘sp’: units of length sp, TeX’s internal unit) and then coerced into an
+‘sp’: units of length sp, TeX's internal unit) and then coerced into an
integer. With a ‘\glueexpr’ here, the stretch and shrink would be
dropped. Going the other way, a ‘\numexpr’ inside a ‘\dimexpr’ or
‘\glueexpr’ will need appropriate units, as in ‘\the\dimexpr\numexpr 1 +
@@ -8757,7 +9142,7 @@ a division) which is done as one combined operation with a 64-bit
product as intermediate value. The result of each operation is again
checked to be in the allowed range.
- Finally, division and scaling take place with rounding (unlike TeX’s
+ Finally, division and scaling take place with rounding (unlike TeX's
‘\divide’, which truncates). Thus ‘\the\dimexpr 5pt*(3/2)\relax’ puts
‘10.0pt’ in the document, because it rounds ‘3/2’ to ‘2’, while
‘\the\dimexpr 5pt*(4/3)\relax’ produces ‘5.0pt’.
@@ -8800,11 +9185,11 @@ identical:
Second paragraph.
\end{document}
- Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph’s contents it divides that
+ Once LaTeX has gathered all of a paragraph's contents it divides that
content into lines in a way that is optimized over the entire paragraph
(*note Line breaking::).
- There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don’t put a
+ There are places where a new paragraph is not permitted. Don't put a
blank line in math mode (*note Modes::); here the blank line before the
‘\end{equation}’
@@ -8898,7 +9283,7 @@ paragraph, use ‘\noindent’.
In the middle of a paragraph the ‘\noindent’ command has no effect,
because LaTeX is already in horizontal mode there. The ‘\indent’
-command’s only effect is to output a space.
+command's only effect is to output a space.
This example starts a fresh paragraph.
@@ -8954,7 +9339,7 @@ is ‘1em’. (These values are set before LaTeX calls ‘\normalfont’ so
different font then to set ‘\parindent’ to 1em matching that font, put
‘\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\parindent}{1em}}’ in the preamble.)
- The default value for ‘\parskip’ in LaTeX’s standard document classes
+ The default value for ‘\parskip’ in LaTeX's standard document classes
is ‘0pt plus1pt’.
15.4 Marginal notes
@@ -8984,7 +9369,7 @@ paragraph. Revert that to the default position with ‘\normalmarginpar’.
note in the left margin, while the mandatory argument RIGHT is used for
a note in the right margin.
- Normally, a note’s first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
+ Normally, a note's first word will not be hyphenated. You can enable
hyphenation there by beginning LEFT or RIGHT with ‘\hspace{0pt}’.
These parameters affect the formatting of the note:
@@ -9089,14 +9474,14 @@ or, one of:
Make EXP appear as a superscript of BASE (with the caret
character, ‘^’) or a subscript (with underscore, ‘_’).
- In this example the ‘0’’s and ‘1’’s are subscripts while the ‘2’’s
+ In this example the ‘0’'s and ‘1’'s are subscripts while the ‘2’'s
are superscripts.
\( (x_0+x_1)^2 \leq (x_0)^2+(x_1)^2 \)
To have the subscript or superscript contain more than one character,
surround the expression with curly braces, as in ‘e^{-2x}’. This
-example’s fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression for
+example's fourth line shows curly braces used to group an expression for
the exponent.
\begin{displaymath}
@@ -9141,7 +9526,7 @@ to typeset chemical formulas. There are packages for that, such as
LaTeX provides almost any mathematical or technical symbol that anyone
uses. For example, if you include ‘$\pi$’ in your source, you will get
-the pi symbol π. See the “Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List” package at
+the pi symbol π. See the "Comprehensive LaTeX Symbol List" package at
<https://ctan.org/pkg/comprehensive>.
Here is a list of commonly-used symbols. It is by no means
@@ -9535,7 +9920,7 @@ whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
μ Lowercase Greek letter (ordinary).
‘\nabla’
- ∇ Hamilton’s del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
+ ∇ Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
‘\natural’
♮ Musical natural notation (ordinary).
@@ -9561,7 +9946,7 @@ whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a following operator
(relation).
- Many negated operators are available that don’t require ‘\not’,
+ Many negated operators are available that don't require ‘\not’,
particularly with the ‘amssymb’ package. For example, ‘\notin’ is
typographically preferable to ‘\not\in’.
@@ -9940,7 +10325,7 @@ whatever the current mode, see *note \ensuremath::.
use the ‘mathtools’ package to create flexibly-sized norm symbols.
‘\vert’
- | Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For “such that”, as in the
+ | Single line vertical bar (ordinary). For "such that", as in the
definition of a set, use ‘\mid’ because it is a relation. *Note
Delimiters::, for how to use the ‘mathtools’ package to create
flexibly-sized absolute-value symbols.
@@ -10080,7 +10465,7 @@ the same.) If you do have a bold math font, though, then ‘\boldmath’
and ‘bm’ work fine.
If no such font is available, one alternative is to construct fake
-bold fonts with the ‘fontspec’ package’s ‘FakeBold=1’ parameter (see its
+bold fonts with the ‘fontspec’ package's ‘FakeBold=1’ parameter (see its
documentation, <https://ctan.org/pkg/fontspec>). This may be acceptable
for drafting or informal distribution, but the results are far from a
true bold font.
@@ -10088,7 +10473,7 @@ true bold font.
Another alternative to handling bold for OpenType math fonts is to
use the ‘\symbf’ (bold), ‘\symbfit’ (bold italic), and related commands
from the ‘unicode-math’ package. These do not change the current font,
-but rather change the (Unicode) “alphabet” used, which in practice is
+but rather change the (Unicode) "alphabet" used, which in practice is
more widely supported than a separate bold font. Many variations are
possible, and so there are subtleties to getting the desired output. As
usual, see the package documentation
@@ -10245,7 +10630,7 @@ But with ‘\left’ and ‘\right’
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
\( \left(a+b+c+d+e+f+g+h+i+j+k+l+m+n+o+p+q+r+s+t+u+v+w+x+y+z\right) \)
-LaTeX won’t break the line, causing the formula to extend into the
+LaTeX won't break the line, causing the formula to extend into the
margin.
Because ‘\left ... \right’ make a group, all the usual grouping rules
@@ -10261,7 +10646,7 @@ forgotten, and the output is ‘1.2pt’.
The ‘\left ... \right’ pair affect the horizontal spacing of the
enclosed formula, in two ways. The first is that in ‘\( \sin(x) =
\sin\left(x\right) \)’ the one after the equals sign has more space
-around the ‘x’. That’s because ‘\left( ... \right)’ inserts an inner
+around the ‘x’. That's because ‘\left( ... \right)’ inserts an inner
node while ‘( ... )’ inserts an opening node. The second way that the
pair affect the horizontal spacing is that because they form a group,
the enclosed subformula will be typeset at its natural width, with no
@@ -10291,7 +10676,7 @@ TeX can choose delimiters that are too small, as in ‘\( \left| |x|+|y|
A third awkward case is when a long displayed formula is on more than
one line and you must match the sizes of the opening and closing
-delimiter; you can’t use ‘\left’ on the first line and ‘\right’ on the
+delimiter; you can't use ‘\left’ on the first line and ‘\right’ on the
last because they must be paired.
To size the delimiters manually, see *note \bigl & \bigr etc.::.
@@ -10438,16 +10823,16 @@ for a comma following, ‘\dotsb’ if you need the ellipses that fits when
the dots are followed by a binary operator or relation symbol, ‘\dotsi’
for dots with integrals, or ‘\dotso’ for others.
- The ‘\dots’ command from ‘amsmath’ differs from the LaTeX kernel’s
+ The ‘\dots’ command from ‘amsmath’ differs from the LaTeX kernel's
‘\dots’ command in another way: it outputs a thin space after the
ellipsis. Furthermore, the ‘unicode-math’ package automatically loads
-‘amsmath’, so ‘amsmath’’s ‘\dots’ may be active even when you did not
+‘amsmath’, so ‘amsmath’'s ‘\dots’ may be active even when you did not
explicitly load it, thus changing the output from ‘\dots’ in both text
and math mode.
Yet more about the ellipsis commands: when running under Unicode
engines (‘lualatex’, ‘xelatex’), LaTeX will use the Unicode ellipsis
-character (U+2026) in the font if it’s available; under traditional TeX
+character (U+2026) in the font if it's available; under traditional TeX
engines (‘pdflatex’, ‘latex’), it will typeset three spaced periods.
Generally, the Unicode single-character ellipsis has almost no space
between the three periods, while the spacing of the non-Unicode ellipsis
@@ -10487,7 +10872,7 @@ Symbol Command Name
ψ, Ψ ‘\psi’, ‘\Psi’ Psi
ω, Ω ‘\omega’, ‘\Omega’ Omega
- For omicron, if you are using LaTeX’s default Computer Modern font
+ For omicron, if you are using LaTeX's default Computer Modern font
then enter omicron just as ‘o’ or ‘O’. If you like having the name or
if your font shows a difference then you can use something like
‘\newcommand\omicron{o}’. The package ‘unicode-math’ has ‘\upomicron’
@@ -10661,33 +11046,35 @@ Accents::).
When you are putting an accent on an i or a j, the tradition is to
use one without a dot, ‘\imath’ or ‘jmath’ (*note Math symbols::).
-16.5 Over- and Underlining
-==========================
+16.5 Over- or under math
+========================
-LaTeX provides commands for making overlines or underlines, or putting
-braces over or under some material.
+LaTeX provides commands for putting lines, braces, and arrows over or
+under math material.
-‘\underline{TEXT}’
- Underline TEXT. Works inside math mode, and outside. The line is
+‘\underline{MATH}’
+ Underline MATH. For example: ‘\underline{x+y}’. The line is
always completely below the text, taking account of descenders, so
in ‘\(\underline{y}\)’ the line is lower than in
- ‘\(\underline{x}\)’. This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+ ‘\(\underline{x}\)’. As of approximately 2019, this command and
+ others in this section are robust; before that, they were fragile
+ (*note \protect::).
- Note that the package ‘ulem’ does text mode underlining and allows
- line breaking as well as a number of other features. See the
- documentation on CTAN. See also *note \hrulefill & \dotfill:: for
- producing a line, for such things as a signature.
+ The package ‘ulem’ (<https://ctan.org/pkg/uelem>) does text mode
+ underlining and allows line breaking as well as a number of other
+ features. See also *note \hrulefill & \dotfill:: for producing a
+ line for such things as a signature or placeholder.
-‘\overline{TEXT}’
- Put a horizontal line over TEXT. Works inside math mode, and
- outside. For example, ‘\overline{x+y}’. Note that this differs
- from the command ‘\bar’ (*note Math accents::).
+‘\overline{MATH}’
+ Put a horizontal line over MATH. For example: ‘\overline{x+y}’.
+ This differs from the accent command ‘\bar’ (*note Math accents::).
‘\underbrace{MATH}’
- Put a brace under MATH. For example, this
- ‘(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)’ emphasizes the telescoping part.
- Attach text to the brace by using the subscript command, ‘_’, or
- superscript, ‘^’, as here.
+ Put a brace under MATH. For example:
+ ‘(1-\underbrace{1/2)+(1/2}-1/3)’.
+
+ You can attach text to the brace as a subscript (‘_’) or
+ superscript (‘^’) as here:
\begin{displaymath}
1+1/2+\underbrace{1/3+1/4}_{>1/2}+
@@ -10698,12 +11085,17 @@ braces over or under some material.
unconnected to the underbrace.
‘\overbrace{MATH}’
- Put a brace over MATH, as with
- ‘\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}’. See also
- ‘\underbrace’.
+ Put a brace over MATH. For example:
+ ‘\overbrace{x+x+\cdots+x}^{\mbox{\(k\) times}}’.
+
+‘\overrightarrow{MATH}’
+ Put a right arrow over MATH. For example: ‘\overrightarrow{x+y}’.
- The package ‘mathtools’ adds an over- and underbrace, as well as some
-improvements on the braces. See the documentation on CTAN.
+‘\overleftarrow{MATH}’
+ Put a left arrow over MATH. For example: ‘\overleftarrow{a+b}’.
+
+ The package ‘mathtools’ (<https://ctan.org/pkg/mathtools>) adds an
+over- and underbracket, as well as some improvements on the braces.
16.6 Spacing in math mode
=========================
@@ -10712,7 +11104,7 @@ When typesetting mathematics, LaTeX puts in spacing according to the
normal rules for mathematics texts. If you enter ‘y=m x’ then LaTeX
ignores the space and in the output the m is next to the x, as y=mx.
- But LaTeX’s rules occasionally need tweaking. For example, in an
+ But LaTeX's rules occasionally need tweaking. For example, in an
integral the tradition is to put a small extra space between the ‘f(x)’
and the ‘dx’, here done with the ‘\,’ command:
@@ -10827,15 +11219,15 @@ with the height of the ‘\sum’ (*note \phantom & \vphantom &
\hphantom::).
While most often used in mathematics, the ‘\smash’ command can appear
-in other contexts. However, it doesn’t change into horizontal mode. So
+in other contexts. However, it doesn't change into horizontal mode. So
if it starts a paragraph then you should first put a ‘\leavevmode’, as
in the bottom line below.
- xxx xxx xxx
+ Text above.
- \smash{yyy} % no paragraph indent
+ \smash{smashed, no indent} % no paragraph indent
- \leavevmode\smash{zzz} % usual paragraph indent
+ \leavevmode\smash{smashed, with indent} % usual paragraph indent
The package ‘mathtools’ has operators that provide even finer control
over smashing a subformula box.
@@ -10899,7 +11291,7 @@ should give it such a status, for example with the ‘\operatorname’
command from the package ‘amsmath’.
While most often used in mathematics, these three can appear in other
-contexts. However, they don’t cause LaTeX to change into horizontal
+contexts. However, they don't cause LaTeX to change into horizontal
mode. So if one of these starts a paragraph then you should prefix it
with ‘\leavevmode’.
@@ -10928,12 +11320,12 @@ amount of space, use ‘\rule’ with a width of zero. *Note \rule::.
16.7 Math styles
================
-TeX’s rules for typesetting a formula depend on the context. For
+TeX's rules for typesetting a formula depend on the context. For
example, inside a displayed equation, the input ‘\sum_{0\leq
i<n}k^m=\frac{n^{m+1}}{m+1}+\mbox{lower order terms}’ will give output
with the summation index centered below the summation symbol. But if
that input is inline then the summation index is off to the right rather
-than below, so it won’t push the lines apart. Similarly, in a displayed
+than below, so it won't push the lines apart. Similarly, in a displayed
context, the symbols in the numerator and denominator will be larger
than for an inline context, and in display math subscripts and
superscripts are further apart then they are in inline math.
@@ -10955,7 +11347,7 @@ superscripts are further apart then they are in inline math.
declaration of ‘\displaystyle’, or ‘\textstyle’, or ‘\scriptstyle’, or
‘\scriptscriptstyle’.
- In this example, the ‘Arithmetic’ line’s fraction will look
+ In this example, the ‘Arithmetic’ line's fraction will look
scrunched.
\begin{tabular}{r|cc}
@@ -10966,7 +11358,7 @@ scrunched.
&$\displaystyle a\cdot\frac{1-b^n}{1-b}$ \\
\end{tabular}
-But because of the ‘\displaystyle’ declaration, the ‘Geometric’ line’s
+But because of the ‘\displaystyle’ declaration, the ‘Geometric’ line's
fraction will be easy to read, with characters the same size as in the
rest of the line.
@@ -10997,7 +11389,7 @@ height of the denominators; *note \mathstrut::.)
====================
LaTeX contains a wide variety of mathematics facilities. Here are some
-that don’t fit into other categories.
+that don't fit into other categories.
16.8.1 Colon character ‘:’ & ‘\colon’
-------------------------------------
@@ -11091,13 +11483,13 @@ the math modes), and error messages will refer to these.
“LR mode” (for left-to-right mode; in plain TeX this is called
“restricted horizontal mode”) is in effect when LaTeX starts making
- a box with an ‘\mbox’ command. As in paragraph mode, LaTeX’s
+ a box with an ‘\mbox’ command. As in paragraph mode, LaTeX's
output is a string of words with spaces between them. Unlike in
paragraph mode, in LR mode LaTeX never starts a new line, it just
keeps going from left to right. (Although LaTeX will not complain
that the LR box is too long, when it is finished and next tries to
put that box into a line, it might well complain that the finished
- LR box won’t fit there.)
+ LR box won't fit there.)
• “Math mode” is when LaTeX is generating an inline mathematical
formula.
@@ -11206,23 +11598,23 @@ either in the preamble or in the document body.
‘\author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}’
Required. Declare the document author or authors. The argument is
a list of authors separated by ‘\and’ commands. To separate lines
- within a single author’s entry, for instance to give the author’s
+ within a single author's entry, for instance to give the author's
institution or address, use a double backslash, ‘\\’. If you omit
the ‘\author’ declaration then you get ‘LaTeX Warning: No \author
given’.
‘\date{TEXT}’
- Optional. Declare TEXT to be the document’s date. The TEXT
- doesn’t need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If
+ Optional. Declare TEXT to be the document's date. The TEXT
+ doesn't need to be in a date format; it can be any text at all. If
you omit ‘\date’ then LaTeX uses the current date (*note \today::).
To have no date, instead use ‘\date{}’.
‘\thanks{TEXT}’
Optional. Produce a footnote. You can use it in the author
information for acknowledgements as illustrated above, but you can
- also use it in the title, or any place a footnote mark makes sense.
- It can be any text at all so you can use it for any purpose, such
- as to print an email address.
+ also use it in the title, or anywhere that a footnote mark makes
+ sense. It can be any text at all so you can use it for any
+ purpose, such as to print an email address.
‘\title{TEXT}’
Required. Declare TEXT to be the title of the document. Get line
@@ -11230,11 +11622,11 @@ either in the preamble or in the document body.
‘\title’ declaration then the ‘\maketitle’ command yields error
‘LaTeX Error: No \title given’.
- To make your own title page, see *note titlepage::. You can either
+ To make your own title page, *note titlepage::. You can either
create this as a one-off or you can include it as part of a renewed
-‘\maketitle’ command. (Many publishers will provide a class to use in
+‘\maketitle’ command. Many publishers will provide a class to use in
place of ‘article’ that formats the title according to their house
-requirements.)
+requirements.
18.2 ‘\pagenumbering’
=====================
@@ -11249,14 +11641,7 @@ contents and other page references. This declaration has global scope
so its effect is not stopped by an end of group such as a closing brace
or an end of environment.
- In this example, before the ‘Main’ section the pages are numbered
-‘a’, etc. Starting on the page containing the ‘\pagenumbering’ call in
-that section, the pages are numbered ‘1’, etc.
-
- \begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
- ...
- \section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
- ...
+ By default, LaTeX numbers pages starting at 1, using Arabic numerals.
The argument NUMBER-STYLE is one of the following (see also *note
\alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::).
@@ -11279,20 +11664,35 @@ that section, the pages are numbered ‘1’, etc.
you get ‘LaTeX Error: Counter too large’.
‘gobble’
- LaTeX does not output a page number, although it does get reset.
- References to that page also are blank. (This does not work with
- the popular package ‘hyperref’ so to have the page number not
- appear you may want to instead use ‘\pagestyle{empty}’ or
- ‘\thispagestyle{empty}’.)
+ no page number is output, though the number is still reset.
+ References to that page also are blank.
+
+ This setting does not work with the popular package ‘hyperref’, so
+ to omit page numbers you may want to instead use
+ ‘\pagestyle{empty}’ or ‘\thispagestyle{empty}’.
+
+ If you want to typeset the page number in some other way, or change
+where the page number appears on the page, see *note \pagestyle:: (in
+short: use the ‘fancyhdr’ package). The list above of LaTeX's built-in
+numbering styles cannot be extended.
+
+ Traditionally, if a document has front matter--preface, table of
+contents, etc.--then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
+main matter of a document uses arabic. LaTeX implements this, by
+providing explicit commands for the different parts (*note \frontmatter
+& \mainmatter & \backmatter::).
- Traditionally, if a document has front matter—preface, table of
-contents, etc.—then it is numbered with lowercase Roman numerals. The
-main matter of a document uses arabic. *Note \frontmatter & \mainmatter
-& \backmatter::.
+ As an explicit example, before the ‘Main’ section the pages are
+numbered ‘a’, etc. Starting on the page containing the ‘\pagenumbering’
+call in that section, the pages are numbered ‘1’, etc.
- If you want to change where the page number appears on the page,
-see *note \pagestyle::. If you want to change the value of the page
-number, then you manipulate the ‘page’ counter (*note Counters::).
+ \begin{document}\pagenumbering{alph}
+ ...
+ \section{Main}\pagenumbering{arabic}
+ ...
+
+ If you want to change the value of the page number, then you
+manipulate the ‘page’ counter (*note Counters::).
18.3 ‘\pagestyle’
=================
@@ -11304,10 +11704,11 @@ Synopsis:
Declaration that specifies how the page headers and footers are
typeset, from the current page onwards.
- A discussion with an example is below. Note first that the package
+ A discussion with an example is below. First, however: the package
‘fancyhdr’ is now the standard way to manipulate headers and footers.
New documents that need to do anything other than one of the standard
-options below should use this package. See its documentation on CTAN.
+options below should use this package. See its documentation
+(<https://ctan.org/pkg/fancyhdr>).
Values for STYLE:
@@ -11326,10 +11727,10 @@ options below should use this package. See its documentation on CTAN.
Custom headers, specified via the ‘\markboth’ or the ‘\markright’
commands.
- Some discussion of the motivation for LaTeX’s mechanism will help you
+ Some discussion of the motivation for LaTeX's mechanism will help you
work with the options ‘headings’ or ‘myheadings’. The document source
below produces an article, two-sided, with the pagestyle ‘headings’. On
-this document’s left hand pages, LaTeX wants (in addition to the page
+this document's left hand pages, LaTeX wants (in addition to the page
number) the title of the current section. On its right hand pages LaTeX
wants the title of the current subsection. When it makes up a page,
LaTeX gets this information from the commands ‘\leftmark’ and
@@ -11407,6 +11808,29 @@ The ‘plain’ style has a page number on it, centered in the footer. To
make the page entirely empty, the command ‘\thispagestyle{empty}’
immediately follows the second ‘\chapter’.
+18.5 ‘\thepage’
+===============
+
+If you want to change the appearance of page numbers only in the page
+headers, for example by adding an ornament, typesetting in small caps,
+etc., then the ‘fancyhdr’ package, as mentioned in a previous section,
+is the best approach.
+
+ On the other hand, you may want to change how page numbers are
+denoted everywhere, including the table of contents and
+cross-references, as well as the page headers. In this case, you should
+redefine ‘\thepage’, which is the command LaTeX uses for the
+representation of page numbers.
+
+ However, ‘\thepage’ should do any typesetting or other complicated
+maneuvers, but merely expand to the intended page number representation.
+The results of a complicated redefinition of ‘\thepage’ are not
+predictable, but LaTeX's report of page numbers in diagnostic messages,
+at least, will become unusable.
+
+ There is some discussion of this issue at
+<https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/687258>.
+
19 Spaces
*********
@@ -11460,8 +11884,8 @@ stretchable and shrinkable, it is sometimes called “glue”.
\noindent\makebox[\linewidth][r]{Name:\hspace{1in}}
The ‘*’-form inserts horizontal space that is non-discardable. More
-precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white space—glues
-and kerns—that come at a line break are discarded. The ‘*’-form avoids
+precisely, when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines any white space--glues
+and kerns--that come at a line break are discarded. The ‘*’-form avoids
that (technically, it adds a non-discardable invisible item in front of
the space).
@@ -11485,7 +11909,7 @@ If you erase the ‘*’ then LaTeX discards the blank.
\end{center}
Because the argument to each ‘\hspace’ has ‘minus 0.25cm’, each can
-shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each space won’t
+shrink a little if the three figures are too wide. But each space won't
shrink more than 0.25cm (*note Lengths::).
19.3 ‘\hfill’
@@ -11519,7 +11943,7 @@ space can be discarded at line breaks. To avoid that instead use
\caption{Comparison of two graphs} \label{fig:twographs}
\end{figure}
-Note the ‘\hspace*’’s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
+Note the ‘\hspace*’'s where the space could otherwise be dropped.
19.4 ‘\hss’
===========
@@ -11533,7 +11957,7 @@ infinitely stretchable (this command is a TeX primitive). LaTeX authors
should reach first for the ‘\makebox’ command to get the effects of
‘\hss’ (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
- Here, the first line’s ‘\hss’ makes the Z stick out to the right,
+ Here, the first line's ‘\hss’ makes the Z stick out to the right,
overwriting the Y. In the second line the Z sticks out to the left,
overwriting the X.
@@ -11550,13 +11974,13 @@ Synopsis:
\spacefactor=INTEGER
- Influence LaTeX’s glue stretch and shrink behavior. Most user-level
-documents do not use this command.
+ Influence LaTeX's stretching and shrinking of glue. Few user-level
+documents need to use this.
While LaTeX is laying out the material, it may stretch or shrink the
gaps between words. (This space is not a character; it is called the
-“interword glue”; *note \hspace::). The ‘\spacefactor’ command (from
-Plain TeX) allows you to, for instance, have the space after a period
+“interword glue”; *note \hspace::). The ‘\spacefactor’ parameter (a TeX
+primitive) allows you to, for instance, have the space after a period
stretch more than the space after a word-ending letter.
After LaTeX places each character, or rule or other box, it sets a
@@ -11566,24 +11990,25 @@ happen. A space factor that is larger than the normal value means that
the glue can stretch more and shrink less. Normally, the space factor
is 1000. This value is in effect following most characters, and any
non-character box or math formula. But it is 3000 after a period,
-exclamation mark, or question mark, it is 2000 after a colon, 1500 after
-a semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
+exclamation mark, or question mark, 2000 after a colon, 1500 after a
+semicolon, 1250 after a comma, and 0 after a right parenthesis or
bracket, or closing double quote or single quote. Finally, it is 999
after a capital letter.
- If the space factor F is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font’s
+ If the space factor F is 1000 then the glue gap will be the font's
normal space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point this is
-3.3333 points). Otherwise, if the space factor F is greater than 2000
-then TeX adds the font’s extra space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10
-point this is 1.11111 points), and then the font’s normal stretch value
-is multiplied by f /1000 and the normal shrink value is multiplied by
+3.3333pt). Otherwise, if the space factor F is greater than 2000 then
+TeX adds the font's extra space value (for Computer Modern Roman 10
+point this is 1.11111pt), and then the font's normal stretch value is
+multiplied by f /1000 and the normal shrink value is multiplied by
1000/f (for Computer Modern Roman 10 point these are 1.66666 and
-1.11111 points).
+1.11111pt).
For example, consider the period ending ‘A man's best friend is his
-dog.’ After it, TeX puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
+dog.’. After it, TeX puts in a fixed extra space, and also allows the
glue to stretch 3 times as much and shrink 1/3 as much, as the glue
-after ‘friend’, which does not end in a period.
+after ‘friend’ or any of the other words, since they are not followed by
+punctuation.
The rules for space factors are even more complex because they play
additional roles. In practice, there are two consequences. First, if a
@@ -11591,19 +12016,19 @@ period or other punctuation is followed by a right parenthesis or
bracket, or right single or double quote then the spacing effect of that
period carries through those characters (that is, the following glue
will have increased stretch and shrink). Second, if punctuation comes
-after a capital letter then its effect is not in place so you get an
-ordinary space. This second case also affects abbreviations that do not
-end in a capital letter (*note \@::).
+after a capital letter then the normal effect of the period is does not
+happen, so you get an ordinary space. This second case also affects
+abbreviations that do not end in a capital letter (*note \@::).
You can only use ‘\spacefactor’ in paragraph mode or LR mode (*note
Modes::). You can see the current value with ‘\the\spacefactor’ or
‘\showthe\spacefactor’.
- (Comment, not really related to ‘\spacefactor’: if you get errors
-like ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode’, or ‘You can't use
-`\spacefactor' in math mode.’, or ‘Improper \spacefactor’ then you have
-probably tried to redefine an internal command. *Note \makeatletter &
-\makeatother::.)
+ Finally, not especially related to ‘\spacefactor’ itself: if you get
+errors like ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode’, or ‘You
+can't use `\spacefactor' in math mode.’, or ‘Improper \spacefactor’ then
+you have probably tried to redefine an internal command. *Note
+\makeatletter & \makeatother::.
19.5.1 ‘\@’
-----------
@@ -11612,22 +12037,19 @@ Synopsis:
CAPITAL-LETTER\@.
- Treat a period as sentence-ending, where LaTeX would otherwise think
-it is part of an abbreviation. LaTeX thinks that a period ends an
-abbreviation if the period comes after a capital letter, and otherwise
-thinks the period ends the sentence. By default, in justifying a line
-LaTeX adjusts the space after a sentence-ending period (or a question
-mark, exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than it adjusts the space
-between words (*note \spacefactor::).
+ Treat a period (or other punctuation) as sentence-ending, where LaTeX
+would otherwise think it is part of an abbreviation. LaTeX thinks that
+a period ends an abbreviation if the period comes after a capital
+letter, and otherwise thinks the period ends the sentence.
This example shows the two cases to remember.
The songs \textit{Red Guitar}, etc.\ are by Loudon Wainwright~III\@.
-The second period ends the sentence, despite that it is preceded by a
-capital. We tell LaTeX that it ends the sentence by putting ‘\@’ before
-it. The first period ends the abbreviation ‘etc.’ but not the sentence.
-The backslash-space, ‘\ ’, produces a mid-sentence space.
+The first period ends the abbreviation ‘etc.’ but not the sentence. The
+backslash-space, ‘\ ’, produces a mid-sentence space. The second period
+ends the sentence, despite it being preceded by a capital letter. We
+tell LaTeX that it ends the sentence by putting ‘\@’ before it.
So: if you have a capital letter followed by a period that ends the
sentence, then put ‘\@’ before the period. This holds even if there is
@@ -11640,16 +12062,22 @@ characters. For example, this
will have correct inter-sentence spacing after the period.
- The ‘\@’ command is only for a text mode. If you use it outside of a
-text mode then you get ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in vertical mode’
-(*note Modes::).
+ The ‘\@’ command is only for text modes. If you use it outside of a
+text mode then you get the error ‘You can't use `\spacefactor' in
+vertical mode’ (*note Modes::).
+
+ All the above applies equally to question marks and exclamation
+points as periods, since all are sentence-ending punctuation, and LaTeX
+increases the space after each in the same way, when they end a
+sentence. LaTeX also increases spacing after colon, semicolon, and
+comma characters (*note \spacefactor::).
- Comment: the converse case is a period ending an abbreviation whose
-last letter is not a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the
-last word in the sentence. For that case follow the period with a
+ In addition: the converse case is a period (or other punctuation)
+that does not end a sentence. For that case, follow the period with a
backslash-space, (‘\ ’), or a tie, (‘~’), or ‘\@’. Examples are ‘Nat.\
Acad.\ Science’, and ‘Mr.~Bean’, and ‘(manure, etc.\@) for sale’ (note
-in the last one that the ‘\@’ comes before the closing parenthesis).
+in the last one that the ‘\@’ comes after the period but before the
+closing parenthesis).
19.5.2 ‘\frenchspacing’ & ‘\nonfrenchspacing’
---------------------------------------------
@@ -11659,18 +12087,21 @@ Synopsis, one of:
\frenchspacing
\nonfrenchspacing
- The first declaration causes LaTeX to handle spacing between
-sentences in the same way as spacing between words in the middle of a
-sentence. The second switches back to the default handling in which
-spacing between sentences stretches or shrinks more (*note
-\spacefactor::).
+ ‘\frenchspacing’ causes LaTeX to make spacing after all punctuation,
+including periods, be the same as the space between words in the middle
+of a sentence. ‘\nonfrenchspacing’ switches back to the default
+handling in which spacing after most punctuation stretches or shrinks
+differently than a word space (*note \spacefactor::).
+
+ In American English, the typesetting tradition is to adjust,
+typically increasing, the space after punctuation more than the space
+between words that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring
+‘\frenchspacing’ (the command is inherited from plain TeX) switches to
+the tradition that all spaces are treated equally.
- Some typographic traditions, including English, prefer to adjust the
-space between sentences (or spaces following a question mark,
-exclamation point, comma, or colon) more than the space between words
-that are in the middle of a sentence. Declaring ‘\frenchspacing’ (the
-command is from plain TeX) switches to the tradition that all spaces are
-treated equally.
+ If your LaTeX document specifies the language being used, for example
+with the ‘babel’ package, the necessary settings should be taken care of
+for you.
19.5.3 ‘\normalsfcodes’
-----------------------
@@ -11686,16 +12117,15 @@ Synopsis:
==========================
This section refers to the command consisting of two characters, a
-backslash followed by a space.
-Synopsis:
+backslash followed by a space. Synopsis:
- \
+ \
Produce a space. By default it produces white space of length
3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt.
- When you type one or more blanks between words, LaTeX produces white
-space. But that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates.
+ When you type one or more blanks between words, LaTeX produces
+whitespace that is different than an explicit space. This illustrates:
\begin{tabular}{rl}
One blank:& makes some space \\
@@ -11726,9 +12156,9 @@ of ending a sentence, as in ‘Prof.\ Smith’ or ‘Jones et al.\ (1993)’
Under normal circumstances, ‘\’<TAB> and ‘\’<NEWLINE> are equivalent
to backslash-space, ‘\ ’.
- Please also note that in order to allow source code indentation,
-under normal circumstances, TeX ignores leading blanks in a line. So
-the following prints ‘one word’:
+ In order to allow source code indentation, under normal
+circumstances, TeX ignores leading blanks in a line. So the following
+prints ‘one word’:
one
word
@@ -11736,8 +12166,8 @@ the following prints ‘one word’:
where the white space between ‘one’ and ‘word’ is produced by the
newline after ‘one’, not by the space before ‘word’.
-19.7 ‘~’
-========
+19.7 ‘~’, ‘\nobreakspace’
+=========================
Synopsis:
@@ -11745,11 +12175,13 @@ Synopsis:
The “tie” character, ‘~’, produces a space between BEFORE and AFTER
at which the line will not be broken. By default the white space has
-length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt (*note Lengths::).
+length 3.33333pt plus 1.66666pt minus 1.11111pt (*note Lengths::). The
+command ‘\nobreakspace’ and the Unicode input character U+00A0 (also in
+many 8-bit encodings) are synonyms.
Note that the word ‘tie’ has this meaning in the TeX/Texinfo
-community; this differs from the typographic term “tie”, which is a
-diacritic in the shape of an arc, called a “tie-after” accent in ‘The
+community; this differs from the typographic term "tie", which is a
+diacritic in the shape of an arc, called a "tie-after" accent in ‘The
TeXbook’.
Here LaTeX will not break the line between the final two words:
@@ -11759,14 +12191,14 @@ TeXbook’.
In addition, despite the period, LaTeX does not use the end-of-sentence
spacing (*note \@::).
- Ties prevent the end of line separation of things where that could
-cause confusion. They also still allow hyphenation (of either of the
-tied words), so they are generally preferable to putting consecutive
-words in an ‘\mbox’ (*note \mbox & \makebox::).
+ Ties prevent a line break where that could cause confusion. They
+also still allow hyphenation (of either of the tied words), so they are
+generally preferable to putting consecutive words in an ‘\mbox’ (*note
+\mbox & \makebox::).
- They are also matters of taste, sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste,
-among readers. Nevertheless, here are some usage models, many of them
-from ‘The TeXbook’.
+ Exactly where ties should be used is something of a matter of taste,
+sometimes alarmingly dogmatic taste, among readers. Nevertheless, here
+are some usage models, many of them from ‘The TeXbook’.
• Between an enumerator label and number, such as in references:
‘Chapter~12’, or ‘Theorem~\ref{th:Wilsons}’, or
@@ -11796,8 +12228,8 @@ from ‘The TeXbook’.
• Between symbols in series: ‘$1$,~$2$, or~$3$’ or ‘$1$,~$2$,
\ldots,~$n$’.
- • Between a person’s given names and between multiple surnames:
- ‘Donald~E. Knuth’, or ‘Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo’, or ‘Charles~XII’—but
+ • Between a person's given names and between multiple surnames:
+ ‘Donald~E. Knuth’, or ‘Luis~I. Trabb~Pardo’, or ‘Charles~XII’--but
you must give TeX places to break the line so you might do ‘Charles
Louis Xavier~Joseph de~la Vall\'ee~Poussin’.
@@ -11850,7 +12282,7 @@ hit the AFTER-CHARACTER roman H
because the italic letter f leans far to the right.
- If AFTER-CHARACTER is a period or comma then don’t insert an italic
+ If AFTER-CHARACTER is a period or comma then don't insert an italic
correction since those punctuation symbols are so low to the baseline
already. However, with semicolons or colons, as well as with normal
letters, the italic correction can help. It is typically used between a
@@ -11897,10 +12329,10 @@ spaced dots.
\noindent John Aubrey, RN \dotfill{} Melbury Lodge
- To make the rule or dots go to the line’s end use ‘\null’ at the
+ To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use ‘\null’ at the
start or end.
- To change the rule’s thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+ To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
here
\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{%
@@ -11937,7 +12369,7 @@ Synopsis, one of:
These commands are fragile (*note \protect::).
Here the skip suggests the passage of time (from The Golden Ocean by
-O’Brian).
+O'Brian).
Mr Saumarez would have something rude to say to him, no doubt: he
was at home again, and it was delightful.
@@ -12020,7 +12452,7 @@ having zero height.
This example has four lists. In the first there is a much bigger gap
between items 2 and 3 than there is between items 1 and 2. The second
-list fixes that with a ‘\strut’ at the end of its first item’s second
+list fixes that with a ‘\strut’ at the end of its first item's second
line.
\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}
@@ -12053,7 +12485,7 @@ line.
\end{enumerate}
\end{minipage}%
-The final two lists use ‘\fbox’ to show what’s happening. The first
+The final two lists use ‘\fbox’ to show what's happening. The first
item ‘\parbox’ of the third list goes only to the bottom of its second
‘test’, which happens not have any characters that descend below the
baseline. The fourth list adds the strut that gives the needed extra
@@ -12062,7 +12494,7 @@ below-baseline space.
The ‘\strut’ command is often useful in graphics, such as in ‘TikZ’
or ‘Asymptote’. For instance, you may have a command such as
‘\graphnode{NODE-NAME}’ that fits a circle around NODE-NAME. However,
-unless you are careful the NODE-NAME’s ‘x’ and ‘y’ will produce
+unless you are careful the NODE-NAME's ‘x’ and ‘y’ will produce
different-diameter circles because the characters are different sizes.
A careful ‘\graphnode’ might insert a ‘\strut’, then NODE-NAME, and then
draw the circle.
@@ -12080,7 +12512,7 @@ keeps the second integral from hitting the first.
\end{tabular}
(Although the line-ending double backslash command has an available
-optional argument to change the corresponding baseline skip, that won’t
+optional argument to change the corresponding baseline skip, that won't
solve this issue. Changing the first double backslash to something like
‘\\[2.5ex]’ will put more room between the header line and the ‘\hline’
rule, and the integral would still hit the rule.)
@@ -12094,7 +12526,7 @@ Synopsis, one of:
\vspace*{LENGTH}
Add the vertical space LENGTH. The LENGTH can be positive, negative,
-or zero. It is a rubber length—it may contain a ‘plus’ or ‘minus’
+or zero. It is a rubber length--it may contain a ‘plus’ or ‘minus’
component (*note Lengths::).
This puts space between the two paragraphs.
@@ -12173,9 +12605,9 @@ Synopsis:
\addvspace{VERT-LENGTH}
Add a vertical space of VERT-LENGTH. However, if there are two or
-more ‘\addvspace’’s in a sequence then together they only add the space
+more ‘\addvspace’'s in a sequence then together they only add the space
needed to make the natural length equal to the maximum of the
-VERT-LENGTH’s in that sequence. This command is fragile (*note
+VERT-LENGTH's in that sequence. This command is fragile (*note
\protect::). The VERT-LENGTH is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
This example illustrates. The ‘picture’ draws a scale over which to
@@ -12199,14 +12631,14 @@ apart: the sum of the ‘\baselineskip’ and the 10pt from the first
Now uncomment the second ‘\addvspace’. It does not make the gap 20pt
longer; instead the gap is the sum of ‘\baselineskip’ and 20pt. So
-‘\addvspace’ in a sense does the opposite of its name—it makes sure that
-multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only the
-largest one is used.
+‘\addvspace’ in a sense does the opposite of its name--it makes sure
+that multiple vertical spaces do not accumulate, but instead that only
+the largest one is used.
LaTeX uses this command to adjust the vertical space above or below
an environment that starts a new paragraph. For instance, a ‘theorem’
environment begins and ends with ‘\addvspace’ so that two consecutive
-‘theorem’’s are separated by one vertical space, not two.
+‘theorem’'s are separated by one vertical space, not two.
A error ‘Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item’ pointing to an
‘\addvspace’ means that you were not in vertical mode when you hit this
@@ -12244,12 +12676,12 @@ name, ‘T-34’.
The first two command invocations shown, ‘\mbox’ and ‘\makebox’, are
roughly the same. They create a box just wide enough to contain the
-TEXT. (They are like plain TeX’s ‘\hbox’.)
+TEXT. (They are like plain TeX's ‘\hbox’.)
In the third version the optional argument WIDTH specifies the width
of the box. Note that the space occupied by the text need not equal the
width of the box. For one thing, TEXT can be too small; this creates a
-full-line box
+full-line box:
\makebox[\linewidth]{Chapter Exam}
@@ -12258,7 +12690,7 @@ See the example below of zero-width boxes.
In the WIDTH argument you can use the following lengths that refer to
the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets on typesetting TEXT: ‘\depth’,
-‘\height’, ‘\width’, ‘\totalheight’ (this is the box’s height plus its
+‘\height’, ‘\width’, ‘\totalheight’ (this is the box's height plus its
depth). For example, to make a box with the text stretched to double
the natural size you can say this.
@@ -12375,7 +12807,7 @@ frame the result.
*Note Colored boxes::, for colors other than black and white.
The ‘picture’ environment has a version of the ‘\framebox’ command
-where the units depend on ‘picture’’s ‘\unitlength’ (*note \framebox
+where the units depend on ‘picture’'s ‘\unitlength’ (*note \framebox
(picture)::).
20.3 ‘\parbox’
@@ -12400,7 +12832,7 @@ fragile (*note \protect::).
\end{picture}
The CONTENTS are processed in a text mode (*note Modes::) so LaTeX
-will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won’t make multiple
+will break lines to make a paragraph. But it won't make multiple
paragraphs; for that, use a ‘minipage’ environment (*note minipage::).
The options for ‘\parbox’ (except for CONTENTS) are the same as those
@@ -12458,7 +12890,7 @@ gets by typesetting TEXT.
In the arguments DISTANCE, HEIGHT, and DEPTH you can use the
following lengths that refer to the dimension of the box that LaTeX gets
on typesetting TEXT: ‘\depth’, ‘\height’, ‘\width’, ‘\totalheight’ (this
-is the box’s height plus its depth).
+is the box's height plus its depth).
This will align two graphics on their top (*note Graphics::).
@@ -12514,7 +12946,7 @@ WIDTH, and the position of the text inside that box as POSITION. *Note
In the ‘\sbox’ and ‘\savebox’ commands the TEXT is typeset in LR mode
so it does not have line breaks (*note Modes::). If you use these then
-LaTeX doesn’t give you an error but it ignores what you want: if you
+LaTeX doesn't give you an error but it ignores what you want: if you
enter ‘\sbox{\newreg}{test \\ test}’ and ‘\usebox{\newreg}’ then you get
‘testtest’, while if you enter ‘\sbox{\newreg}{test \par test}’ and
‘\usebox{\newreg}’ then you get ‘test test’, but no error or warning.
@@ -12531,7 +12963,7 @@ To fix this use a ‘\parbox’ or ‘minipage’ as here.
...
\usebox{\areg}
- As an example of the efficiency of reusing a register’s contents,
+ As an example of the efficiency of reusing a register's contents,
this puts the same picture on each page of the document by putting it in
the header. LaTeX only typesets it once.
@@ -12597,263 +13029,7 @@ more information and examples, *note \sbox & \savebox::. (Note that the
variable name BOX-CMD starts with a backslash, ‘\’.) This command is
robust (*note \protect::).
-21 Color
-********
-
-You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box
-or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
-
- Color support comes as an additional package. So put
-‘\usepackage{color}’ in your document preamble to use the commands
-described here.
-
- Many other packages also supplement LaTeX’s color abilities.
-Particularly worth mentioning is ‘xcolor’, which is widely used and
-significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
-‘HTML’ and ‘Hsb’ color models.
-
-21.1 ‘color’ package options
-============================
-
-Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
-
- \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{color}
-
- When you load the ‘color’ package there are two kinds of available
-options.
-
- The first specifies the “printer driver”. LaTeX doesn’t contain
-information about different output systems but instead depends on
-information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
-driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system’s
-default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
-across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
-currently relevant ones are: ‘dvipdfmx’, ‘dvips’, ‘dvisvgm’, ‘luatex’,
-‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’. The two ‘xdvi’ and ‘oztex’ are essentially aliases
-for ‘dvips’ (and ‘xdvi’ is monochrome). Ones that should not be used
-for new systems are: ‘dvipdf’, ‘dvipdfm’, ‘dviwin’, ‘dvipsone’, ‘emtex’,
-‘pctexps’, ‘pctexwin’, ‘pctexhp’, ‘pctex32’, ‘truetex’, ‘tcidvi’, ‘vtex’
-(and ‘dviwindo’ is an alias for ‘dvipsone’).
-
- The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
-
-‘monochrome’
- Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but
- do not generate color either.
-
-‘dvipsnames’
- Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
- particularly in legacy documents. These color names were
- originally provided by the ‘dvips’ driver, giving the option name.
-
-‘nodvipsnames’
- Do not load that list of color names, saving LaTeX a tiny amount of
- memory space.
-
-21.2 Color models
-=================
-
-A “color model” is a way of representing colors. LaTeX’s capabilities
-depend on the printer driver. However, the ‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’, and
-‘luatex’ printer drivers are today by far the most commonly used. The
-models below work for those drivers. All but one of these is also
-supported by essentially all other printer drivers used today.
-
- Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive. Additive
-mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
-of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments,
-such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
-and yellow makes black.
-
-‘cmyk’
- A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
- inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second
- is magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of
- 0 means minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This
- model is often used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
-
-‘gray’
- A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are
- shades of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
-
-‘rgb’
- A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
- inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component,
- the second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0
- means that none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full
- intensity. This is an additive model.
-
-‘RGB’
- (‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’, ‘luatex’ drivers) A comma-separated list with
- three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
- convenience for using ‘rgb’ since outside of LaTeX colors are often
- described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
- The values entered here are converted to the ‘rgb’ model by
- dividing by 255.
-
-‘named’
- Colors are accessed by name, such as ‘PrussianBlue’. The list of
- names depends on the driver, but all support the names ‘black’,
- ‘blue’, ‘cyan’, ‘green’, ‘magenta’, ‘red’, ‘white’, and ‘yellow’
- (See the ‘dvipsnames’ option in *note Color package options::).
-
-21.3 Commands for color
-=======================
-
-These are the commands available with the ‘color’ package.
-
-21.3.1 Define colors
---------------------
-
-Synopsis:
-
- \definecolor{NAME}{MODEL}{SPECIFICATION}
-
- Give the name NAME to the color. For example, after this
-
- \definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
-
-you can use that color name with ‘Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!’.
-
- This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change
-and not be misleading.
-
- \definecolor{logocolor}{RGB}{145,92,131} % RGB needs pdflatex
- \newcommand{\logo}{\textcolor{logocolor}{Bob's Big Bagels}}
-
- Often a document’s colors are defined in the preamble, or in the
-class or style, rather than in the document body.
-
-21.3.2 Colored text
--------------------
-
-Synopses:
-
- \textcolor{NAME}{...}
- \textcolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}
-
-or
-
- \color{NAME}
- \color[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}
-
- The affected text gets the color. This line
-
- \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, King of Kings;}
- Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
-
-causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
-can use a color declared with ‘\definecolor’ in exactly the same way
-that we just used the builtin color ‘magenta’.
-
- \definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
- I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{sports car}.
-
- The two ‘\textcolor’ and ‘\color’ differ in that the first is a
-command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
-this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
-form is a declaration, as in ‘The moon is made of {\color{green} green}
-cheese’, so it is in effect until the end of the current group or
-environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as below
-where it colors everything inside the ‘center’ environment, including
-the vertical and horizontal lines.
-
- \begin{center} \color{blue}
- \begin{tabular}{l|r}
- UL &UR \\ \hline
- LL &LR
- \end{tabular}
- \end{center}
-
- You can use color in equations. A document might have this
-definition in the preamble
-
- \definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
-
-and then contain this equation.
-
- \begin{equation}
- \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
- \end{equation}
-
- Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or
-style but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in
-the synopses.
-
- Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
- {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37}Gold} for the team.
-
- The format of COLOR SPECIFICATION depends on the color model (*note
-Color models::). For instance, while ‘rgb’ takes three numbers, ‘gray’
-takes only one.
-
- The selection was \textcolor[gray]{0.5}{grayed out}.
-
- Colors inside colors do not combine. Thus
-
- \textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}
-
-has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
-
-21.3.3 Colored boxes
---------------------
-
-Synopses:
-
- \colorbox{NAME}{...}
- \colorbox[MODEL NAME]{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
-
-or
-
- \fcolorbox{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
- \fcolorbox[MODEL NAME]{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
-
- Make a box with the stated background color. The ‘\fcolorbox’
-command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
-
- Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
-
-makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
-depth and height from the ‘\strut’ (so the depth is ‘-.3\baselineskip’
-and the height is ‘\baselineskip’). This puts white text on a blue
-background.
-
- \colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
-
- The ‘\fcolorbox’ commands use the same parameters as ‘\fbox’ (*note
-\fbox & \framebox::), ‘\fboxrule’ and ‘\fboxsep’, to set the thickness
-of the rule and the boundary between the box interior and the
-surrounding rule. LaTeX’s defaults are ‘0.4pt’ and ‘3pt’, respectively.
-
- This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
-that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
-of the second line.
-
- {\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}
- \fcolorbox{black}{red}{Under no circumstances turn this knob.}}
-
-21.3.4 Colored pages
---------------------
-
-Synopses:
-
- \pagecolor{NAME}
- \pagecolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}
- \nopagecolor
-
- The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent
-pages, to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the
-second form *note Colored text::. The third returns the background to
-normal, which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported
-use ‘\pagecolor{white}’, although that will make a white background
-rather than the default transparent background.)
-
- ...
- \pagecolor{cyan}
- ...
- \nopagecolor
-
-22 Graphics
+21 Graphics
***********
You can use graphics such as PNG or PDF files in your LaTeX document.
@@ -12890,7 +13066,7 @@ Asymptote and MetaPost. One that uses a graphical interface is Xfig.
Full description of these systems is outside the scope of this document;
see their documentation on CTAN.
-22.1 ‘graphics’ package options
+21.1 ‘graphics’ package options
===============================
Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
@@ -12910,7 +13086,7 @@ kinds of available options.
The first is that LaTeX does not contain information about different
output systems but instead depends on information stored in a “printer
driver” file. Normally you should not specify the driver option in the
-document, and instead rely on your system’s default. One advantage of
+document, and instead rely on your system's default. One advantage of
this is that it makes the document portable across systems.
For completeness here is a list of the drivers. The currently
@@ -12954,7 +13130,7 @@ with a ‘.def’ extension, such as ‘pdftex.def’.
multiples, such as 1.23, in ‘%%HiResBoundingBox’ lines. This
option has LaTeX to read the size from the latter.
-22.2 ‘graphics’ package configuration
+21.2 ‘graphics’ package configuration
=====================================
These commands configure the way LaTeX searches the file system for the
@@ -12964,9 +13140,9 @@ graphic.
dependent. In this document we cover GNU/Linux, Macintosh, and Windows,
as those systems are typically configured. For other situations consult
the documentation in ‘grfguide.pdf’, or the LaTeX source, or your TeX
-distribution’s documentation.
+distribution's documentation.
-22.2.1 ‘\graphicspath’
+21.2.1 ‘\graphicspath’
----------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -12986,9 +13162,9 @@ declaration below tells the system to then look in the subdirectory
...
\graphicspath{ {pix/} {../pix/} }
- The ‘\graphicspath’ declaration is optional. If you don’t include it
-then LaTeX’s default is to search all of the places that it usually
-looks for a file (it uses LaTeX’s ‘\input@path’). In particular, in
+ The ‘\graphicspath’ declaration is optional. If you don't include it
+then LaTeX's default is to search all of the places that it usually
+looks for a file (it uses LaTeX's ‘\input@path’). In particular, in
this case one of the places it looks is the current directory.
Enclose each directory name in curly braces; for example, above it
@@ -13029,7 +13205,7 @@ it contains ‘\include{chapters/chap1}’. If in ‘chap1.tex’ you put
‘\graphicspath{{plots/}}’ then LaTeX will not search for graphics in
‘book/chapters/plots’, but instead in ‘book/plots’.
-22.2.2 ‘\DeclareGraphicsExtensions’
+21.2.2 ‘\DeclareGraphicsExtensions’
-----------------------------------
Synopses:
@@ -13071,7 +13247,7 @@ most recent ‘pdftex.def’ has this extension list.
more than once. Show its value with
‘\makeatletter\typeout{\Gin@extensions}\makeatother’.
-22.2.3 ‘\DeclareGraphicsRule’
+21.2.3 ‘\DeclareGraphicsRule’
-----------------------------
Synopsis:
@@ -13144,13 +13320,13 @@ COMMAND
explicitly allow it. See the documentation for your TeX
distribution.
-22.3 Commands for graphics
+21.3 Commands for graphics
==========================
These are the commands available with the ‘graphics’ and ‘graphicx’
packages.
-22.3.1 ‘\includegraphics’
+21.3.1 ‘\includegraphics’
-------------------------
Synopses for ‘graphics’ package:
@@ -13247,7 +13423,7 @@ gives the coordinates of the top right corner of the image, as a pair of
TeX dimensions (*note Units of length::). If the units are omitted they
default to ‘bp’. In this case, the lower left corner of the image is
assumed to be at (0,0). If two optional arguments are present then the
-leading one is ‘[LLX,LLY]’, specifying the coordinates of the image’s
+leading one is ‘[LLX,LLY]’, specifying the coordinates of the image's
lower left. Thus, ‘\includegraphics[1in,0.618in]{...}’ calls for the
graphic to be placed so it is 1 inch wide and 0.618 inches tall and so
its origin is at (0,0).
@@ -13270,7 +13446,7 @@ two will end with different widths and heights.
Note that a graphic is placed by LaTeX into a box, which is
traditionally referred to as its “bounding box” (distinct from the
-PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic’s printed area may
+PostScript BoundingBox described below). The graphic's printed area may
go beyond this box, or sit inside this box, but when LaTeX makes up a
page it puts together boxes and this is the box allocated for the
graphic.
@@ -13328,7 +13504,7 @@ graphic.
left, ‘r’ for right, ‘b’ for bottom, ‘c’ for center, ‘t’ for top,
and ‘B’ for baseline. Thus, entering the command
‘\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=c]{moon}’ will turn the picture
- upside down about that picture’s center, while the command
+ upside down about that picture's center, while the command
‘\includegraphics[angle=180,origin=lB]{LeBateau}’ will turn its
picture upside down about its left baseline. (The character ‘c’
gives the horizontal center in ‘bc’ or ‘tc’, but gives the vertical
@@ -13377,7 +13553,7 @@ graphic.
to which the contents of the page are to be clipped when displayed.
The BleedBox is the region to which the contents of the page should
be clipped in production. The TrimBox is the intended dimensions
- of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page’s
+ of the finished page. The ArtBox is the extent of the page's
meaningful content. The driver will set the image size based on
CropBox if present, otherwise it will not use one of the others,
with a driver-defined order of preference. MediaBox is always
@@ -13407,7 +13583,7 @@ graphic.
graphic files, which have a size specified with a line ‘%%BoundingBox’
that appears in the file. It has four values, giving the lower x
coordinate, lower y coordinate, upper x coordinate, and upper y
-coordinate. The units are PostScript points, equivalent to TeX’s big
+coordinate. The units are PostScript points, equivalent to TeX's big
points, 1/72 inch. For example, if an ‘.eps’ file has the line
‘%%BoundingBox 10 20 40 80’ then its natural size is 30/72 inch wide by
60/72 inch tall.
@@ -13439,13 +13615,13 @@ points, 1/72 inch. For example, if an ‘.eps’ file has the line
then LaTeX will look for ‘%%HiResBoundingBox’ lines instead of
‘%%BoundingBox’ lines. (The ‘BoundingBox’ lines use only natural
numbers while the ‘HiResBoundingBox’ lines use decimals; both use
- units equivalent to TeX’s big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a
+ units equivalent to TeX's big points, 1/72 inch.) To override a
prior setting of ‘true’, you can set it to ‘false’.
- These following options allow a user to override LaTeX’s method of
+ These following options allow a user to override LaTeX's method of
choosing the graphic type based on the filename extension. An example
-is that ‘\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xxx,read=.xxx]{lion}’ will read
-the file ‘lion.xxx’ as though it were ‘lion.png’. For more on these,
+is that ‘\includegraphics[type=png,ext=.xyz,read=.xyz]{lion}’ will read
+the file ‘lion.xyz’ as though it were ‘lion.png’. For more on these,
*note \DeclareGraphicsRule::.
‘type’
@@ -13465,7 +13641,7 @@ the file ‘lion.xxx’ as though it were ‘lion.png’. For more on these,
for a discussion of enabling the ‘\write18’ functionality to run
external commands.
-22.3.2 ‘\rotatebox’
+21.3.2 ‘\rotatebox’
-------------------
Synopsis if you use the ‘graphics’ package:
@@ -13508,7 +13684,7 @@ you can get the same effect without needing this package, except for the
‘x’ and ‘y’ options (*note \includegraphics::).
‘origin’
- The point of the MATERIAL’s box about which the rotation happens.
+ The point of the MATERIAL's box about which the rotation happens.
Possible value is any string containing one or two of: ‘l’ for
left, ‘r’ for right, ‘b’ for bottom, ‘c’ for center, ‘t’ for top,
and ‘B’ for baseline. Thus, the first line here
@@ -13525,7 +13701,7 @@ you can get the same effect without needing this package, except for the
‘x, y’
Specify an arbitrary point of rotation with ‘\rotatebox[x=TeX
DIMENSION,y=TeX DIMENSION]{...}’ (*note Units of length::). These
- give the offset from the box’s reference point.
+ give the offset from the box's reference point.
‘units’
This key allows you to change the default of degrees
@@ -13533,7 +13709,7 @@ you can get the same effect without needing this package, except for the
degrees clockwise and setting ‘units=6.283185’ changes to radians
counterclockwise.
-22.3.3 ‘\scalebox’
+21.3.3 ‘\scalebox’
------------------
Synopses:
@@ -13565,7 +13741,7 @@ Thus, ‘Able was I\reflectbox{Able was I}’ will show the phrase ‘Able was
I’ immediately followed by its mirror reflection against a vertical
axis.
-22.3.4 ‘\resizebox’
+21.3.4 ‘\resizebox’
-------------------
Synopses:
@@ -13583,7 +13759,7 @@ vertically by the same factor to keep it from being distorted.
\resizebox{0.5in}{!}{\includegraphics{lion}}
- The unstarred form ‘\resizebox’ takes VERTICAL LENGTH to be the box’s
+ The unstarred form ‘\resizebox’ takes VERTICAL LENGTH to be the box's
height while the starred form ‘\resizebox*’ takes it to be height+depth.
For instance, make the text have a height+depth of a quarter-inch with
‘\resizebox*{!}{0.25in}{\parbox{3.5in}{This box has both height and
@@ -13594,26 +13770,283 @@ refer to the original size of the box. Thus, make the text two inches
wide but keep the original height with ‘\resizebox{2in}{\height}{Two
inches}’.
+22 Color
+********
+
+You can add color to text, rules, etc. You can also have color in a box
+or on an entire page and write text on top of it.
+
+ Color support comes as an additional package. So put
+‘\usepackage{color}’ in your document preamble to use the commands
+described here.
+
+ Many other packages also supplement LaTeX's color abilities.
+Particularly worth mentioning is ‘xcolor’, which is widely used and
+significantly extends the capabilities described here, including adding
+‘HTML’ and ‘Hsb’ color models.
+
+22.1 ‘color’ package options
+============================
+
+Synopsis (must be in the document preamble):
+
+ \usepackage[COMMA-SEPARATED OPTION LIST]{color}
+
+ When you load the ‘color’ package there are two kinds of available
+options.
+
+ The first specifies the “printer driver”. LaTeX doesn't contain
+information about different output systems but instead depends on
+information stored in a file. Normally you should not specify the
+driver option in the document, and instead rely on your system's
+default. One advantage of this is that it makes the document portable
+across systems. For completeness we include a list of the drivers. The
+currently relevant ones are: ‘dvipdfmx’, ‘dvips’, ‘dvisvgm’, ‘luatex’,
+‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’. The two ‘xdvi’ and ‘oztex’ are essentially aliases
+for ‘dvips’ (and ‘xdvi’ is monochrome). Ones that should not be used
+for new systems are: ‘dvipdf’, ‘dvipdfm’, ‘dviwin’, ‘dvipsone’, ‘emtex’,
+‘pctexps’, ‘pctexwin’, ‘pctexhp’, ‘pctex32’, ‘truetex’, ‘tcidvi’, ‘vtex’
+(and ‘dviwindo’ is an alias for ‘dvipsone’).
+
+ The second kind of options, beyond the drivers, are below.
+
+‘monochrome’
+ Disable the color commands, so that they do not generate errors but
+ do not generate color either.
+
+‘dvipsnames’
+ Make available a list of 68 color names that are often used,
+ particularly in legacy documents. These color names were
+ originally provided by the ‘dvips’ driver, giving the option name.
+
+‘nodvipsnames’
+ Do not load that list of color names, saving LaTeX a tiny amount of
+ memory space.
+
+22.2 Color models
+=================
+
+A “color model” is a way of representing colors. LaTeX's capabilities
+depend on the printer driver. However, the ‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’, and
+‘luatex’ printer drivers are today by far the most commonly used. The
+models below work for those drivers. All but one of these is also
+supported by essentially all other printer drivers used today.
+
+ Note that color combination can be additive or subtractive. Additive
+mixes colors of light, so that for instance combining full intensities
+of red, green, and blue produces white. Subtractive mixes pigments,
+such as with inks, so that combining full intensity of cyan, magenta,
+and yellow makes black.
+
+‘cmyk’
+ A comma-separated list with four real numbers between 0 and 1,
+ inclusive. The first number is the intensity of cyan, the second
+ is magenta, and the others are yellow and black. A number value of
+ 0 means minimal intensity, while a 1 is for full intensity. This
+ model is often used in color printing. It is a subtractive model.
+
+‘gray’
+ A single real number between 0 and 1, inclusive. The colors are
+ shades of grey. The number 0 produces black while 1 gives white.
+
+‘rgb’
+ A comma-separated list with three real numbers between 0 and 1,
+ inclusive. The first number is the intensity of the red component,
+ the second is green, and the third the blue. A number value of 0
+ means that none of that component is added in, while a 1 means full
+ intensity. This is an additive model.
+
+‘RGB’
+ (‘pdftex’, ‘xetex’, ‘luatex’ drivers) A comma-separated list with
+ three integers between 0 and 255, inclusive. This model is a
+ convenience for using ‘rgb’ since outside of LaTeX colors are often
+ described in a red-green-blue model using numbers in this range.
+ The values entered here are converted to the ‘rgb’ model by
+ dividing by 255.
+
+‘named’
+ Colors are accessed by name, such as ‘PrussianBlue’. The list of
+ names depends on the driver, but all support the names ‘black’,
+ ‘blue’, ‘cyan’, ‘green’, ‘magenta’, ‘red’, ‘white’, and ‘yellow’
+ (See the ‘dvipsnames’ option in *note Color package options::).
+
+22.3 Commands for color
+=======================
+
+These are the commands available with the ‘color’ package.
+
+22.3.1 Define colors
+--------------------
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \definecolor{NAME}{MODEL}{SPECIFICATION}
+
+ Give the name NAME to the color. For example, after this
+
+ \definecolor{silver}{rgb}{0.75,0.75,0.74}
+
+you can use that color name with ‘Hi ho, \textcolor{silver}{Silver}!’.
+
+ This example gives the color a more abstract name, so it could change
+and not be misleading.
+
+ \definecolor{logocolor}{RGB}{145,92,131} % RGB needs pdflatex
+ \newcommand{\logo}{\textcolor{logocolor}{Bob's Big Bagels}}
+
+ Often a document's colors are defined in the preamble, or in the
+class or style, rather than in the document body.
+
+22.3.2 Colored text
+-------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \textcolor{NAME}{...}
+ \textcolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}{...}
+
+or
+
+ \color{NAME}
+ \color[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}
+
+ The affected text gets the color. This line
+
+ \textcolor{magenta}{My name is Ozymandias, King of Kings;}
+ Look on my works, ye Mighty, and despair!
+
+causes the first half to be in magenta while the rest is in black. You
+can use a color declared with ‘\definecolor’ in exactly the same way
+that we just used the builtin color ‘magenta’.
+
+ \definecolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{rgb}{1.0,0.11,0.0}
+ I'm thinking about getting a \textcolor{MidlifeCrisisRed}{sports car}.
+
+ The two ‘\textcolor’ and ‘\color’ differ in that the first is a
+command form, enclosing the text to be colored as an argument. Often
+this form is more convenient, or at least more explicit. The second
+form is a declaration, as in ‘The moon is made of {\color{green} green}
+cheese’, so it is in effect until the end of the current group or
+environment. This is sometimes useful when writing macros or as below
+where it colors everything inside the ‘center’ environment, including
+the vertical and horizontal lines.
+
+ \begin{center} \color{blue}
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r}
+ UL &UR \\ \hline
+ LL &LR
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ You can use color in equations. A document might have this
+definition in the preamble
+
+ \definecolor{highlightcolor}{RGB}{225,15,0}
+
+and then contain this equation.
+
+ \begin{equation}
+ \int_a^b \textcolor{highlightcolor}{f'(x)}\,dx=f(b)-f(a)
+ \end{equation}
+
+ Typically the colors used in a document are declared in a class or
+style but sometimes you want a one-off. Those are the second forms in
+the synopses.
+
+ Colors of \textcolor[rgb]{0.33,0.14,0.47}{Purple} and
+ {\color[rgb]{0.72,0.60,0.37}Gold} for the team.
+
+ The format of COLOR SPECIFICATION depends on the color model (*note
+Color models::). For instance, while ‘rgb’ takes three numbers, ‘gray’
+takes only one.
+
+ The selection was \textcolor[gray]{0.5}{grayed out}.
+
+ Colors inside colors do not combine. Thus
+
+ \textcolor{green}{kind of \textcolor{blue}{blue}}
+
+has a final word that is blue, not a combination of blue and green.
+
+22.3.3 Colored boxes
+--------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \colorbox{NAME}{...}
+ \colorbox[MODEL NAME]{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+
+or
+
+ \fcolorbox{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+ \fcolorbox[MODEL NAME]{FRAME COLOR}{BOX BACKGROUND COLOR}{...}
+
+ Make a box with the stated background color. The ‘\fcolorbox’
+command puts a frame around the box. For instance this
+
+ Name:~\colorbox{cyan}{\makebox[5cm][l]{\strut}}
+
+makes a cyan-colored box that is five centimeters long and gets its
+depth and height from the ‘\strut’ (so the depth is ‘-.3\baselineskip’
+and the height is ‘\baselineskip’). This puts white text on a blue
+background.
+
+ \colorbox{blue}{\textcolor{white}{Welcome to the machine.}}
+
+ The ‘\fcolorbox’ commands use the same parameters as ‘\fbox’ (*note
+\fbox & \framebox::), ‘\fboxrule’ and ‘\fboxsep’, to set the thickness
+of the rule and the boundary between the box interior and the
+surrounding rule. LaTeX's defaults are ‘0.4pt’ and ‘3pt’, respectively.
+
+ This example changes the thickness of the border to 0.8 points. Note
+that it is surrounded by curly braces so that the change ends at the end
+of the second line.
+
+ {\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.8pt}
+ \fcolorbox{black}{red}{Under no circumstances turn this knob.}}
+
+22.3.4 Colored pages
+--------------------
+
+Synopses:
+
+ \pagecolor{NAME}
+ \pagecolor[COLOR MODEL]{COLOR SPECIFICATION}
+ \nopagecolor
+
+ The first two set the background of the page, and all subsequent
+pages, to the color. For an explanation of the specification in the
+second form *note Colored text::. The third returns the background to
+normal, which is a transparent background. (If that is not supported
+use ‘\pagecolor{white}’, although that will make a white background
+rather than the default transparent background.)
+
+ ...
+ \pagecolor{cyan}
+ ...
+ \nopagecolor
+
23 Special insertions
*********************
LaTeX provides commands for inserting characters that have a special
meaning do not correspond to simple characters you can type.
-23.1 Reserved characters
-========================
+23.1 Printing special characters
+================================
-LaTeX sets aside the following characters for special purposes. For
-example, the percent sign ‘%’ is for comments. They are called
-“reserved characters” or “special characters”. They are all discussed
-elsewhere in this manual.
+LaTeX sets aside a few characters for special purposes; they are called
+reserved characters or special characters. Here they are:
# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \
+ The meaning of all the special characters is given elsewhere in this
+manual (*note Reserved characters::).
+
If you want a reserved character to be printed as itself, in the text
body font, for all but the final three characters in that list simply
-put a backslash ‘\’ in front of the character. Thus, typing ‘\$1.23’
-will produce ‘$1.23’ in your output.
+put a ‘\’ in front of the character. Thus, typing ‘\$1.23’ will produce
+‘$1.23’ in your output.
As to the last three characters, to get a tilde in the text body font
use ‘\~{}’ (omitting the curly braces would result in the next character
@@ -13621,12 +14054,12 @@ receiving a tilde accent). Similarly, to get a text body font
circumflex use ‘\^{}’. To get a backslash in the font of the text body,
enter ‘\textbackslash{}’.
- To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font use ‘\verb!!’
-as below (the double backslash ‘\\’ in the example is only there to
-split the lines in the output).
+ To produce the reserved characters in a typewriter font, use
+‘\verb!!’ as below (the ‘\newline’ in the example is there only to split
+the lines in the output).
\begin{center}
- \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \\
+ \# \$ \% \& \{ \} \_ \~{} \^{} \textbackslash \newline
\verb!# $ % & { } _ ~ ^ \!
\end{center}
@@ -13642,7 +14075,7 @@ Synopsis:
Change the case of characters. The TeX primitive commands
‘\uppercase’ and ‘\lowercase’ are set up by default to work only with
-the 26 letters a–z and A–Z. The LaTeX commands ‘\MakeUppercase’ and
+the 26 letters a-z and A-Z. The LaTeX commands ‘\MakeUppercase’ and
‘\MakeLowercase’ commands also change characters accessed by commands
such as ‘\ae’ or ‘\aa’. The commands ‘\MakeUppercase’ and
‘\MakeLowercase’ are robust but they have moving arguments (*note
@@ -13678,8 +14111,8 @@ standard LaTeX commands ‘\MakeUppercase’ and ‘\MakeLowerCase’.
Handling all the casing rules specified by Unicode, e.g., for
non-Latin scripts, is a much bigger job than anything envisioned in the
original TeX and LaTeX. It has been implemented in the ‘expl3’ package
-as of 2020. The article “Case changing: From TeX primitives to the
-Unicode algorithm”, (Joseph Wright, ‘TUGboat’ 41:1,
+as of 2020. The article "Case changing: From TeX primitives to the
+Unicode algorithm", (Joseph Wright, ‘TUGboat’ 41:1,
<https://tug.org/TUGboat/tb41-1/tb127wright-case.pdf>), gives a good
overview of the topic, past and present.
@@ -13721,12 +14154,16 @@ encoding).
‘\LaTeXe’
The LaTeX2e logo.
+‘\guillemetleft («)’
+‘\guillemetright (»)’
‘\guillemotleft («)’
‘\guillemotright (»)’
‘\guilsinglleft (‹)’
‘\guilsinglright (›)’
«, », ‹, › Double and single angle quotation marks, commonly used
- in French.
+ in French. The commands ‘@guillemotleft’ and ‘@guillemotright’ are
+ synonyms for ‘@guillemet...’; these are misspellings inherited from
+ Adobe. (Guillemots are seabirds; guillemets are French quotes.)
‘\ldots’
‘\textellipsis’
@@ -13736,7 +14173,7 @@ encoding).
description for additional general information.
‘\lq’
- ‘ Left (opening) quote.
+ ' Left (opening) quote.
‘\P’
‘\textparagraph’
@@ -13751,7 +14188,7 @@ encoding).
„ and ‚ Double and single quotation marks on the baseline.
‘\rq’
- ’ Right (closing) quote.
+ ' Right (closing) quote.
‘\S’
‘\textsection’
@@ -13819,13 +14256,13 @@ encoding).
$ Dollar sign.
‘\textemdash (or ‘---’)’
- — Em-dash. Used for punctuation, usually similar to commas or
- parentheses, as in ‘‘The playoffs---if you're lucky enough to make
- the playoffs---are more like a sprint.’’ Conventions for spacing
+ -- Em-dash. Used for punctuation, usually similar to commas or
+ parentheses, as in '‘The playoffs---if you're lucky enough to make
+ the playoffs---are more like a sprint.’' Conventions for spacing
around em-dashes vary widely.
‘\textendash (or ‘--’)’
- – En-dash. Used for ranges, as in ‘‘see pages 12--14’’.
+ - En-dash. Used for ranges, as in '‘see pages 12--14’'.
‘\texteuro’
@@ -13842,8 +14279,8 @@ encoding).
Dash used between numerals, Unicode U+2012. Defined in the June
2021 release of LaTeX. When used in pdfTeX, approximated by an
en-dash; with a Unicode engine, either typesets the glyph if
- available in the current font, or writes the usual “Missing
- character” warning to the log file.
+ available in the current font, or writes the usual "Missing
+ character" warning to the log file.
‘\textgreater’
> Greater than symbol.
@@ -13876,16 +14313,16 @@ encoding).
¿ Upside down question mark.
‘\textquotedblleft (or ‘``’)’
- “ Double left quote.
+ " Double left quote.
‘\textquotedblright (or ‘''’)’
- ” Double right quote.
+ " Double right quote.
‘\textquoteleft (or ‘`’)’
- ‘ Single left quote.
+ ' Single left quote.
‘\textquoteright (or ‘'’)’
- ’ Single right quote.
+ ' Single right quote.
‘\textquotesingle’
', Straight single quote. (From TS1 encoding.)
@@ -13901,13 +14338,13 @@ encoding).
→, Right arrow.
‘\textthreequartersemdash’
- ﹘, “Three-quarters” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+ ﹘, "Three-quarters" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
‘\texttrademark’
™ Trademark symbol.
‘\texttwelveudash’
- ﹘, “Two-thirds” em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
+ ﹘, "Two-thirds" em-dash, between en-dash and em-dash.
‘\textunderscore’
_ Underscore.
@@ -13918,7 +14355,7 @@ encoding).
23.5 Accents
============
-LaTeX has wide support for many of the world’s scripts and languages,
+LaTeX has wide support for many of the world's scripts and languages,
provided through the core ‘babel’ package, which supports pdfLaTeX,
XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX. The ‘polyglossia’ package provides similar
support with the latter two engines.
@@ -14055,7 +14492,7 @@ as it cannot analyze upper/lower case.
23.6 Additional Latin letters
=============================
-Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond A–Z that
+Here are the basic LaTeX commands for inserting letters beyond A-Z that
extend the Latin alphabet, used primarily in languages other than
English.
@@ -14116,51 +14553,46 @@ Synopsis:
\usepackage[ENCODING-NAME]{inputenc}
- Declare the input file’s text encoding to be ENCODING-NAME. The
-default, if this package is not loaded, is UTF-8. Technically,
-specifying the encoding name is optional, but in practice it is not
-useful to omit it.
-
- In a computer file, the characters are stored according to a scheme
-called the “encoding”. There are many different encodings. The
-simplest is ASCII, which supports 95 printable characters, not enough
-for most of the world’s languages. For instance, to typeset the
-a-umlaut character ‘ä’ in an ASCII-encoded LaTeX source file, the
-sequence ‘\"a’ is used. This would make source files for anything but
-English hard to read; even for English, often a more extensive encoding
-is more convenient.
-
- The modern encoding standard, in some ways a union of the others, is
-UTF-8, one of the representations of Unicode. This is the default for
-LaTeX since 2018.
-
- The ‘inputenc’ package is how LaTeX knows what encoding is used. For
+ Declare the input file's text encoding to be ENCODING-NAME. (For
+basic background, *note Input encodings::). The default, if this
+package is not loaded, is UTF-8. Technically, specifying the encoding
+name is optional, but in practice it is not useful to omit it.
+
+ The ‘inputenc’ package tells LaTeX what encoding is used. For
instance, the following command explicitly says that the input file is
UTF-8 (note the lack of a dash).
\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
+ The most common values for ENCODING-NAME are: ‘ascii’, ‘latin1’,
+‘latin2’, ‘latin3’, ‘latin4’, ‘latin5’, ‘latin9’, ‘latin10’, ‘utf8’.
+
Caution: use ‘inputenc’ only with the pdfTeX engine (*note TeX
-engines::). (The XeTeX and LuaTeX engines assume that the input file is
-UTF-8 encoded.) If you invoke LaTeX with either the ‘xelatex’ command
-or the ‘lualatex’ command, and try to declare a non-UTF-8 encoding with
-‘inputenc’, such as ‘latin1’, then you will get the error ‘inputenc is
-not designed for xetex or luatex’.
+engines::); with ‘xelatex’ or ‘lualatex’, declaring a non-UTF-8 encoding
+with ‘inputenc’, such as ‘latin1’, will get the error ‘inputenc is not
+designed for xetex or luatex’.
An ‘inputenc’ package error such as ‘Invalid UTF-8 byte "96’ means
that some of the material in the input file does not follow the encoding
scheme. Often these errors come from copying material from a document
-that uses a different encoding than the input file; this one is a left
-single quote from a web page using ‘latin1’ inside a LaTeX input file
-that uses UTF-8. The simplest solution is to replace the non-UTF-8
-character with its UTF-8 equivalent, or use a LaTeX equivalent command
-or character.
+that uses a different encoding than the input file. The simplest
+solution is often to replace the non-UTF-8 character with a UTF-8 or
+LaTeX equivalent.
- In some documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a
+ If you need to process a non-UTF-8 document with LuaTeX, you can use
+the ‘luainputenc’ package (<https://ctan.org/pkg/luainputenc>). With
+XeTeX, the ‘\XeTeXinputencoding’ and ‘\XeTeXdefaultencoding’ primitives
+can be used (for an explanation and examples, see
+<https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/324948>).
+
+ It's also possible to re-encode a document from an 8-bit encoding to
+UTF-8 outside of TeX, using system utilities. For example, ‘recode
+latin1..utf8’ or ‘iconv -f latin1 -t utf8’.
+
+ In a few documents, such as a collection of journal articles from a
variety of authors, changing the encoding in mid-document may be
-necessary. Use the command ‘\inputencoding{ENCODING-NAME}’. The most
-common values for ENCODING-NAME are: ‘ascii’, ‘latin1’, ‘latin2’,
-‘latin3’, ‘latin4’, ‘latin5’, ‘latin9’, ‘latin10’, and ‘utf8’.
+necessary. You can use the command ‘\inputencoding{ENCODING-NAME}’ for
+this.
23.8 ‘\rule’
============
@@ -14173,7 +14605,7 @@ Synopsis, one of:
Produce a “rule”, a filled-in rectangle.
This example produces a rectangular blob, sometimes called a Halmos
-symbol, or just “qed”, often used to mark the end of a proof:
+symbol, or just "qed", often used to mark the end of a proof:
\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\rule{0.4em}{2ex}}
@@ -14204,7 +14636,7 @@ Synopsis:
\today
- Produce today’s date in the format ‘MONTH DD, YYYY’. An example of a
+ Produce today's date in the format ‘MONTH DD, YYYY’. An example of a
date in that format is ‘July 4, 1976’.
Multilingual packages such as ‘babel’ or ‘polyglossia’, or classes
@@ -14282,7 +14714,7 @@ Synopsis:
after ‘\endinput’ will not be included. This command is optional; if
‘filename.tex’ has no ‘\endinput’ then LaTeX will read all of the file.
- For example, suppose that a document’s root file has ‘\input{chap1}’
+ For example, suppose that a document's root file has ‘\input{chap1}’
and this is ‘chap1.tex’.
\chapter{One}
@@ -14327,7 +14759,7 @@ from ‘FILENAME.tex’ into the document, and then it does another
The ‘\includeonly’ command controls which files will be read by LaTeX
under subsequent ‘\include’ commands. Its list of filenames is
comma-separated. It must appear in the preamble or even earlier, e.g.,
-the command line; it can’t appear in the document body.
+the command line; it can't appear in the document body.
This example root document, ‘constitution.tex’, brings in three
files, ‘preamble.tex’, ‘articles.tex’, and ‘amendments.tex’.
@@ -14356,7 +14788,7 @@ Running LaTeX on ‘constitution.tex’ makes the material from the three
files appear in the document but also generates the auxiliary files
‘preamble.aux’, ‘articles.aux’, and ‘amendments.aux’. These contain
information such as page numbers and cross-references (*note Cross
-references::). If you now comment out ‘\includeonly’’s lines with
+references::). If you now comment out ‘\includeonly’'s lines with
‘preamble’ and ‘amendments’ and run LaTeX again then the resulting
document shows only the material from ‘articles.tex’, not the material
from ‘preamble.tex’ or ‘amendments.tex’. Nonetheless, all of the
@@ -14476,7 +14908,7 @@ contents entries are automatically generated from the sectioning
commands ‘\chapter’, etc.
This example illustrates the first command, ‘\tableofcontents’.
-LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book’s first page.
+LaTeX will produce a table of contents on the book's first page.
\documentclass{book}
% \setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
@@ -14533,7 +14965,7 @@ commands such as ‘\l@section{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}’ and
‘\l@subsection{TEXT}{PAGENUMBER}’. These commands often use the
‘\@dottedtocline’ command (*note \@dottedtocline::).
- A consequence of LaTeX’s strategy of using auxiliary files is that to
+ A consequence of LaTeX's strategy of using auxiliary files is that to
get the correct information in the document you must run LaTeX twice,
once to store the information and the second time to retrieve it. In
the ordinary course of writing a document authors run LaTeX a number of
@@ -14694,7 +15126,7 @@ here
\addcontentsline{toc}{setcion}{\protect\textbf{Appendices}}
-then you don’t get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
+then you don't get an error but the formatting in the table of contents
will not make sense.
25.1.3 ‘\addtocontents’
@@ -14945,7 +15377,7 @@ Synopsis:
\protect::).
For example, as described in *note Indexes::, one way to get an index
-from what’s below is to compile the document with ‘pdflatex test’, then
+from what's below is to compile the document with ‘pdflatex test’, then
process the index entries with ‘makeindex test’, and then compile again
with ‘pdflatex test’.
@@ -15145,7 +15577,7 @@ then it is a comment.
‘item_x1’
What is put between a level 0 item and a level 1 item in the case
- that the level 0 item doesn’t have any page numbers (as in
+ that the level 0 item doesn't have any page numbers (as in
‘\index{aaa|see{bbb}}’). Default: ‘"\n \\subitem "’.
‘item_12’
@@ -15154,7 +15586,7 @@ then it is a comment.
‘item_x2’
What is put between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, if the
- level 1 item doesn’t have page numbers. Default: ‘"\n \\subsubitem
+ level 1 item doesn't have page numbers. Default: ‘"\n \\subsubitem
"’.
‘delim_0’
@@ -15178,7 +15610,7 @@ then it is a comment.
range. Default: ‘"--"’.
‘line_max’
- An integer. Maximum length of an index entry’s line in the output,
+ An integer. Maximum length of an index entry's line in the output,
beyond which the line wraps. Default: ‘72’.
‘indent_space’
@@ -15409,10 +15841,10 @@ typically ends with a ‘\closing’ command such as ‘\closing{Yours,}’.
Additional material may come after the ‘\closing’. You can say who
is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like ‘\cc{the Boss \\
-the Boss's Boss}’. There’s a similar ‘\encl’ command for a list of
+the Boss's Boss}’. There's a similar ‘\encl’ command for a list of
enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with ‘\ps’.
- LaTeX’s default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
+ LaTeX's default is to indent the sender name and the closing above it
by a length of ‘\longindentation’. By default this is ‘0.5\textwidth’.
To make them flush left, put ‘\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}’ in your
preamble.
@@ -15488,7 +15920,7 @@ Synopsis:
\closing{TEXT}
- Produce the letter’s closing. This is optional, but usual. It
+ Produce the letter's closing. This is optional, but usual. It
appears at the end of a letter, above a handwritten signature. For
example:
@@ -15583,7 +16015,7 @@ Synopsis:
\name{NAME}
- Optional. Sender’s name, used for printing on the envelope together
+ Optional. Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together
with the return address.
26.8 ‘\opening’
@@ -15618,7 +16050,7 @@ Synopsis:
\signature{FIRST LINE \\
... }
- The sender’s name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
+ The sender's name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
is usual.
The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the
@@ -15628,7 +16060,7 @@ Separate multiple lines with a double backslash, ‘\\’. For example:
\signature{J Fred Muggs \\
White House}
- LaTeX’s default for the vertical space from the ‘\closing’ text down
+ LaTeX's default for the vertical space from the ‘\closing’ text down
to the ‘\signature’ text is ‘6\medskipamount’, which is six times
‘\medskipamount’ (where ‘\medskipamount’ is equal to a ‘\parskip’, which
in turn is defined by default here to 0.7em).
@@ -15652,7 +16084,7 @@ Synopsis:
\telephone{NUMBER}
- The sender’s telephone number. This is typically in the preamble,
+ The sender's telephone number. This is typically in the preamble,
where it applies to all letters. This only appears if the ‘firstpage’
pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
page.
@@ -15716,7 +16148,7 @@ writes one line to it, and closes it.
But filenames with a period can cause trouble: if TeX finds a FILENAME
of ‘presidents.dat’ it could look first for ‘presidents.dat.tex’ and
later for ‘presidents.dat’, or it could do the opposite. Your
-distribution’s documentation should say more, and if you find something
+distribution's documentation should say more, and if you find something
that works for you then you are good, but to ensure complete portability
the best thing is to use file names containing only the twenty six ASCII
letters (not case-sensitive) and the ten digits, along with underscore
@@ -15726,7 +16158,7 @@ and dash, and in particular with no dot or space.
error. It just considers that the stream is not open (test for this
with ‘\ifeof’; one recourse is the command ‘\InputIfFileExists’, *note
Class and package commands::). If you try to use the same number twice,
-LaTeX won’t give you an error. If you try to use a bad number then you
+LaTeX won't give you an error. If you try to use a bad number then you
get an error message like ‘! Bad number (16). <to be read again> = l.30
\openin16=test.jh’.
@@ -15825,7 +16257,7 @@ outputs ‘Recommendation for John Dee’. Like what happens here with
‘\renewcommand’ (among others) are replaced by their definitions before
being printed.
- LaTeX’s usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
+ LaTeX's usual rules for treating multiple spaces as a single space
and ignoring spaces after a command name apply to ‘msg’. Use the
command ‘\space’ to get a single space, independent of surrounding
spaces. Use ‘^^J’ to get a newline. Get a percent character with
@@ -15902,7 +16334,7 @@ So, you use ‘\write’ in one of three contexts:
that you should use ‘#’ instead of ‘##’).
2. With the second, STRING is stored on the current list of things (as
- a TeX “whatsit” item) and kept until the page is shipped out and
+ a TeX "whatsit" item) and kept until the page is shipped out and
likewise the macros are unexpanded until ‘\shipout’. At
‘\shipout’, STRING is fully expanded.
@@ -15912,7 +16344,7 @@ So, you use ‘\write’ in one of three contexts:
protected or to have some other special definition for the write.
As a simple example of expansion with ‘\write’, STRING here contains
-a control sequence ‘\triplex’ which we’ve defined to be the text ‘XYZ’:
+a control sequence ‘\triplex’ which we've defined to be the text ‘XYZ’:
\newwrite\jhfile
\openout\jhfile=test.jh
@@ -15923,7 +16355,7 @@ This results in the file ‘test.jh’ containing the text ‘test XYZtest’
followed by a newline.
The cases where NUMBER is 16, 17, or 18 are special. Because of
-‘\write’’s behavior when NUMBER is outside the range from 0 to 15
+‘\write’'s behavior when NUMBER is outside the range from 0 to 15
described above, in Plain TeX ‘\write16’ and ‘\write17’ were sometimes
used to write to the log file and the terminal; however, in LaTeX, the
natural way to do that is with ‘\typeout’ (*note \typeout::). The
@@ -16036,7 +16468,7 @@ Synopsis:
\write18{SHELL_COMMAND}
Issue a command to the operating system shell. The operating system
-runs the command and LaTeX’s execution is blocked until that finishes.
+runs the command and LaTeX's execution is blocked until that finishes.
This sequence (on Unix)
@@ -16189,7 +16621,7 @@ generally use the ‘=’ syntax.
eliminates most terminal output.
‘-jobname=STRING’
- Set the value of TeX’s “jobname” to the string. The log file and
+ Set the value of TeX's “jobname” to the string. The log file and
output file will then be named ‘STRING.log’ and ‘STRING.pdf’.
*note Jobname::.
@@ -16274,8 +16706,8 @@ different versions.
pdflatex -jobname=teachers "\def\teachers{}\input{main}"
The ‘jobname’ option is there because otherwise both files would be
-called ‘main.pdf’ and the second would overwrite the first. (*note
-Jobname::.)
+called ‘main.pdf’ and the second would overwrite the first (*note
+Jobname::).
In this example we use the command line to select which parts of a
document to include. For a book named ‘mybook.tex’ and structured like
@@ -16318,7 +16750,7 @@ argument to ‘\input’.
There are two more possibilities for the jobname. It can be directly
specified with the ‘-jobname’ option, as in ‘pdflatex -jobname=myname’
-(*note Command line input:: for a real example).
+(*note Command line input:: for a practical example).
The final possibility is ‘texput’, which is the final fallback
default if no other name is available to TeX. That is, if no ‘-jobname’
@@ -16349,8 +16781,8 @@ catcode 11.
Because of this catcode situation, using the jobname in a conditional
can become complicated. One solution is to use the macro ‘\IfBeginWith’
from the ‘xstring’ package in its star variant, which is insensitive to
-catcode. For example, in the following text the footnote “Including
-Respublica Bananensis Francorum.” is only present if the task name
+catcode. For example, in the following text the footnote "Including
+Respublica Bananensis Francorum." is only present if the task name
starts with ‘my-doc’.
If a democracy is just a regime where citizens vote then
@@ -16500,7 +16932,7 @@ comment out all the other chapter entries from the argument to
‘\includeonly’. That will speed up compilation without losing any
information such as cross-references. (Material that does not need to
come on a new page is brought in with ‘\input’ instead of ‘\include’.
-You don’t get the cross-reference benefit with ‘\input’.)
+You don't get the cross-reference benefit with ‘\input’.)
\documentclass[titlepage]{book}
\usepackage{makeidx}\makeindex
@@ -16545,3102 +16977,3235 @@ Index
* Menu:
-* $ inline math: math. (line 4760)
-* $$...$$ plain TeX display math: displaymath. (line 3866)
-* & (for table cells): tabular. (line 5732)
-* * prompt: Recovering from errors.
- (line 16383)
-* *, to \nocite all keys: Using BibTeX. (line 6263)
-* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 7672)
-* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 2661)
-* *-form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7256)
+* _ character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 755)
+* _ subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
+ (line 9463)
* --disable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16208)
+ (line 16640)
* --enable-write18 command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16208)
+ (line 16640)
* --file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16229)
+ (line 16661)
* --halt-on-error command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16226)
+ (line 16658)
* --help command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16170)
+ (line 16602)
* --interaction command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16173)
+ (line 16605)
* --jobname command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16190)
+ (line 16622)
* --no-file-line-error command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16229)
+ (line 16661)
* --no-shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16208)
+ (line 16640)
* --output-directory command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16195)
+ (line 16627)
* --shell-escape command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16208)
+ (line 16640)
* --version command-line option: Command line options.
- (line 16165)
-* -1, write stream number: \write. (line 15868)
-* .aux file: Output files. (line 492)
+ (line 16597)
+* -1, write stream number: \write. (line 16300)
+* : (for math): Colon character & \colon.
+ (line 11396)
+* .aux file: Output files. (line 516)
* .aux file and BibTeX commands: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6270)
-* .dvi file: Output files. (line 469)
-* .fmt file: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 15267)
-* .idx file: Indexes. (line 14857)
-* .idx file <1>: makeindex. (line 15056)
-* .ind file: makeindex. (line 15056)
-* .isty file: makeindex. (line 15068)
-* .lof file: Output files. (line 502)
+ (line 6148)
+* .dvi file: Output files. (line 493)
+* .fmt file: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* .glo file: Glossaries. (line 15699)
+* .idx file: Indexes. (line 15289)
+* .idx file <1>: makeindex. (line 15488)
+* .ind file: makeindex. (line 15488)
+* .isty file: makeindex. (line 15500)
+* .lof file: Output files. (line 526)
* .lof file <1>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14465)
-* .lof file <2>: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* .log file: Output files. (line 487)
-* .lot file: Output files. (line 502)
+ (line 14897)
+* .lof file <2>: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* .log file: Output files. (line 511)
+* .lot file: Output files. (line 526)
* .lot file <1>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14465)
-* .lot file <2>: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* .pdf file: Output files. (line 479)
+ (line 14897)
+* .lot file <2>: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* .pdf file: Output files. (line 503)
* .tex, default extension: Command line interface.
- (line 16122)
-* .toc file: Output files. (line 502)
+ (line 16554)
+* .toc file: Output files. (line 526)
* .toc file <1>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14465)
-* .toc file <2>: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* .xdv file: TeX engines. (line 547)
-* /bin/sh, used by \write18: \write18. (line 16087)
-* 10pt option: Document class options.
- (line 741)
-* 11pt option: Document class options.
- (line 741)
-* 12pt option: Document class options.
- (line 741)
-* : (for math): Colon character & \colon.
- (line 11004)
+ (line 14897)
+* .toc file <2>: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* .xdv file: TeX engines. (line 572)
* [...] (for optional arguments): LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 597)
-* \ (backslash-space): \(SPACE). (line 11687)
+ (line 773)
+* { character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 740)
+* {...} (for required arguments): LaTeX command syntax.
+ (line 773)
+* } character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 740)
+* * prompt: Recovering from errors.
+ (line 16815)
+* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
+ (line 7566)
+* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 2539)
+* *-form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 7149)
+* *, to \nocite all keys: Using BibTeX. (line 6141)
+* /bin/sh, used by \write18: \write18. (line 16519)
+* \ (backslash-space): \(SPACE). (line 12118)
* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 597)
-* \!: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10765)
-* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 13939)
-* \#: Reserved characters.
- (line 13612)
-* \$: Reserved characters.
- (line 13612)
-* \%: Reserved characters.
- (line 13612)
-* \&: Reserved characters.
- (line 13612)
-* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 13943)
-* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5580)
-* \(...\) inline math: math. (line 4760)
-* \*: \*. (line 11024)
-* \+: tabbing. (line 5572)
+ (line 773)
+* \ character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 736)
+* \_: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14045)
+* \-: tabbing. (line 5454)
+* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6516)
* \,: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10751)
-* \-: tabbing. (line 5576)
-* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6639)
-* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 13946)
-* \/: \/. (line 11835)
-* \:: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10740)
+ (line 11143)
* \;: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10727)
-* \<: tabbing. (line 5568)
-* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 13950)
-* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5562)
-* \>: tabbing. (line 5566)
+ (line 11119)
+* \:: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 11132)
+* \!: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 11157)
+* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 14383)
+* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 14380)
+* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5458)
+* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 14376)
+* \(...\) inline math: math. (line 4638)
+* \[...\] display math: displaymath. (line 3738)
+* \{: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14045)
+* \}: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14045)
+* \@: \@. (line 12035)
+* \@auxout: \write. (line 16315)
+* \@beginparpenalty: list. (line 4520)
+* \@dottedtocline: \@dottedtocline. (line 15020)
+* \@endparpenalty: list. (line 4528)
+* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 6892)
+* \@ifstar: \@ifstar. (line 7380)
+* \@itempenalty: list. (line 4524)
+* \@mainaux: \write. (line 16315)
+* \@startsection: \@startsection. (line 3025)
+* \*: \*. (line 11416)
+* \/: \/. (line 12267)
+* \\ (for \author): \maketitle. (line 11598)
+* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 5192)
+* \\ (for \title): \maketitle. (line 11619)
+* \\ (for center): center. (line 3582)
+* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 3890)
+* \\ (for flushleft): flushleft. (line 4072)
+* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 4132)
+* \\ (for letters): Letters. (line 15841)
+* \\ (for tabular): tabular. (line 5614)
+* \\ (for verse): verse. (line 6352)
+* \\ (force line break): \\. (line 6390)
+* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5437)
+* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 3896)
+* \&: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14045)
+* \#: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14045)
+* \%: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14045)
+* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 14395)
+* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5464)
+* \^: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14050)
+* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 14391)
+* \+: tabbing. (line 5450)
+* \<: tabbing. (line 5446)
+* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 14387)
+* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5440)
+* \>: tabbing. (line 5444)
* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10740)
-* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5565)
-* \@: \@. (line 11610)
-* \@auxout: \write. (line 15883)
-* \@beginparpenalty: list. (line 4642)
-* \@dottedtocline: \@dottedtocline. (line 14588)
-* \@endparpenalty: list. (line 4650)
-* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 7004)
-* \@ifstar: \@ifstar. (line 7486)
-* \@itempenalty: list. (line 4646)
-* \@mainaux: \write. (line 15883)
-* \@startsection: \@startsection. (line 3147)
-* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5595)
-* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5596)
-* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5596)
+ (line 11132)
+* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5443)
+* \|: Math symbols. (line 9538)
+* \~: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14050)
+* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 14399)
+* \$: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14045)
+* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5473)
+* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5474)
+* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5474)
+* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5474)
* \aa (å): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14063)
+ (line 14500)
* \AA (Å): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14063)
-* \accent: \accent. (line 14012)
-* \acute: Math accents. (line 10621)
-* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 14623)
-* \address: \address. (line 15445)
-* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 14702)
-* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 8268)
-* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 8526)
-* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 12170)
+ (line 14500)
+* \accent: \accent. (line 14449)
+* \acute: Math accents. (line 11006)
+* \addcontentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 15055)
+* \address: \address. (line 15877)
+* \addtocontents{EXT}{TEXT}: \addtocontents. (line 15134)
+* \addtocounter: \addtocounter. (line 8653)
+* \addtolength: \addtolength. (line 8911)
+* \addvspace: \addvspace. (line 12602)
* \ae (æ): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14067)
+ (line 14504)
* \AE (Æ): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14067)
-* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 9156)
-* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 3977)
-* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 9159)
+ (line 14504)
+* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 9541)
+* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 3855)
* \alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 8143)
+ (line 8528)
* \Alph{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 8148)
-* \alsoname: \index. (line 14991)
-* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 9162)
-* \and (for \author): \maketitle. (line 11206)
-* \angle: Math symbols. (line 9165)
-* \appendix: \appendix. (line 3077)
-* \approx: Math symbols. (line 9169)
+ (line 8533)
+* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 9544)
+* \alsoname: \index. (line 15423)
+* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 9547)
+* \and (for \author): \maketitle. (line 11598)
+* \angle: Math symbols. (line 9550)
+* \appendix: \appendix. (line 2955)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 9554)
* \arabic{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 8153)
-* \arccos: Math functions. (line 10504)
-* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 10507)
-* \arctan: Math functions. (line 10510)
-* \arg: Math functions. (line 10513)
-* \arraycolsep: array. (line 3663)
-* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 5857)
-* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 5863)
-* \ast: Math symbols. (line 9172)
-* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 9179)
-* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3890)
-* \AtBeginDvi: Class and package commands.
- (line 921)
-* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 3906)
-* \AtEndOfClass: Class and package commands.
- (line 926)
-* \AtEndOfPackage: Class and package commands.
- (line 926)
-* \author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}: \maketitle. (line 11205)
-* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 5596)
-* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 13965)
+ (line 8538)
+* \arccos: Math functions. (line 10889)
+* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 10892)
+* \arctan: Math functions. (line 10895)
+* \arg: Math functions. (line 10898)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 3541)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 5735)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 5741)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 9557)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 9564)
+* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3768)
+* \AtBeginDvi: \AtBeginDvi & \AtEndDvi.
+ (line 8013)
+* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 3784)
+* \AtEndDvi: \AtBeginDvi & \AtEndDvi.
+ (line 8013)
+* \AtEndOfClass: \AtEndOfClass & \AtEndOfPackage.
+ (line 8029)
+* \AtEndOfPackage: \AtEndOfClass & \AtEndOfPackage.
+ (line 8029)
+* \author{NAME1 \and NAME2 \and ...}: \maketitle. (line 11597)
+* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 14402)
* \backmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
-* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 9182)
-* \bar: Math accents. (line 10624)
+ (line 2989)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 9567)
+* \bar: Math accents. (line 11009)
* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1994)
+ (line 1872)
* \baselineskip <1>: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2318)
+ (line 2196)
* \baselinestretch: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2318)
-* \begin: Environments. (line 3555)
-* \beta: Math symbols. (line 9186)
-* \bf: Font styles. (line 1772)
-* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 1737)
+ (line 2196)
+* \begin: Environments. (line 3433)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 9571)
+* \bf: Font styles. (line 1650)
+* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 1615)
* \bibdata: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6280)
-* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6085)
-* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6208)
+ (line 6158)
+* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 5963)
+* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6086)
* \bibliography and internal \bibdata: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6281)
-* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6208)
+ (line 6159)
+* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6086)
* \bibliographystyle and internal \bibstyle: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6284)
-* \bibname: thebibliography. (line 6068)
+ (line 6162)
+* \bibname: thebibliography. (line 5946)
* \bibstyle: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6283)
+ (line 6161)
* \bigbreak: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak.
- (line 11978)
-* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 9189)
-* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 9193)
-* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 9196)
+ (line 12410)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 9574)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 9578)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 9581)
* \bigl: \bigl & \bigr etc..
- (line 10301)
-* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 9200)
-* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 9203)
-* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 9206)
+ (line 10686)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 9585)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 9588)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 9591)
* \bigr: \bigl & \bigr etc..
- (line 10301)
+ (line 10686)
* \bigskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11929)
+ (line 12361)
* \bigskip <1>: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11951)
+ (line 12383)
* \bigskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11952)
-* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 9217)
-* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 9209)
-* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 9213)
-* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 9220)
-* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 9224)
-* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 9227)
-* \bmod: Math functions. (line 10516)
+ (line 12384)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 9602)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 9594)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 9598)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 9605)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 9609)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 9612)
+* \bmod: Math functions. (line 10901)
* \boldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 10028)
+ (line 10413)
* \boldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 10036)
-* \bot: Math symbols. (line 9230)
-* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 2500)
-* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2501)
-* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 9234)
-* \Box: Math symbols. (line 9237)
-* \breve: Math accents. (line 10627)
-* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 9242)
-* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 13975)
-* \cal: Font styles. (line 1775)
-* \cap: Math symbols. (line 9245)
-* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 13943)
-* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 14003)
-* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 14007)
-* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 13975)
-* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 13954)
-* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 13939)
-* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 13979)
-* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 13958)
-* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 13983)
-* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 13950)
-* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 13997)
-* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 13987)
-* \capitalring: Accents. (line 13991)
-* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 13997)
-* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 13962)
-* \caption: \caption. (line 2562)
-* \caption <1>: figure. (line 4100)
-* \caption <2>: table. (line 5684)
-* \cc: \cc. (line 15470)
-* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 9249)
-* \cdots: Dots. (line 10398)
-* \centering: \centering. (line 3742)
-* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* \chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2777)
-* \check: Math accents. (line 10630)
-* \CheckCommand: Class and package commands.
- (line 933)
-* \CheckCommand*: Class and package commands.
- (line 933)
-* \chi: Math symbols. (line 9252)
-* \circ: Math symbols. (line 9255)
-* \circle: \circle. (line 5229)
+ (line 10421)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 9615)
+* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 2378)
+* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2379)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 9619)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 9622)
+* \breve: Math accents. (line 11012)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 9627)
+* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 14412)
+* \cal: Font styles. (line 1653)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 9630)
+* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 14380)
+* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 14440)
+* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 14444)
+* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 14412)
+* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 14391)
+* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 14376)
+* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 14416)
+* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 14395)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 14420)
+* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 14387)
+* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 14434)
+* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 14424)
+* \capitalring: Accents. (line 14428)
+* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 14434)
+* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 14399)
+* \caption: \caption. (line 2440)
+* \caption <1>: figure. (line 3978)
+* \caption <2>: table. (line 5562)
+* \cc: \cc. (line 15902)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 9634)
+* \cdots: Dots. (line 10783)
+* \centering: \centering. (line 3620)
+* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* \chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2655)
+* \check: Math accents. (line 11015)
+* \CheckCommand: \CheckCommand. (line 8046)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 9637)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 9640)
+* \circle: \circle. (line 5107)
* \citation: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6286)
-* \cite: \cite. (line 6143)
+ (line 6164)
+* \cite: \cite. (line 6021)
* \cite and internal \citation: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6287)
-* \ClassError: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* \ClassInfo: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* \ClassInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* \ClassWarning: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* \ClassWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
+ (line 6165)
+* \ClassError: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8073)
+* \ClassInfo: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8073)
+* \ClassInfoNoLine: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8073)
+* \ClassWarning: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8073)
+* \ClassWarningNoLine: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8073)
* \cleardoublepage: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 6820)
+ (line 6708)
* \clearpage: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 6820)
-* \cline: \cline. (line 5991)
+ (line 6708)
+* \cline: \cline. (line 5869)
* \closein: \openin & \openout.
- (line 15671)
+ (line 16103)
* \closeout: \openin & \openout.
- (line 15671)
-* \closing: \closing. (line 15486)
-* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 9259)
+ (line 16103)
+* \closing: \closing. (line 15918)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 9644)
* \colon: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 11004)
-* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 2059)
+ (line 11396)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 1937)
* \columnsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2185)
+ (line 2063)
* \columnsep <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2188)
-* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 2065)
+ (line 2066)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 1943)
* \columnseprule <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2186)
+ (line 2064)
* \columnseprule <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2188)
-* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 2072)
+ (line 2066)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 1950)
* \columnwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2187)
+ (line 2065)
* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2188)
-* \complement: Math symbols. (line 9262)
-* \cong: Math symbols. (line 9268)
+ (line 2066)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 9647)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 9653)
* \contentsline: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14521)
-* \contentsline <1>: \addcontentsline. (line 14627)
-* \contentsline <2>: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 9271)
-* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 13707)
-* \cos: Math functions. (line 10519)
-* \cosh: Math functions. (line 10522)
-* \cot: Math functions. (line 10525)
-* \coth: Math functions. (line 10528)
-* \csc: Math functions. (line 10531)
-* \cup: Math symbols. (line 9274)
-* \CurrentOption: Class and package commands.
- (line 972)
-* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 13979)
-* \dag: Text symbols. (line 13711)
-* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 9278)
-* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 5439)
-* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 9281)
-* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 11213)
+ (line 14953)
+* \contentsline <1>: \addcontentsline. (line 15059)
+* \contentsline <2>: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 9656)
+* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 14140)
+* \cos: Math functions. (line 10904)
+* \cosh: Math functions. (line 10907)
+* \cot: Math functions. (line 10910)
+* \coth: Math functions. (line 10913)
+* \cprotect: \protect. (line 7868)
+* \cprotEnv: \protect. (line 7874)
+* \csc: Math functions. (line 10916)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 9659)
+* \CurrentOption: \CurrentOption. (line 8101)
+* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 14416)
+* \dag: Text symbols. (line 14144)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 9663)
+* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 5317)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 9666)
+* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 11605)
* \day: \day & \month & \year.
- (line 8317)
-* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 2105)
-* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 2111)
-* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 2118)
-* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 2084)
-* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 2123)
-* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 13714)
-* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 9285)
-* \ddot: Math accents. (line 10633)
-* \ddots: Dots. (line 10402)
+ (line 8702)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 1983)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 1989)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 1996)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 1962)
+* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 2001)
+* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 14147)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 9670)
+* \ddot: Math accents. (line 11018)
+* \ddots: Dots. (line 10787)
* \DeclareFontEncoding: \DeclareFontEncoding.
- (line 1386)
+ (line 1264)
* \DeclareGraphicsExtensions: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
- (line 13034)
+ (line 13210)
* \DeclareGraphicsRule: \DeclareGraphicsRule.
- (line 13076)
-* \DeclareOption: Class and package commands.
- (line 978)
-* \DeclareOption*: Class and package commands.
- (line 978)
-* \DeclareRobustCommand: Class and package commands.
- (line 1008)
-* \DeclareRobustCommand*: Class and package commands.
- (line 1008)
+ (line 13252)
+* \DeclareOption: \DeclareOption. (line 8108)
+* \DeclareRobustCommand: \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8147)
* \DeclareTextAccent: \DeclareTextAccent.
- (line 1420)
+ (line 1298)
* \DeclareTextAccent <1>: \DeclareTextAccentDefault.
- (line 1444)
+ (line 1322)
* \DeclareTextAccentDefault: \DeclareTextAccentDefault.
- (line 1444)
+ (line 1322)
* \DeclareTextCommand: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
- (line 1472)
+ (line 1350)
* \DeclareTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
- (line 1521)
+ (line 1399)
* \DeclareTextComposite: \DeclareTextComposite.
- (line 1553)
+ (line 1431)
* \DeclareTextCompositeCommand: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand.
- (line 1577)
+ (line 1455)
* \DeclareTextSymbol: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
- (line 1503)
+ (line 1381)
* \DeclareTextSymbol <1>: \DeclareTextSymbol.
- (line 1595)
+ (line 1473)
* \DeclareTextSymbol <2>: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
- (line 1622)
+ (line 1500)
* \DeclareTextSymbolDefault: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
- (line 1622)
-* \deg: Math functions. (line 10534)
-* \DelayedShellEscape: \write18. (line 16098)
-* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 9288)
-* \delta: Math symbols. (line 9291)
-* \det: Math functions. (line 10537)
+ (line 1500)
+* \deg: Math functions. (line 10919)
+* \DelayedShellEscape: \write18. (line 16530)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 9673)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 9676)
+* \det: Math functions. (line 10922)
* \dh (ð): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14071)
+ (line 14508)
* \DH (Ð): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14071)
-* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 9294)
-* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 9298)
-* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 9302)
-* \dim: Math functions. (line 10540)
-* \displaystyle: Math styles. (line 10953)
-* \div: Math symbols. (line 9305)
+ (line 14508)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 9679)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 9683)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 9687)
+* \dim: Math functions. (line 10925)
+* \displaystyle: Math styles. (line 11345)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 9690)
* \dj: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14077)
+ (line 14514)
* \DJ: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14077)
-* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 698)
-* \documentclass, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 16327)
-* \dot: Math accents. (line 10636)
-* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 9308)
+ (line 14514)
+* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 902)
+* \documentclass, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 16759)
+* \DocumentMetadata: \DocumentMetadata. (line 847)
+* \dot: Math accents. (line 11021)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 9693)
* \dotfill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
- (line 11880)
-* \dots: Dots. (line 10407)
-* \dots <1>: Dots. (line 10430)
-* \dots <2>: Text symbols. (line 13732)
-* \dotsb: Dots. (line 10430)
-* \dotsc: Dots. (line 10430)
-* \dotsi: Dots. (line 10430)
-* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 5868)
-* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 9312)
-* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 9316)
-* \ell: Math symbols. (line 9320)
-* \emph: Font styles. (line 1757)
-* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 9323)
-* \encl: \encl. (line 15499)
-* \end: Environments. (line 3555)
-* \endinput: \endinput. (line 14276)
-* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6895)
+ (line 12312)
+* \dots: Dots. (line 10792)
+* \dots <1>: Dots. (line 10815)
+* \dots <2>: Text symbols. (line 14169)
+* \dotsb: Dots. (line 10815)
+* \dotsc: Dots. (line 10815)
+* \dotsi: Dots. (line 10815)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 5746)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 9697)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 9701)
+* \ds@OPTION: \ExecuteOptions. (line 8197)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 9705)
+* \emph: Font styles. (line 1635)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 9708)
+* \encl: \encl. (line 15931)
+* \end: Environments. (line 3433)
+* \endinput: \endinput. (line 14708)
+* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6783)
* \enspace: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
- (line 11419)
-* \enumi: enumerate. (line 3963)
-* \enumii: enumerate. (line 3963)
-* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 3963)
-* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 3963)
-* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 9326)
-* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 9332)
-* \eta: Math symbols. (line 9335)
+ (line 11843)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 3841)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 3841)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 3841)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 3841)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 9711)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 9717)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 9720)
* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 811)
+ (line 1018)
* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2246)
+ (line 2124)
* \evensidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2247)
-* \ExecuteOptions: Class and package commands.
- (line 1084)
-* \exists: Math symbols. (line 9338)
-* \exp: Math functions. (line 10543)
-* \externaldocument: xr package. (line 3501)
-* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 5808)
-* \fbox: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12316)
+ (line 2125)
+* \ExecuteOptions: \ExecuteOptions. (line 8193)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 9723)
+* \exp: Math functions. (line 10928)
+* \externaldocument: xr package. (line 3379)
+* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 5686)
+* \fbox: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12748)
* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture).
- (line 5416)
-* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12348)
-* \fboxrule <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12347)
+ (line 5294)
+* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12780)
+* \fboxrule <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12779)
* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture).
- (line 5416)
-* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12353)
-* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12352)
-* \fill: \hfill. (line 11505)
-* \flat: Math symbols. (line 9341)
-* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 2504)
-* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 2505)
-* \floatsep: Floats. (line 2520)
-* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 2521)
-* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 2152)
-* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 7004)
+ (line 5294)
+* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12785)
+* \fboxsep <2>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12784)
+* \fill: \hfill. (line 11929)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 9726)
+* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 2382)
+* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 2383)
+* \floatsep: Floats. (line 2398)
+* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 2399)
+* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 2030)
+* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 6892)
* \fnsymbol{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 8166)
-* \fontdimen1: \/. (line 11869)
+ (line 8551)
+* \fontdimen1: \/. (line 12301)
* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1904)
+ (line 1782)
* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1914)
+ (line 1792)
* \fontseries: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1941)
+ (line 1819)
* \fontshape: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1981)
+ (line 1859)
* \fontsize: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1994)
-* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6986)
-* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 7052)
-* \footnoterule: \footnote. (line 7014)
-* \footnotesep: \footnote. (line 7026)
-* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 1847)
-* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 7108)
+ (line 1872)
+* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6873)
+* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6944)
+* \footnoterule: \footnote. (line 6902)
+* \footnotesep: \footnote. (line 6918)
+* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 1725)
+* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 7001)
* \footskip: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2205)
+ (line 2083)
* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2206)
-* \forall: Math symbols. (line 9344)
-* \frac: \frac. (line 11040)
-* \frame: \frame. (line 5427)
+ (line 2084)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 9729)
+* \frac: \frac. (line 11432)
+* \frame: \frame. (line 5305)
* \framebox: \framebox (picture).
- (line 5391)
-* \framebox <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12316)
+ (line 5269)
+* \framebox <1>: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12748)
* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing.
- (line 11656)
+ (line 12084)
* \frontmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
-* \frown: Math symbols. (line 9347)
-* \fussy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6696)
-* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 9350)
-* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 9353)
-* \gcd: Math functions. (line 10546)
-* \ge: Math symbols. (line 9356)
-* \geq: Math symbols. (line 9360)
-* \gets: Math symbols. (line 9364)
-* \gg: Math symbols. (line 9367)
-* \gls: \gls. (line 15337)
-* \graphicspath: \graphicspath. (line 12971)
-* \graphpaper: \graphpaper. (line 5132)
-* \grave: Math accents. (line 10639)
-* \guillemotleft («): Text symbols. (line 13723)
-* \guillemotright (»): Text symbols. (line 13724)
-* \guilsinglleft (‹): Text symbols. (line 13725)
-* \guilsinglright (›): Text symbols. (line 13726)
-* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 13983)
-* \hat: Math accents. (line 10642)
-* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 9370)
+ (line 2989)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 9732)
+* \fussy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6584)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 9735)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 9738)
+* \gcd: Math functions. (line 10931)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 9741)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 9745)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 9749)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 9752)
+* \gls: \gls. (line 15769)
+* \graphicspath: \graphicspath. (line 13147)
+* \graphpaper: \graphpaper. (line 5010)
+* \grave: Math accents. (line 11024)
+* \guillemetleft («): Text symbols. (line 14156)
+* \guillemetright (»): Text symbols. (line 14157)
+* \guillemotleft («): Text symbols. (line 14158)
+* \guillemotright (»): Text symbols. (line 14159)
+* \guilsinglleft (‹): Text symbols. (line 14160)
+* \guilsinglright (›): Text symbols. (line 14161)
+* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 14420)
+* \hat: Math accents. (line 11027)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 9755)
* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2193)
+ (line 2071)
* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2194)
+ (line 2072)
* \headsep: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2198)
+ (line 2076)
* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2199)
-* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 9373)
-* \hfill: \hfill. (line 11493)
-* \hline: \hline. (line 6013)
-* \hom: Math functions. (line 10549)
-* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9376)
-* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9379)
+ (line 2077)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 9758)
+* \hfill: \hfill. (line 11917)
+* \hline: \hline. (line 5891)
+* \hom: Math functions. (line 10934)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9761)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9764)
* \hphantom: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
+ (line 11237)
* \hrulefill: \hrulefill & \dotfill.
- (line 11880)
+ (line 12312)
* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2298)
+ (line 2176)
* \hsize <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2299)
-* \hspace: \hspace. (line 11446)
-* \hss: \hss. (line 11526)
-* \huge: Font sizes. (line 1847)
-* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 1847)
-* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6738)
-* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 13933)
-* \IfBeginWith* macro from xstring: Jobname. (line 16348)
-* \iff: Math symbols. (line 9382)
-* \IfFileExists: Class and package commands.
- (line 1040)
+ (line 2177)
+* \hspace: \hspace. (line 11870)
+* \hss: \hss. (line 11950)
+* \huge: Font sizes. (line 1725)
+* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 1725)
+* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6626)
+* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 14370)
+* \IfBeginWith* macro from xstring: Jobname. (line 16780)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 9767)
+* \IfFileExists: \IfFileExists & \InputIfFileExists.
+ (line 8209)
* \ignorespaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
- (line 7981)
+ (line 7881)
* \ignorespacesafterend: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
- (line 7981)
+ (line 7881)
* \ij (ij): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14083)
+ (line 14520)
* \IJ (IJ): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14083)
-* \Im: Math symbols. (line 9386)
-* \imath: Math symbols. (line 9389)
-* \immediate\write: \write. (line 15898)
-* \in: Math symbols. (line 9393)
+ (line 14520)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 9771)
+* \imath: Math symbols. (line 9774)
+* \immediate\write: \write. (line 16330)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 9778)
* \include: \include & \includeonly.
- (line 14308)
-* \includegraphics: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
+ (line 14740)
+* \includegraphics: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
* \includeonly: \include & \includeonly.
- (line 14308)
+ (line 14740)
* \indent: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 8881)
-* \index: Indexes. (line 14857)
-* \index <1>: \index. (line 14939)
-* \indexentry: \index. (line 15041)
+ (line 9266)
+* \index: Indexes. (line 15289)
+* \index <1>: \index. (line 15371)
+* \indexentry: \index. (line 15473)
* \indexspace: Produce the index manually.
- (line 14928)
-* \indexspace <1>: makeindex. (line 15109)
-* \inf: Math functions. (line 10552)
-* \infty: Math symbols. (line 9397)
-* \input: \input. (line 14427)
-* \inputencoding: inputenc package. (line 14158)
-* \InputIfFileExists: Class and package commands.
- (line 1040)
-* \int: Math symbols. (line 9400)
-* \intextsep: Floats. (line 2524)
-* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 2525)
-* \iota: Math symbols. (line 9403)
-* \it: Font styles. (line 1778)
-* \item: description. (line 3809)
-* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 3945)
-* \item <2>: itemize. (line 4295)
-* \item <3>: itemize. (line 4319)
+ (line 15360)
+* \indexspace <1>: makeindex. (line 15541)
+* \inf: Math functions. (line 10937)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 9782)
+* \input: \input. (line 14859)
+* \inputencoding: inputenc package. (line 14591)
+* \InputIfFileExists: \IfFileExists & \InputIfFileExists.
+ (line 8209)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 9785)
+* \intextsep: Floats. (line 2402)
+* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 2403)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 9788)
+* \it: Font styles. (line 1656)
+* \item: description. (line 3687)
+* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 3823)
+* \item <2>: itemize. (line 4172)
+* \item <3>: itemize. (line 4196)
* \item <4>: Produce the index manually.
- (line 14928)
-* \itemindent: list. (line 4466)
-* \itemsep: list. (line 4470)
-* \itshape: Font styles. (line 1731)
-* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 13933)
-* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 9409)
-* \jobname: Jobname. (line 16301)
-* \jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 16341)
-* \Join: Math symbols. (line 9406)
-* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 13987)
-* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 9413)
-* \ker: Math functions. (line 10555)
-* \kill: tabbing. (line 5600)
+ (line 15360)
+* \itemindent: list. (line 4344)
+* \itemsep: list. (line 4348)
+* \itshape: Font styles. (line 1609)
+* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 14370)
+* \jmath: Math symbols. (line 9794)
+* \jobname: Jobname. (line 16733)
+* \jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 16773)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 9791)
+* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 14424)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 9798)
+* \ker: Math functions. (line 10940)
+* \kill: tabbing. (line 5478)
* \l (ł): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14087)
+ (line 14524)
* \L (Ł): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14087)
-* \l@chapter: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* \l@section: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* \l@subsection: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* \label: \label. (line 3390)
-* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 3972)
-* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 3972)
-* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 3972)
-* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 3972)
-* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 4331)
-* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 4331)
-* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 4331)
-* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 4331)
-* \labelsep: list. (line 4482)
-* \labelwidth: list. (line 4487)
-* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 9416)
-* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 9419)
-* \land: Math symbols. (line 9422)
-* \langle: Math symbols. (line 9426)
-* \large: Font sizes. (line 1847)
-* \Large: Font sizes. (line 1847)
-* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 1847)
+ (line 14524)
+* \l@chapter: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* \l@section: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* \l@subsection: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* \label: \label. (line 3268)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 3850)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 3850)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 3850)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 3850)
+* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 4208)
+* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 4208)
+* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 4208)
+* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 4208)
+* \labelsep: list. (line 4360)
+* \labelwidth: list. (line 4365)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 9801)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 9804)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 9807)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 9811)
+* \large: Font sizes. (line 1725)
+* \Large: Font sizes. (line 1725)
+* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 1725)
* \LastDeclaredEncoding: \LastDeclaredEncoding.
- (line 1648)
-* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 13717)
-* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 13720)
-* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 9430)
-* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 9433)
-* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 9436)
-* \ldots: Dots. (line 10405)
-* \ldots <1>: Text symbols. (line 13730)
-* \le: Math symbols. (line 9440)
-* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 9443)
-* \left: \left & \right. (line 10193)
-* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9449)
-* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9453)
-* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 4027)
-* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 9457)
-* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 9460)
-* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 4347)
-* \leftmargin <1>: list. (line 4507)
-* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 4347)
-* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 4347)
-* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 4347)
-* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 4347)
-* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 4347)
-* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 4347)
-* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9463)
-* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9467)
-* \leq: Math symbols. (line 9471)
-* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 9474)
-* \lg: Math functions. (line 10558)
-* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 9477)
-* \lim: Math functions. (line 10561)
-* \liminf: Math functions. (line 10564)
-* \limsup: Math functions. (line 10567)
-* \line: \line. (line 5156)
+ (line 1526)
+* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 14150)
+* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 14153)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 9815)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 9818)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 9821)
+* \ldots: Dots. (line 10790)
+* \ldots <1>: Text symbols. (line 14167)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 9825)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 9828)
+* \left: \left & \right. (line 10578)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9834)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9838)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 3905)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 9842)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 9845)
+* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 4224)
+* \leftmargin <1>: list. (line 4385)
+* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 4224)
+* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 4224)
+* \leftmarginiii: itemize. (line 4224)
+* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 4224)
+* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 4224)
+* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 4224)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9848)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9852)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 9856)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 9859)
+* \lg: Math functions. (line 10943)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 9862)
+* \lim: Math functions. (line 10946)
+* \liminf: Math functions. (line 10949)
+* \limsup: Math functions. (line 10952)
+* \line: \line. (line 5034)
* \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 6757)
+ (line 6645)
* \lineskip: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2357)
+ (line 2235)
* \lineskiplimit: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2357)
+ (line 2235)
* \linespread: Low-level font commands.
- (line 2005)
+ (line 1883)
* \linespread <1>: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2318)
-* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 5200)
+ (line 2196)
+* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 5078)
* \linewidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2212)
+ (line 2090)
* \linewidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2213)
+ (line 2091)
* \listoffigures: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14465)
-* \listoffigures <1>: \contentsline. (line 14760)
+ (line 14897)
+* \listoffigures <1>: \contentsline. (line 15192)
* \listoftables: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14465)
-* \listoftables <1>: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* \listparindent: list. (line 4524)
-* \ll: Math symbols. (line 9483)
-* \ln: Math functions. (line 10570)
-* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 9486)
-* \LoadClass: Class and package commands.
- (line 1060)
-* \LoadClassWithOptions: Class and package commands.
- (line 1060)
-* \location: \location. (line 15514)
-* \log: Math functions. (line 10573)
-* \long: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7256)
-* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9489)
-* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9493)
-* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 9497)
-* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9501)
-* \lor: Math symbols. (line 9505)
-* \lq: Text symbols. (line 13737)
+ (line 14897)
+* \listoftables <1>: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* \listparindent: list. (line 4402)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 9868)
+* \ln: Math functions. (line 10955)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 9871)
+* \LoadClass: \LoadClass & \LoadClassWithOptions.
+ (line 8245)
+* \LoadClassWithOptions: \LoadClass & \LoadClassWithOptions.
+ (line 8245)
+* \location: \location. (line 15946)
+* \log: Math functions. (line 10958)
+* \long command, checking for: \CheckCommand. (line 8046)
+* \long, not defining a command as: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 7149)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 9874)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9878)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 9882)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9886)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 9890)
+* \lq: Text symbols. (line 14174)
* \mainmatter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
+ (line 2989)
* \makeatother: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 7440)
+ (line 7334)
* \makeatother <1>: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 7440)
-* \makebox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12227)
+ (line 7334)
+* \makebox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12659)
* \makebox (for picture): \makebox (picture).
- (line 5353)
-* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 15230)
-* \makeglossary <1>: Glossaries. (line 15267)
-* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 14857)
-* \makelabel: list. (line 4443)
-* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 15524)
-* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 11169)
-* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 9509)
-* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 8962)
+ (line 5231)
+* \makeglossary: Glossaries. (line 15662)
+* \makeglossary <1>: Glossaries. (line 15699)
+* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 15289)
+* \makelabel: list. (line 4321)
+* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 15956)
+* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 11561)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 9894)
+* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 9347)
* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2219)
+ (line 2097)
* \marginparpush <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2222)
-* \marginparpush <2>: Marginal notes. (line 8991)
-* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 8996)
+ (line 2100)
+* \marginparpush <2>: Marginal notes. (line 9376)
+* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 9381)
* \marginparwidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2221)
+ (line 2099)
* \marginparwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2222)
-* \marginparwidth <2>: Marginal notes. (line 9000)
+ (line 2100)
+* \marginparwidth <2>: Marginal notes. (line 9385)
* \marginsep: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2220)
+ (line 2098)
* \marginsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2222)
-* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 11369)
-* \markright{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 11378)
-* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 1808)
-* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 1824)
-* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 9969)
-* \mathellipsis: Dots. (line 10406)
-* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 1821)
-* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 9972)
-* \mathring: Math accents. (line 10645)
-* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 1805)
-* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 9975)
-* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 1811)
-* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 9978)
-* \mathstrut: \mathstrut. (line 10908)
-* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 1814)
-* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 9981)
-* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 1826)
-* \max: Math functions. (line 10576)
-* \mbox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12227)
-* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 1734)
+ (line 2100)
+* \markboth{LEFT-HEAD}{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 11770)
+* \markright{RIGHT-HEAD}: \pagestyle. (line 11779)
+* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 1686)
+* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 1702)
+* \mathdollar: Math symbols. (line 10354)
+* \mathellipsis: Dots. (line 10791)
+* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 1699)
+* \mathparagraph: Math symbols. (line 10357)
+* \mathring: Math accents. (line 11030)
+* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 1683)
+* \mathsection: Math symbols. (line 10360)
+* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 1689)
+* \mathsterling: Math symbols. (line 10363)
+* \mathstrut: \mathstrut. (line 11300)
+* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 1692)
+* \mathunderscore: Math symbols. (line 10366)
+* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 1704)
+* \max: Math functions. (line 10961)
+* \mbox: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12659)
+* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 1612)
* \medbreak: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak.
- (line 11978)
+ (line 12410)
* \medskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11929)
+ (line 12361)
* \medskip <1>: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11956)
+ (line 12388)
* \medskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11957)
+ (line 12389)
* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10740)
-* \message: \message. (line 15969)
-* \mho: Math symbols. (line 9513)
-* \mid: Math symbols. (line 9516)
-* \min: Math functions. (line 10579)
-* \models: Math symbols. (line 9526)
+ (line 11132)
+* \message: \message. (line 16401)
+* \MessageBreak, and message text: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8091)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 9898)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 9901)
+* \min: Math functions. (line 10964)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 9911)
* \month: \day & \month & \year.
- (line 8317)
-* \mp: Math symbols. (line 9530)
-* \mu: Math symbols. (line 9533)
-* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 5883)
-* \multiput: \multiput. (line 5069)
-* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 9536)
-* \name: \name. (line 15581)
-* \natural: Math symbols. (line 9539)
-* \ne: Math symbols. (line 9542)
-* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 9545)
-* \NeedsTeXFormat: Class and package commands.
- (line 1094)
-* \neg: Math symbols. (line 9548)
+ (line 8702)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 9915)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 9918)
+* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 5761)
+* \multiput: \multiput. (line 4947)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 9921)
+* \name: \name. (line 16013)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 9924)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 9927)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 9930)
+* \NeedsTeXFormat: \NeedsTeXFormat. (line 8275)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 9933)
* \negmedspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10746)
+ (line 11138)
* \negthickspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10734)
+ (line 11126)
* \negthinspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10765)
+ (line 11157)
* \negthinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 11806)
-* \neq: Math symbols. (line 9552)
+ (line 12238)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 9937)
* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7234)
-* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 7558)
+ (line 7127)
+* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 7452)
* \newenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 7651)
-* \newfont: \newfont. (line 7897)
-* \newglossaryentry: \newglossaryentry. (line 15278)
-* \newlength: \newlength. (line 7599)
-* \newline: \newline. (line 6615)
-* \<NEWLINE>: \(SPACE). (line 11687)
-* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6862)
-* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 7623)
-* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 7785)
-* \newtie: Accents. (line 13997)
-* \newwrite: \write. (line 15862)
+ (line 7545)
+* \newfont: \newfont. (line 7791)
+* \newglossaryentry: \newglossaryentry. (line 15710)
+* \newlength: \newlength. (line 7493)
+* \newline: \newline. (line 6492)
+* \<NEWLINE>: \(SPACE). (line 12118)
+* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6750)
+* \newrobustcmd (etoolbox package): \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8173)
+* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 7517)
+* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 7679)
+* \newtie: Accents. (line 14434)
+* \newwrite: \write. (line 16294)
* \ng: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14091)
+ (line 14528)
* \NG: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14091)
-* \ni: Math symbols. (line 9555)
-* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6193)
+ (line 14528)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 9940)
+* \nobreakspace: ~. (line 12175)
+* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6071)
+* \nocite {*}, for all keys: Using BibTeX. (line 6141)
* \nocite and internal \citation: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6287)
-* \nocite {*}, for all keys: Using BibTeX. (line 6263)
-* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 1719)
-* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 1719)
-* \nofiles: \nofiles. (line 14801)
+ (line 6165)
+* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 1597)
+* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 1597)
+* \nofiles: \nofiles. (line 15233)
* \noindent: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 8881)
+ (line 9266)
* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 6757)
+ (line 6645)
* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing.
- (line 11656)
-* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 4022)
+ (line 12084)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 3900)
* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6920)
-* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 1755)
-* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 8978)
-* \normalsfcodes: \normalsfcodes. (line 11677)
-* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 1847)
-* \not: Math symbols. (line 9559)
-* \notin: Math symbols. (line 9567)
-* \nu: Math symbols. (line 9571)
-* \numberline: \numberline. (line 14826)
-* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 9574)
+ (line 6808)
+* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 1633)
+* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 9363)
+* \normalsfcodes: \normalsfcodes. (line 12108)
+* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 1725)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 9944)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 9952)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 9956)
+* \numberline: \numberline. (line 15258)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 9959)
* \o (ø): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14095)
+ (line 14532)
* \O (Ø): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14095)
+ (line 14532)
* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 6575)
+ (line 6452)
* \oddsidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 811)
+ (line 1018)
* \oddsidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2245)
+ (line 2123)
* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2247)
-* \odot: Math symbols. (line 9577)
+ (line 2125)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 9962)
* \oe (œ): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14099)
+ (line 14536)
* \OE (Œ): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14099)
-* \oint: Math symbols. (line 9581)
-* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 1830)
-* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 9584)
-* \omega: Math symbols. (line 9587)
-* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 9590)
-* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 2033)
+ (line 14536)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 9966)
+* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 1708)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 9969)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 9972)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 9975)
+* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 1911)
* \openin: \openin & \openout.
- (line 15671)
-* \opening: \opening. (line 15591)
+ (line 16103)
+* \opening: \opening. (line 16023)
* \openout: \openin & \openout.
- (line 15671)
-* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 9593)
-* \OptionNotUsed: Class and package commands.
- (line 1112)
-* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 9597)
-* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 9600)
-* \oval: \oval. (line 5248)
-* \overbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10699)
-* \overline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10680)
-* \owns: Math symbols. (line 9604)
-* \P: Text symbols. (line 13740)
-* \PackageError: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* \PackageInfo: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* \PackageInfoNoLine: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* \PackageWarning: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
-* \PackageWarningNoLine: Class and package commands.
- (line 953)
+ (line 16103)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 9978)
+* \OptionNotUsed: \OptionNotUsed. (line 8298)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 9982)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 9985)
+* \oval: \oval. (line 5126)
+* \overbrace{MATH}: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11086)
+* \overleftarrow{MATH}: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11093)
+* \overline{MATH}: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11067)
+* \overrightarrow{MATH}: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11090)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 9989)
+* \P: Text symbols. (line 14177)
+* \PackageError: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8080)
+* \PackageInfo: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8080)
+* \PackageInfoNoLine: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8080)
+* \PackageWarning: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8080)
+* \PackageWarningNoLine: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8080)
* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6920)
-* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 11241)
-* \pageref: \pageref. (line 3448)
-* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 11299)
+ (line 6808)
+* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 11633)
+* \pageref: \pageref. (line 3326)
+* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 11699)
* \paperheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2258)
+ (line 2136)
* \paperheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2259)
+ (line 2137)
* \paperwidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2264)
+ (line 2142)
* \paperwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2265)
-* \par: \par. (line 8828)
-* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 2636)
+ (line 2143)
+* \par: \par. (line 9213)
+* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 2514)
* \paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3012)
-* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 9608)
-* \parbox: \parbox. (line 12383)
-* \parindent: minipage. (line 4863)
+ (line 2890)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 9993)
+* \parbox: \parbox. (line 12815)
+* \parindent: minipage. (line 4741)
* \parindent <1>: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 8918)
+ (line 9303)
* \parindent <2>: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 8930)
-* \parsep: list. (line 4530)
+ (line 9315)
+* \parsep: list. (line 4408)
* \parskip: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 8930)
-* \parskip example: itemize. (line 4367)
-* \part: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* \part <1>: \part. (line 2723)
-* \partial: Math symbols. (line 9611)
-* \partopsep: list. (line 4539)
-* \PassOptionsToClass: Class and package commands.
- (line 1118)
-* \PassOptionsToPackage: Class and package commands.
- (line 1118)
+ (line 9315)
+* \parskip example: itemize. (line 4244)
+* \part: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* \part <1>: \part. (line 2601)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 9996)
+* \partopsep: list. (line 4417)
+* \PassOptionsToClass: \PassOptionsToClass & \PassOptionsToPackage.
+ (line 8305)
+* \PassOptionsToClass, ignoring: \LoadClass & \LoadClassWithOptions.
+ (line 8266)
+* \PassOptionsToPackage: \PassOptionsToClass & \PassOptionsToPackage.
+ (line 8305)
* \pdfpageheight: Document class options.
- (line 767)
+ (line 974)
* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
- (line 767)
-* \perp: Math symbols. (line 9614)
+ (line 974)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 9999)
* \phantom: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
-* \Phi: Math symbols. (line 9618)
-* \phi: Math symbols. (line 9621)
-* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 9625)
-* \pi: Math symbols. (line 9628)
-* \pm: Math symbols. (line 9632)
-* \pmod: Math functions. (line 10582)
-* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 5606)
-* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 5607)
-* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 13744)
-* \Pr: Math functions. (line 10585)
-* \prec: Math symbols. (line 9635)
-* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 9638)
+ (line 11237)
+* \Phi: Math symbols. (line 10003)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 10006)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 10010)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 10013)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 10017)
+* \pmod: Math functions. (line 10967)
+* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 5484)
+* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 5485)
+* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 14181)
+* \Pr: Math functions. (line 10970)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 10020)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 10023)
* \prevdepth: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2357)
-* \prime: Math symbols. (line 9642)
-* \printglossaries: Glossaries. (line 15230)
-* \printglossaries <1>: Glossaries. (line 15267)
-* \printindex: \printindex. (line 15215)
-* \ProcessOptions: Class and package commands.
- (line 1155)
-* \ProcessOptions*: Class and package commands.
- (line 1155)
-* \prod: Math symbols. (line 9651)
-* \propto: Math symbols. (line 9654)
-* \protect: \protect. (line 7929)
-* \protected@write: \write. (line 15908)
-* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 7411)
-* \ProvidesClass: Class and package commands.
- (line 1193)
-* \ProvidesFile: Class and package commands.
- (line 1226)
-* \ProvidesPackage: Class and package commands.
- (line 1193)
+ (line 2235)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 10027)
+* \printglossaries: Glossaries. (line 15662)
+* \printglossaries <1>: Glossaries. (line 15699)
+* \printindex: \printindex. (line 15647)
+* \ProcessOptions: \ProcessOptions. (line 8351)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 10036)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 10039)
+* \protect: \protect. (line 7823)
+* \protect, and message text: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8091)
+* \protected@write: \write. (line 16340)
+* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 7305)
+* \providerobustcmd (etoolbox package): \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8173)
+* \ProvidesClass: \ProvidesClass & \ProvidesPackage.
+ (line 8395)
+* \ProvidesFile: \ProvidesFile. (line 8435)
+* \ProvidesPackage: \ProvidesClass & \ProvidesPackage.
+ (line 8395)
* \ProvideTextCommand: \DeclareTextCommand & \ProvideTextCommand.
- (line 1472)
+ (line 1350)
* \ProvideTextCommandDefault: \DeclareTextCommandDefault & \ProvideTextCommandDefault.
- (line 1521)
-* \ps: \ps. (line 15603)
-* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 9657)
-* \psi: Math symbols. (line 9660)
-* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 5609)
-* \put: \put. (line 5051)
-* \qbezier: \qbezier. (line 5092)
+ (line 1399)
+* \ps: \ps. (line 16035)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 10042)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 10045)
+* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 5487)
+* \put: \put. (line 4929)
+* \qbezier: \qbezier. (line 4970)
* \qquad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10779)
+ (line 11171)
* \qquad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
- (line 11419)
+ (line 11843)
* \quad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10773)
+ (line 11165)
* \quad <1>: \enspace & \quad & \qquad.
- (line 11419)
-* \quotedblbase („): Text symbols. (line 13748)
-* \quotesinglbase (‚): Text symbols. (line 13749)
-* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 13991)
-* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 2174)
-* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 4268)
-* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 4215)
-* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 12434)
-* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 9663)
-* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 9667)
-* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 9670)
-* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 9674)
-* \Re: Math symbols. (line 9677)
-* \read: \read. (line 15735)
-* \ref: \ref. (line 3472)
-* \reflectbox: \scalebox. (line 13538)
-* \refname: thebibliography. (line 6068)
-* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 8284)
+ (line 11843)
+* \quotedblbase („): Text symbols. (line 14185)
+* \quotesinglbase (‚): Text symbols. (line 14186)
+* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 14428)
+* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 2052)
+* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 4146)
+* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 4093)
+* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 12866)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 10048)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 10052)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 10055)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 10059)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 10062)
+* \read: \read. (line 16167)
+* \ref: \ref. (line 3350)
+* \reflectbox: \scalebox. (line 13714)
+* \refname: thebibliography. (line 5946)
+* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 8669)
* \renewcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7234)
+ (line 7127)
* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 7651)
-* \RequirePackage: Class and package commands.
- (line 1235)
-* \RequirePackage, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 16327)
-* \RequirePackageWithOptions: Class and package commands.
- (line 1235)
-* \resizebox: \resizebox. (line 13570)
+ (line 7545)
+* \renewrobustcmd (etoolbox package): \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8173)
+* \RequirePackage: \RequirePackage & \RequirePackageWithOptions.
+ (line 8455)
+* \RequirePackage, and texput jobname: Jobname. (line 16759)
+* \RequirePackageWithOptions: \RequirePackage & \RequirePackageWithOptions.
+ (line 8455)
+* \resizebox: \resizebox. (line 13746)
* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 6575)
-* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 9682)
-* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 9687)
-* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 8978)
-* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 9692)
-* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 9696)
-* \rho: Math symbols. (line 9702)
-* \right: \left & \right. (line 10193)
-* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9706)
-* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 9710)
-* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 9714)
-* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 9717)
-* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 9720)
-* \rightmargin: list. (line 4554)
-* \rm: Font styles. (line 1781)
-* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 1728)
+ (line 6452)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 10067)
+* \revemptyset: Math symbols. (line 10072)
+* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 9363)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 10077)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 10081)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 10087)
+* \right: \left & \right. (line 10578)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 10091)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 10095)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 10099)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 10102)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 10105)
+* \rightmargin: list. (line 4432)
+* \rm: Font styles. (line 1659)
+* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 1606)
* \roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 8156)
+ (line 8541)
* \Roman{COUNTER}: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 8161)
-* \rotatebox: \rotatebox. (line 13470)
-* \rq: Text symbols. (line 13752)
-* \rule: \rule. (line 14167)
-* \S: Text symbols. (line 13755)
+ (line 8546)
+* \rotatebox: \rotatebox. (line 13646)
+* \rq: Text symbols. (line 14189)
+* \rule: \rule. (line 14599)
+* \S: Text symbols. (line 14192)
* \samepage: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6958)
-* \savebox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12480)
-* \sbox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12480)
-* \sc: Font styles. (line 1784)
-* \scalebox: \scalebox. (line 13538)
-* \scriptscriptstyle: Math styles. (line 10953)
-* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 1847)
-* \scriptstyle: Math styles. (line 10953)
-* \scshape: Font styles. (line 1749)
-* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 9723)
-* \sec: Math functions. (line 10588)
-* \section: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* \section <1>: \section. (line 2870)
-* \seename: \index. (line 14991)
+ (line 6846)
+* \savebox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12912)
+* \sbox: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12912)
+* \sc: Font styles. (line 1662)
+* \scalebox: \scalebox. (line 13714)
+* \scriptscriptstyle: Math styles. (line 11345)
+* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 1725)
+* \scriptstyle: Math styles. (line 11345)
+* \scshape: Font styles. (line 1627)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 10108)
+* \sec: Math functions. (line 10973)
+* \section: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* \section <1>: \section. (line 2748)
+* \seename: \index. (line 15423)
* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 2011)
-* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 8250)
-* \setlength: \setlength. (line 8497)
-* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 9726)
-* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 8561)
-* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 8586)
-* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 8611)
-* \sf: Font styles. (line 1787)
-* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 1746)
-* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 9731)
-* \ShellEscape: \write18. (line 16098)
-* \shipout and expansion: \write. (line 15903)
-* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 5285)
-* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 9734)
-* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 9737)
-* \signature: \signature. (line 15620)
-* \sim: Math symbols. (line 9741)
-* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 9744)
-* \sin: Math functions. (line 10591)
-* \sinh: Math functions. (line 10594)
-* \sl: Font styles. (line 1790)
-* \sloppy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6696)
-* \slshape: Font styles. (line 1743)
-* \small: Font sizes. (line 1847)
+ (line 1889)
+* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 8635)
+* \setlength: \setlength. (line 8882)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 10111)
+* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 8946)
+* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 8971)
+* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 8996)
+* \sf: Font styles. (line 1665)
+* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 1624)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 10116)
+* \ShellEscape: \write18. (line 16530)
+* \shipout and expansion: \write. (line 16335)
+* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 5163)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 10119)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 10122)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 16052)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 10126)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 10129)
+* \sin: Math functions. (line 10976)
+* \sinh: Math functions. (line 10979)
+* \sl: Font styles. (line 1668)
+* \slash: \slash. (line 6550)
+* \sloppy: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6584)
+* \slshape: Font styles. (line 1621)
+* \small: Font sizes. (line 1725)
* \smallbreak: \bigbreak & \medbreak & \smallbreak.
- (line 11978)
-* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 9747)
+ (line 12410)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 10132)
* \smallskip: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11929)
+ (line 12361)
* \smallskip <1>: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11961)
+ (line 12393)
* \smallskipamount: \bigskip & \medskip & \smallskip.
- (line 11962)
-* \smile: Math symbols. (line 9751)
-* \<SPACE>: \(SPACE). (line 11687)
-* \<SPACE> <1>: \(SPACE). (line 11687)
+ (line 12394)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 10136)
+* \<SPACE>: \(SPACE). (line 12118)
+* \<SPACE> <1>: \(SPACE). (line 12118)
* \space: \include & \includeonly.
- (line 14390)
-* \space <1>: \input. (line 14453)
-* \space <2>: \typeout. (line 15827)
-* \spacefactor: \spacefactor. (line 11552)
-* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 9754)
-* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 9757)
-* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 9761)
-* \sqrt: \sqrt. (line 11052)
-* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 9765)
-* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 9770)
-* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 9774)
-* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 9779)
+ (line 14822)
+* \space <1>: \input. (line 14885)
+* \space <2>: \typeout. (line 16259)
+* \space, and message text: \ClassError and \PackageError and others.
+ (line 8091)
+* \spacefactor: \spacefactor. (line 11976)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 10139)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 10142)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 10146)
+* \sqrt: \sqrt. (line 11444)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 10150)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 10155)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 10159)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 10164)
* \ss (ß): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14103)
+ (line 14540)
* \SS (SS): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14103)
-* \stackrel: \stackrel. (line 11069)
-* \star: Math symbols. (line 9783)
-* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 8302)
+ (line 14540)
+* \stackrel: \stackrel. (line 11461)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 10168)
+* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 8687)
* \stop: Recovering from errors.
- (line 16383)
-* \stretch: \stretch. (line 8636)
-* \strut: \strut. (line 12005)
+ (line 16815)
+* \stretch: \stretch. (line 9021)
+* \strut: \strut. (line 12437)
* \subitem: Produce the index manually.
- (line 14928)
-* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 2636)
+ (line 15360)
+* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 2514)
* \subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3012)
-* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* \subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2948)
-* \subset: Math symbols. (line 9790)
-* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 9793)
+ (line 2890)
+* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* \subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2826)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 10175)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 10178)
* \subsubitem: Produce the index manually.
- (line 14928)
-* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 2636)
+ (line 15360)
+* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 2514)
* \subsubsection <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3012)
-* \succ: Math symbols. (line 9796)
-* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 9799)
-* \sum: Math symbols. (line 9803)
-* \sup: Math functions. (line 10597)
-* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 2493)
-* \supset: Math symbols. (line 9806)
-* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 9809)
-* \surd: Math symbols. (line 9812)
-* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 9817)
+ (line 2890)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 10181)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 10184)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 10188)
+* \sup: Math functions. (line 10982)
+* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 2371)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 10191)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 10194)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 10197)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 10202)
* \symbf: OpenType bold math.
- (line 10087)
+ (line 10472)
* \symbfit: OpenType bold math.
- (line 10087)
+ (line 10472)
* \symbol: Symbols by font position.
- (line 13688)
-* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 13997)
-* \<TAB>: \(SPACE). (line 11687)
-* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 5614)
-* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 5872)
+ (line 14121)
+* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 14434)
+* \<TAB>: \(SPACE). (line 12118)
+* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 5492)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 5750)
* \tableofcontents: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14465)
-* \tableofcontents <1>: \contentsline. (line 14760)
-* \tan: Math functions. (line 10600)
-* \tanh: Math functions. (line 10603)
-* \tau: Math symbols. (line 9820)
-* \telephone: \telephone. (line 15650)
-* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 13759)
-* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 13804)
-* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 13762)
-* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 13765)
-* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 13768)
-* \textbackslash: Reserved characters.
- (line 13617)
-* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 13771)
-* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 13779)
-* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 13782)
-* \textbf: Font styles. (line 1737)
-* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 13785)
-* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 13788)
-* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 13792)
-* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 13796)
-* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 13803)
-* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 13799)
-* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 13802)
-* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 13708)
-* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 13811)
-* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 13814)
-* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 13817)
-* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 13731)
-* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 13820)
-* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 13826)
-* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 13829)
-* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 13837)
-* \textfiguredash: Text symbols. (line 13840)
-* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 2529)
-* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 2530)
-* \textfraction: Floats. (line 2508)
-* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2509)
-* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 13847)
+ (line 14897)
+* \tableofcontents <1>: \contentsline. (line 15192)
+* \tan: Math functions. (line 10985)
+* \tanh: Math functions. (line 10988)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 10205)
+* \telephone: \telephone. (line 16082)
+* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 14196)
+* \textascendercompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 14241)
+* \textasciicircum: Text symbols. (line 14199)
+* \textasciitilde: Text symbols. (line 14202)
+* \textasteriskcentered: Text symbols. (line 14205)
+* \textbackslash: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14050)
+* \textbackslash <1>: Text symbols. (line 14208)
+* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 14216)
+* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 14219)
+* \textbf: Font styles. (line 1615)
+* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 14222)
+* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 14225)
+* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 14229)
+* \textbullet: Text symbols. (line 14233)
+* \textcapitalcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 14240)
+* \textcircled{LETTER}: Text symbols. (line 14236)
+* \textcompwordmark: Text symbols. (line 14239)
+* \textcopyright: Text symbols. (line 14141)
+* \textdagger: Text symbols. (line 14248)
+* \textdaggerdbl: Text symbols. (line 14251)
+* \textdollar (or \$): Text symbols. (line 14254)
+* \textellipsis: Text symbols. (line 14168)
+* \textemdash (or ---): Text symbols. (line 14257)
+* \textendash (or --): Text symbols. (line 14263)
+* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 14266)
+* \textexclamdown (or !`): Text symbols. (line 14274)
+* \textfiguredash: Text symbols. (line 14277)
+* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 2407)
+* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 2408)
+* \textfraction: Floats. (line 2386)
+* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2387)
+* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 14284)
* \textheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2270)
+ (line 2148)
* \textheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2271)
-* \texthorizontalbar: Text symbols. (line 13850)
-* \textit: Font styles. (line 1731)
-* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 13858)
-* \textless: Text symbols. (line 13855)
-* \textmd: Font styles. (line 1734)
-* \textnonbreakinghyphen: Text symbols. (line 13861)
-* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 1755)
-* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 13867)
-* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 13868)
-* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 13741)
-* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 13871)
-* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 13874)
-* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 13877)
-* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 13880)
-* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 13883)
-* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 13886)
-* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 13889)
-* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 13892)
-* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 13893)
-* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 13896)
-* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 13899)
-* \textrm: Font styles. (line 1728)
-* \textsc: Font styles. (line 1749)
-* \textsection: Text symbols. (line 13756)
-* \textsf: Font styles. (line 1746)
-* \textsl: Font styles. (line 1743)
-* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 13745)
-* \textstyle: Math styles. (line 10953)
-* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 13902)
-* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 13905)
-* \texttt: Font styles. (line 1752)
-* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 13908)
-* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 13911)
-* \textup: Font styles. (line 1740)
-* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 13914)
+ (line 2149)
+* \texthorizontalbar: Text symbols. (line 14287)
+* \textit: Font styles. (line 1609)
+* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 14295)
+* \textless: Text symbols. (line 14292)
+* \textmd: Font styles. (line 1612)
+* \textnonbreakinghyphen: Text symbols. (line 14298)
+* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 1633)
+* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 14304)
+* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 14305)
+* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 14178)
+* \textperiodcentered: Text symbols. (line 14308)
+* \textquestiondown (or ?`): Text symbols. (line 14311)
+* \textquotedblleft (or ``): Text symbols. (line 14314)
+* \textquotedblright (or ''): Text symbols. (line 14317)
+* \textquoteleft (or `): Text symbols. (line 14320)
+* \textquoteright (or '): Text symbols. (line 14323)
+* \textquotesingle: Text symbols. (line 14326)
+* \textquotestraightbase: Text symbols. (line 14329)
+* \textquotestraightdblbase: Text symbols. (line 14330)
+* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 14333)
+* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 14336)
+* \textrm: Font styles. (line 1606)
+* \textsc: Font styles. (line 1627)
+* \textsection: Text symbols. (line 14193)
+* \textsf: Font styles. (line 1624)
+* \textsl: Font styles. (line 1621)
+* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 14182)
+* \textstyle: Math styles. (line 11345)
+* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 14339)
+* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 14342)
+* \texttt: Font styles. (line 1630)
+* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 14345)
+* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 14348)
+* \textup: Font styles. (line 1618)
+* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 14351)
* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2278)
+ (line 2156)
* \textwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2279)
+ (line 2157)
* \th (þ): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14107)
+ (line 14544)
* \TH (Þ): Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14107)
-* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 11219)
-* \theta: Math symbols. (line 9823)
-* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 5221)
+ (line 14544)
+* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 11611)
+* \thepage: \thepage. (line 11813)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 10208)
+* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 5099)
* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10727)
-* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 5213)
+ (line 11119)
+* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 5091)
* \thinspace: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10751)
+ (line 11143)
* \thinspace <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 11806)
-* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 11384)
-* \tilde: Math accents. (line 10648)
-* \times: Math symbols. (line 9827)
-* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 1847)
-* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 11226)
-* \to: Math symbols. (line 9830)
-* \today: \today. (line 14202)
-* \top: Math symbols. (line 9834)
-* \topfraction: Floats. (line 2513)
-* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2514)
+ (line 12238)
+* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 11785)
+* \tilde: Math accents. (line 11033)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 10212)
+* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 1725)
+* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 11618)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 10215)
+* \today: \today. (line 14634)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 10219)
+* \topfraction: Floats. (line 2391)
+* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 2392)
* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2303)
-* \topsep: list. (line 4559)
+ (line 2181)
+* \topsep: list. (line 4437)
* \topskip: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2310)
+ (line 2188)
* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2311)
-* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 9838)
-* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 9841)
-* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 9847)
-* \tt: Font styles. (line 1793)
-* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 1752)
-* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 2045)
-* \typein: \typein. (line 15766)
-* \typeout: \typeout. (line 15811)
-* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 14003)
+ (line 2189)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 10223)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 10226)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 10232)
+* \tt: Font styles. (line 1671)
+* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 1630)
+* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 1923)
+* \typein: \typein. (line 16198)
+* \typeout: \typeout. (line 16243)
+* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 14440)
* \unboldmath: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 10028)
+ (line 10413)
* \unboldmath <1>: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 10036)
-* \underbar: Accents. (line 13967)
-* \underbrace{MATH}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10685)
-* \underline{TEXT}: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10669)
-* \unitlength: picture. (line 4946)
-* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 9853)
-* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 9859)
-* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 9865)
-* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 9869)
-* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 9873)
-* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 9878)
-* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 9883)
-* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 9888)
-* \upshape: Font styles. (line 1740)
-* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 9893)
-* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 9896)
-* \usebox: \usebox. (line 12589)
-* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 8191)
+ (line 10421)
+* \underbar: Accents. (line 14404)
+* \underbrace{MATH}: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11071)
+* \underline{MATH}: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11054)
+* \unitlength: picture. (line 4824)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 10238)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 10244)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 10250)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 10254)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 10258)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 10263)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 10268)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 10273)
+* \upshape: Font styles. (line 1618)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 10278)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 10281)
+* \usebox: \usebox. (line 13021)
+* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 8576)
* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 2019)
-* \usepackage: Additional packages.
- (line 832)
+ (line 1897)
+* \usepackage: \usepackage. (line 1039)
* \UseTextAccent: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent.
- (line 1665)
+ (line 1543)
* \UseTextSymbol: \UseTextSymbol & \UseTextAccent.
- (line 1665)
-* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 14007)
-* \value: \value. (line 8217)
-* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 9904)
-* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 9899)
-* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 9909)
-* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 9913)
-* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 9917)
-* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 9921)
-* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 9925)
-* \vbox (plain TeX): minipage. (line 4817)
-* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 9929)
-* \vdots: Dots. (line 10416)
-* \vec: Math accents. (line 10651)
-* \vector: \vector. (line 5331)
-* \vee: Math symbols. (line 9933)
-* \verb: \verb. (line 6409)
-* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 9937)
-* \vert: Math symbols. (line 9941)
-* \vfill: \vfill. (line 12141)
-* \vline: \vline. (line 5965)
+ (line 1543)
+* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 14444)
+* \value: \value. (line 8602)
+* \vanothing: Math symbols. (line 10289)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 10284)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 10294)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 10298)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 10302)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 10306)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 10310)
+* \vbox (plain TeX): minipage. (line 4695)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 10314)
+* \vdots: Dots. (line 10801)
+* \vec: Math accents. (line 11036)
+* \vector: \vector. (line 5209)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 10318)
+* \verb: \verb. (line 6289)
+* \verb, as fragile command: \protect. (line 7856)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 10322)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 10326)
+* \vfill: \vfill. (line 12573)
+* \vline: \vline. (line 5843)
* \vphantom: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
-* \vspace: \vspace. (line 12090)
-* \vtop plain TeX: minipage. (line 4813)
-* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 9947)
-* \widehat: Math accents. (line 10654)
-* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 10657)
-* \wlog: \wlog. (line 16015)
-* \wp: Math symbols. (line 9951)
-* \wr: Math symbols. (line 9954)
-* \write: \write. (line 15844)
+ (line 11237)
+* \vspace: \vspace. (line 12522)
+* \vtop plain TeX: minipage. (line 4691)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 10332)
+* \widehat: Math accents. (line 11039)
+* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 11042)
+* \wlog: \wlog. (line 16447)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 10336)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 10339)
+* \write: \write. (line 16276)
* \write and security: \write and security.
- (line 15945)
-* \write streams 16, 17, 18: \write. (line 15924)
-* \write18: \write18. (line 16033)
+ (line 16377)
+* \write streams 16, 17, 18: \write. (line 16356)
+* \write18: \write18. (line 16465)
* \write18, enabling: Command line options.
- (line 16208)
-* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 9957)
-* \xi: Math symbols. (line 9960)
-* \xspace: xspace package. (line 8056)
+ (line 16640)
+* \XeTeXdefaultencoding: inputenc package. (line 14581)
+* \XeTeXinputencoding: inputenc package. (line 14581)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 10342)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 10345)
+* \xspace: xspace package. (line 7956)
* \year: \day & \month & \year.
- (line 8317)
-* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 9963)
-* \[...\] display math: displaymath. (line 3860)
-* \\ (for center): center. (line 3704)
-* \\ (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 4012)
-* \\ (for flushleft): flushleft. (line 4194)
-* \\ (for flushright): flushright. (line 4254)
-* \\ (for letters): Letters. (line 15409)
-* \\ (for tabular): tabular. (line 5736)
-* \\ (for verse): verse. (line 6475)
-* \\ (for \author): \maketitle. (line 11206)
-* \\ (for \shortstack objects): \shortstack. (line 5314)
-* \\ (for \title): \maketitle. (line 11227)
-* \\ (force line break): \\. (line 6513)
-* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5559)
-* \\* (for eqnarray): eqnarray. (line 4018)
-* \^: Reserved characters.
- (line 13617)
-* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 13954)
-* \_: Reserved characters.
- (line 13612)
-* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 13958)
-* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 5586)
-* \{: Reserved characters.
- (line 13612)
-* \|: Math symbols. (line 9153)
-* \}: Reserved characters.
- (line 13612)
-* \~: Reserved characters.
- (line 13617)
-* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 13962)
+ (line 8702)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 10348)
+* & (for table cells): tabular. (line 5610)
+* & character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 751)
+* # character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 761)
+* % character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 744)
+* ^ character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 755)
* ^ superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 9078)
-* ^^J, in \write: \write. (line 15932)
-* _ subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 9078)
-* {...} (for required arguments): LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 597)
-* ~: ~. (line 11741)
+ (line 9463)
+* ^^J, in \write: \write. (line 16364)
+* ~: ~. (line 12171)
+* ~ character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 765)
+* $ character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 748)
+* $ inline math: math. (line 4638)
+* $$...$$ plain TeX display math: displaymath. (line 3744)
+* 10pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 948)
+* 11pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 948)
+* 12pt option: Document class options.
+ (line 948)
* a4paper option: Document class options.
- (line 746)
+ (line 953)
* a5paper option: Document class options.
- (line 746)
-* abstract environment: abstract. (line 3572)
-* abstract package: abstract. (line 3593)
-* abstracts: abstract. (line 3572)
-* accents: Accents. (line 13920)
+ (line 953)
+* abstract environment: abstract. (line 3450)
+* abstract package: abstract. (line 3471)
+* abstracts: abstract. (line 3450)
+* accents: Accents. (line 14357)
* accents, defining: \DeclareFontEncoding.
- (line 1386)
+ (line 1264)
* accents, defining <1>: \DeclareTextAccent.
- (line 1420)
+ (line 1298)
* accents, defining <2>: \DeclareTextAccentDefault.
- (line 1444)
+ (line 1322)
* accents, defining <3>: \DeclareTextComposite.
- (line 1553)
+ (line 1431)
* accents, defining <4>: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand.
- (line 1577)
+ (line 1455)
* accents, defining <5>: \DeclareTextSymbolDefault.
- (line 1622)
-* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 10617)
+ (line 1500)
+* accents, mathematical: Math accents. (line 11002)
+* accessibility: \DocumentMetadata. (line 847)
* accessing any character of a font: Symbols by font position.
- (line 13688)
-* acronyms, list of: Glossaries. (line 15230)
-* acute accent: Accents. (line 13943)
-* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 10622)
-* additional packages, loading: Additional packages.
- (line 832)
-* adjustbox package: Boxes. (line 12221)
+ (line 14121)
+* acronyms, list of: Glossaries. (line 15662)
+* acute accent: Accents. (line 14380)
+* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 11007)
+* additional packages, loading: \usepackage. (line 1039)
+* adjustbox package: Boxes. (line 12653)
* ae ligature: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14067)
-* algorithm2e package: tabbing. (line 5639)
-* align environment, from amsmath: eqnarray. (line 3989)
-* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 3989)
-* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 5499)
-* amscd package: Arrows. (line 10022)
-* amsfonts package: Math formulas. (line 9067)
-* amsfonts package <1>: Arrows. (line 9987)
-* amsmath package: array. (line 3667)
-* amsmath package <1>: array. (line 3675)
-* amsmath package <2>: displaymath. (line 3856)
-* amsmath package <3>: equation. (line 4057)
-* amsmath package <4>: theorem. (line 6319)
-* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 9067)
-* amsmath package <6>: \left & \right. (line 10217)
+ (line 14504)
+* algorithm2e package: tabbing. (line 5517)
+* align environment, from amsmath: eqnarray. (line 3867)
+* aligning equations: eqnarray. (line 3867)
+* alignment via tabbing: tabbing. (line 5377)
+* alphabetic presentation forms Unicode block: Ligatures. (line 720)
+* ampersand character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 751)
+* amscd package: Arrows. (line 10407)
+* amsfonts package: Math formulas. (line 9452)
+* amsfonts package <1>: Arrows. (line 10372)
+* amsmath package: array. (line 3545)
+* amsmath package <1>: array. (line 3553)
+* amsmath package <2>: displaymath. (line 3734)
+* amsmath package <3>: equation. (line 3935)
+* amsmath package <4>: theorem. (line 6197)
+* amsmath package <5>: Math formulas. (line 9452)
+* amsmath package <6>: \left & \right. (line 10602)
* amsmath package <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc..
- (line 10362)
-* amsmath package <8>: Dots. (line 10419)
-* amsmath package <9>: Math functions. (line 10606)
+ (line 10747)
+* amsmath package <8>: Dots. (line 10804)
+* amsmath package <9>: Math functions. (line 10991)
* amsmath package <10>: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10727)
+ (line 11119)
* amsmath package <11>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10895)
+ (line 11287)
* amsmath package <12>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 11013)
+ (line 11405)
* amsmath package <13>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 11017)
+ (line 11409)
* amsmath package <14>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 11826)
-* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3989)
-* amsthm package: theorem. (line 6319)
-* amsthm package <1>: \rule. (line 14179)
-* answers package: \write. (line 15937)
-* appendices: \appendix. (line 3077)
-* appendix: \appendix. (line 3077)
-* appendix package: \appendix. (line 3101)
+ (line 12258)
+* amsmath package, replacing eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3867)
+* amsthm package: theorem. (line 6197)
+* amsthm package <1>: \rule. (line 14611)
+* answers package: \write. (line 16369)
+* appendices: \appendix. (line 2955)
+* appendix: \appendix. (line 2955)
+* appendix package: \appendix. (line 2979)
* arguments, optional, defining and using: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7277)
+ (line 7171)
* aring: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14063)
-* array environment: array. (line 3618)
-* array package: array. (line 3686)
-* arrays, math: array. (line 3618)
-* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 13859)
-* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 13900)
-* arrows: Arrows. (line 9987)
-* article class: Document classes. (line 703)
-* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 13805)
-* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 13763)
-* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 13766)
-* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 13769)
-* Asymptote package: \line. (line 5185)
-* Asymptote package <1>: \strut. (line 12061)
-* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12294)
-* Asymptote package <3>: \write18. (line 16040)
-* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7910)
-* at-sign: \@. (line 11610)
-* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 11206)
-* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 492)
+ (line 14500)
+* array environment: array. (line 3496)
+* array package: array. (line 3564)
+* arrays, math: array. (line 3496)
+* arrow, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 14296)
+* arrow, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 14337)
+* arrows: Arrows. (line 10372)
+* article class: Document classes. (line 907)
+* ascender height: Text symbols. (line 14242)
+* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 14200)
+* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 14203)
+* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 14206)
+* Asymptote package: \line. (line 5063)
+* Asymptote package <1>: \strut. (line 12493)
+* Asymptote package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12726)
+* Asymptote package <3>: \write18. (line 16472)
+* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7804)
+* at-sign: \@. (line 12035)
+* atenddvi package: \AtBeginDvi & \AtEndDvi.
+ (line 8023)
+* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 11598)
+* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 516)
* b5paper option: Document class options.
- (line 746)
-* babel package: \chapter. (line 2842)
-* babel package <1>: thebibliography. (line 6077)
-* babel package <2>: Accents. (line 13920)
-* babel package <3>: \today. (line 14209)
+ (line 953)
+* babel package: \chapter. (line 2720)
+* babel package <1>: thebibliography. (line 5955)
+* babel package <2>: Accents. (line 14357)
+* babel package <3>: \today. (line 14641)
* babel package <4>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14582)
-* babel package <5>: \index. (line 14991)
+ (line 15014)
+* babel package <5>: \index. (line 15423)
* back matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
-* background, colored: Colored pages. (line 12837)
-* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 13772)
-* badness: Page breaking. (line 6794)
-* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 13783)
-* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 13780)
-* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 13950)
-* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 10625)
-* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 13965)
-* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 404)
+ (line 2989)
+* background, colored: Colored pages. (line 14010)
+* backslash, in text: Text symbols. (line 14209)
+* backslash, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 736)
+* badness: Page breaking. (line 6682)
+* bar-over accent: Accents. (line 14387)
+* bar-over accent, math: Math accents. (line 11010)
+* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 14402)
+* bar, double vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 14220)
+* bar, vertical, in text: Text symbols. (line 14217)
+* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 428)
* batchmode: Command line options.
- (line 16174)
-* beamer package: beamer template. (line 16411)
-* beamer template and class: beamer template. (line 16411)
-* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3890)
+ (line 16606)
+* beamer package: beamer template. (line 16843)
+* beamer template and class: beamer template. (line 16843)
+* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3768)
* bibliography format, open: Document class options.
- (line 794)
-* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6208)
-* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6030)
+ (line 1001)
+* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6086)
+* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 5908)
* BibTeX error messages: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6270)
-* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6208)
-* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 13786)
-* big point: Units of length. (line 8450)
+ (line 6148)
+* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6086)
+* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 14223)
+* big point: Units of length. (line 8835)
* bigfoot package: Footnotes of footnotes.
- (line 7213)
+ (line 7106)
* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
- (line 780)
-* blackboard bold: Blackboard bold. (line 10099)
+ (line 987)
+* blackboard bold: Blackboard bold. (line 10484)
* blanks, after control sequences: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7315)
-* bm package: bm. (line 10058)
-* bold font: Font styles. (line 1773)
-* bold math: Font styles. (line 1826)
-* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 3814)
+ (line 7209)
+* bm package: bm. (line 10443)
+* bold font: Font styles. (line 1651)
+* bold math: Font styles. (line 1704)
+* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 3692)
* boldface mathematics: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 10028)
-* book class: Document classes. (line 703)
+ (line 10413)
+* book class: Document classes. (line 907)
* book, back matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
+ (line 2989)
* book, end matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
+ (line 2989)
* book, front matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
+ (line 2989)
* book, main matter: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
-* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 2536)
-* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2537)
-* bounding box: \includegraphics. (line 13270)
-* box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12227)
-* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 7623)
-* box, bounding: \includegraphics. (line 13270)
-* box, colored: Colored boxes. (line 12800)
-* box, save: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12480)
-* box, use saved box: \usebox. (line 12589)
-* boxes: Boxes. (line 12218)
-* bp: Units of length. (line 8449)
-* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 13789)
-* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 13793)
-* braces: Delimiters. (line 10143)
-* brackets: Delimiters. (line 10143)
-* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6496)
-* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6789)
-* breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 11024)
-* breve accent: Accents. (line 14003)
-* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 10628)
+ (line 2989)
+* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 2414)
+* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2415)
+* bounding box: \includegraphics. (line 13446)
+* box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12659)
+* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 7517)
+* box, bounding: \includegraphics. (line 13446)
+* box, colored: Colored boxes. (line 13973)
+* box, save: \sbox & \savebox. (line 12912)
+* box, use saved box: \usebox. (line 13021)
+* boxes: Boxes. (line 12650)
+* bp: Units of length. (line 8834)
+* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 14226)
+* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 14230)
+* braces: Delimiters. (line 10528)
+* braces, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 740)
+* brackets: Delimiters. (line 10528)
+* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6373)
+* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6677)
+* breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 11416)
+* breve accent: Accents. (line 14440)
+* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 11013)
* bug reporting: About this document.
- (line 380)
-* bullet lists: itemize. (line 4295)
-* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 9243)
-* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 13797)
-* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 4295)
-* calligraphic fonts: Calligraphic. (line 10126)
-* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 1776)
-* cap height: Text symbols. (line 13805)
-* caption package: \caption. (line 2628)
-* captions: \caption. (line 2562)
-* caron accent: Accents. (line 14007)
+ (line 404)
+* bullet lists: itemize. (line 4172)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 9628)
+* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 14234)
+* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 4172)
+* calligraphic fonts: Calligraphic. (line 10511)
+* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 1654)
+* cap height: Text symbols. (line 14242)
+* caption package: \caption. (line 2506)
+* captions: \caption. (line 2440)
+* caret character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 755)
+* caron accent: Accents. (line 14444)
* catcode: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 7452)
+ (line 7346)
* category code, character: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 7452)
-* cc: Units of length. (line 8462)
-* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 15470)
-* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 13975)
-* center environment: center. (line 3694)
-* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 13769)
+ (line 7346)
+* cc: Units of length. (line 8847)
+* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 15902)
+* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 14412)
+* center environment: center. (line 3572)
+* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 14206)
* centered equations: Document class options.
- (line 784)
-* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 13872)
-* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 3742)
-* centering text, environment for: center. (line 3694)
-* centimeter: Units of length. (line 8457)
+ (line 991)
+* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 14309)
+* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 3620)
+* centering text, environment for: center. (line 3572)
+* centimeter: Units of length. (line 8842)
* changing case of characters: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13635)
-* chapter: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2777)
-* chapter counter: Counters. (line 8117)
+ (line 14068)
+* chapter: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* chapter <1>: \chapter. (line 2655)
+* chapter counter: Counters. (line 8502)
* character category code: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 7452)
-* character encoding: inputenc package. (line 14123)
+ (line 7346)
+* character encoding: Input encodings. (line 635)
* character, invisible: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
-* character, invisible <1>: \mathstrut. (line 10908)
-* characters, accented: Accents. (line 13920)
+ (line 11237)
+* character, invisible <1>: \mathstrut. (line 11300)
+* characters, accented: Accents. (line 14357)
* characters, case of: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13635)
+ (line 14068)
* characters, non-English: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14057)
-* characters, reserved: Reserved characters.
- (line 13605)
-* characters, special: Reserved characters.
- (line 13605)
-* check accent: Accents. (line 14007)
-* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 10631)
-* cicero: Units of length. (line 8463)
-* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 13786)
-* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 13800)
-* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 13954)
-* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 10643)
-* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 13763)
-* citation key: \bibitem. (line 6094)
+ (line 14494)
+* check accent: Accents. (line 14444)
+* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 11016)
+* cicero: Units of length. (line 8848)
+* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 14223)
+* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 14237)
+* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 14391)
+* circumflex accent, math: Math accents. (line 11028)
+* circumflex, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 14200)
+* citation key: \bibitem. (line 5972)
* class and package commands: Class and package commands.
- (line 918)
-* class and package difference: Class and package construction.
- (line 857)
+ (line 8008)
+* class and package difference: Class and package creation.
+ (line 1070)
* class and package structure: Class and package structure.
- (line 871)
+ (line 1091)
* class file example: Class and package structure.
- (line 904)
+ (line 1116)
* class file layout: Class and package structure.
- (line 871)
+ (line 1091)
+* Class Guide, document: Class and package structure.
+ (line 1130)
* class options: Document class options.
- (line 733)
+ (line 937)
* class options <1>: Class and package structure.
- (line 871)
-* class options <2>: Class and package commands.
- (line 978)
-* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 698)
-* cleveref package: Cross references. (line 3382)
-* cleveref package <1>: \ref. (line 3495)
-* cleveref package <2>: \footnotemark. (line 7094)
+ (line 1091)
+* class options <2>: \DeclareOption. (line 8108)
+* class writing tutorial document: Class and package structure.
+ (line 1130)
+* classes of documents: Document classes. (line 902)
+* cleveref package: Cross references. (line 3260)
+* cleveref package <1>: \ref. (line 3373)
+* cleveref package <2>: \footnotemark. (line 6976)
* CLI: Command line interface.
- (line 16109)
+ (line 16541)
* clock option to slides class: Document class options.
- (line 826)
-* closing letters: \closing. (line 15486)
-* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 13753)
-* cm: Units of length. (line 8456)
-* cm-super package: fontenc package. (line 1330)
-* cmd.exe, used by \write18: \write18. (line 16087)
-* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6366)
+ (line 1033)
+* closing letters: \closing. (line 15918)
+* closing quote: Text symbols. (line 14190)
+* clsguide document: Class and package structure.
+ (line 1130)
+* cm: Units of length. (line 8841)
+* cm-super package: fontenc package. (line 1208)
+* cmd.exe, used by \write18: \write18. (line 16519)
+* code, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6244)
* colon character: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 11004)
-* color: Color. (line 12602)
-* color <1>: Define colors. (line 12707)
-* color <2>: Colored text. (line 12729)
-* color <3>: Colored boxes. (line 12800)
-* color <4>: Colored pages. (line 12837)
-* color models: Color models. (line 12655)
+ (line 11396)
+* color: Color. (line 13775)
+* color <1>: Define colors. (line 13880)
+* color <2>: Colored text. (line 13902)
+* color <3>: Colored boxes. (line 13973)
+* color <4>: Colored pages. (line 14010)
+* color models: Color models. (line 13828)
* color package commands: Commands for color.
- (line 12702)
+ (line 13875)
* color package options: Color package options.
- (line 12617)
-* color, define: Define colors. (line 12707)
-* colored boxes: Colored boxes. (line 12800)
-* colored page: Colored pages. (line 12837)
-* colored text: Colored text. (line 12729)
+ (line 13790)
+* color, define: Define colors. (line 13880)
+* colored boxes: Colored boxes. (line 13973)
+* colored page: Colored pages. (line 14010)
+* colored text: Colored text. (line 13902)
* command line interface: Command line interface.
- (line 16109)
+ (line 16541)
* command syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 597)
+ (line 773)
* commands, class and package: Class and package commands.
- (line 918)
+ (line 8008)
* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7234)
-* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 7411)
-* commands, document class: Class and package construction.
- (line 848)
+ (line 7127)
+* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 7305)
+* commands, document class: Class and package creation.
+ (line 1065)
* commands, graphics package: Commands for graphics.
- (line 13149)
+ (line 13325)
* commands, ignore spaces: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
- (line 7981)
-* commands, ignore spaces <1>: xspace package. (line 8056)
+ (line 7881)
+* commands, ignore spaces <1>: xspace package. (line 7956)
* commands, redefining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7234)
-* commands, run from LaTeX: \write18. (line 16033)
-* commands, star-variants: \@ifstar. (line 7486)
-* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 13805)
-* comprehensive package: Math symbols. (line 9141)
-* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6366)
+ (line 7127)
+* commands, run from LaTeX: \write18. (line 16465)
+* commands, star-variants: \@ifstar. (line 7380)
+* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 14242)
+* comprehensive package: Math symbols. (line 9526)
+* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6244)
* configuration, graphics package: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 12959)
-* contents file: Output files. (line 502)
-* control sequences: Control sequences. (line 7376)
-* control symbol, defined: Control sequences. (line 7387)
-* control word, defined: Control sequences. (line 7383)
-* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 13709)
-* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 8108)
-* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 7558)
-* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 8217)
+ (line 13135)
+* conflict between package options: \PassOptionsToClass & \PassOptionsToPackage.
+ (line 8314)
+* contents file: Output files. (line 526)
+* control sequences: Control sequences. (line 7270)
+* control symbol, defined: Control sequences. (line 7281)
+* control word, defined: Control sequences. (line 7277)
+* copyright symbol: Text symbols. (line 14142)
+* Cork encoding: fontenc package. (line 1229)
+* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 8493)
+* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 7452)
+* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 8602)
* counters, printing: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 8135)
-* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 8250)
-* cprotect package: verbatim. (line 6385)
-* cprotect package <1>: \verb. (line 6448)
-* creating pictures: picture. (line 4924)
-* creating tables: table. (line 5648)
-* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 11220)
-* cross references: Cross references. (line 3350)
-* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 492)
-* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 3448)
-* cross referencing, across documents: xr package. (line 3501)
-* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 3472)
-* CTAN: CTAN. (line 670)
-* curly braces: Delimiters. (line 10143)
-* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 13818)
-* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 13830)
-* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 13815)
-* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 13712)
-* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 13812)
-* DANTE e.V.: CTAN. (line 684)
-* datatool package: \read. (line 15760)
-* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 11214)
-* date, today’s: \today. (line 14202)
-* datetime package: \today. (line 14223)
-* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 2540)
-* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2541)
-* dcolumn package: array. (line 3686)
-* dd: Units of length. (line 8459)
-* declaration form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 1860)
-* declaration form of font style commands: Font styles. (line 1705)
-* define color: Define colors. (line 12707)
+ (line 8520)
+* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 8635)
+* cprotect package: verbatim. (line 6263)
+* cprotect package <1>: \verb. (line 6325)
+* cprotect package <2>: \protect. (line 7868)
+* creating pictures: picture. (line 4802)
+* creating tables: table. (line 5526)
+* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 11612)
+* cross references: Cross references. (line 3228)
+* cross references, resolving: Output files. (line 516)
+* cross referencing with page number: \pageref. (line 3326)
+* cross referencing, across documents: xr package. (line 3379)
+* cross referencing, symbolic: \ref. (line 3350)
+* cross-references, page numbers in: \thepage. (line 11818)
+* CTAN: CTAN. (line 874)
+* curly braces: Delimiters. (line 10528)
+* curly braces, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 740)
+* currency, dollar: Text symbols. (line 14255)
+* currency, euro: Text symbols. (line 14267)
+* dagger, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 14252)
+* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 14145)
+* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 14249)
+* DANTE e.V.: CTAN. (line 888)
+* datatool package: \read. (line 16192)
+* date of format, requiring: \NeedsTeXFormat. (line 8275)
+* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 11606)
+* date, today's: \today. (line 14634)
+* datetime package: \today. (line 14655)
+* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 2418)
+* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2419)
+* dcolumn package: array. (line 3564)
+* dd: Units of length. (line 8844)
+* declaration form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 1738)
+* declaration form of font style commands: Font styles. (line 1583)
+* default option processing: \DeclareOption. (line 8120)
+* define color: Define colors. (line 13880)
* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7234)
-* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 7411)
+ (line 7127)
+* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 7305)
* defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 7651)
-* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 7897)
-* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 7785)
-* definitions: Definitions. (line 7229)
-* delayed \write: \write. (line 15903)
-* delimiters: Delimiters. (line 10143)
-* delimiters, paired: \left & \right. (line 10193)
-* delim_0: makeindex. (line 15159)
-* delim_1: makeindex. (line 15163)
-* delim_2: makeindex. (line 15167)
-* delim_n: makeindex. (line 15171)
-* delim_r: makeindex. (line 15175)
-* description: \newglossaryentry. (line 15318)
-* description environment: description. (line 3784)
-* description lists, creating: description. (line 3784)
-* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7910)
-* didot point: Units of length. (line 8460)
-* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 13939)
-* difference between class and package: Class and package construction.
- (line 857)
-* dimen plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8342)
-* directory listings, from system: \write18. (line 16092)
-* discretionary breaks, multiplication: \*. (line 11024)
-* discretionary hyphenation: \discretionary. (line 6673)
-* display math mode: Modes. (line 11104)
-* display style: Math styles. (line 10942)
+ (line 7545)
+* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 7791)
+* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 7679)
+* definitions: Definitions. (line 7122)
+* delayed \write: \write. (line 16335)
+* delim_0: makeindex. (line 15591)
+* delim_1: makeindex. (line 15595)
+* delim_2: makeindex. (line 15599)
+* delim_n: makeindex. (line 15603)
+* delim_r: makeindex. (line 15607)
+* delimiters: Delimiters. (line 10528)
+* delimiters, paired: \left & \right. (line 10578)
+* description: \newglossaryentry. (line 15750)
+* description environment: description. (line 3662)
+* description lists, creating: description. (line 3662)
+* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 7804)
+* didot point: Units of length. (line 8845)
+* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 14376)
+* difference between class and package: Class and package creation.
+ (line 1070)
+* dimen plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8727)
+* directory listings, from system: \write18. (line 16524)
+* discretionary breaks, multiplication: \*. (line 11416)
+* discretionary hyphenation: \discretionary. (line 6561)
+* display math mode: Modes. (line 11496)
+* display style: Math styles. (line 11334)
* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
- (line 5469)
+ (line 5347)
* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation & quote.
- (line 5469)
-* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 3840)
-* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 9012)
-* document class commands: Class and package construction.
- (line 848)
+ (line 5347)
+* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 3718)
+* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 9397)
+* document class commands: Class and package creation.
+ (line 1065)
* document class options: Document class options.
- (line 733)
+ (line 937)
* document class, defined: Starting and ending.
- (line 444)
-* document classes: Document classes. (line 698)
-* document environment: document. (line 3884)
-* document root name: Jobname. (line 16301)
+ (line 468)
+* document classes: Document classes. (line 902)
+* document environment: document. (line 3762)
+* document root name: Jobname. (line 16733)
* document templates: Document templates.
- (line 16404)
-* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 13818)
-* dot accent: Accents. (line 13946)
-* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 10637)
-* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 13946)
-* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 13979)
-* dotless i: Accents. (line 13933)
-* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 9390)
-* dotless j: Accents. (line 13933)
-* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 9410)
-* dots: Dots. (line 10387)
-* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13727)
-* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 13715)
-* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 13815)
-* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 10634)
-* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 13727)
-* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 13878)
-* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 13750)
-* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 13894)
-* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 13881)
+ (line 16836)
+* documentmetadata-support-doc document: \DocumentMetadata. (line 857)
+* dollar sign: Text symbols. (line 14255)
+* dollar sign character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 748)
+* dot accent: Accents. (line 14383)
+* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 11022)
+* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 14383)
+* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 14416)
+* dotless i: Accents. (line 14370)
+* dotless i, math: Math symbols. (line 9775)
+* dotless j: Accents. (line 14370)
+* dotless j, math: Math symbols. (line 9795)
+* dots: Dots. (line 10772)
+* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 14162)
+* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 14148)
+* double dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 14252)
+* double dot accent, math: Math accents. (line 11019)
+* double guillemets: Text symbols. (line 14162)
+* double left quote: Text symbols. (line 14315)
+* double low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 14187)
+* double quotation marks, as ligatures: Ligatures. (line 680)
+* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 14331)
+* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 14318)
* double spacing: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2318)
-* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 13783)
-* doublestruck: Blackboard bold. (line 10099)
+ (line 2196)
+* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 14220)
+* doublestruck: Blackboard bold. (line 10484)
* draft option: Document class options.
- (line 776)
-* dvilualatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 568)
-* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 469)
-* dvips command: Output files. (line 469)
-* dvitype command: Output files. (line 469)
-* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 13827)
-* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 521)
-* ellipses: Dots. (line 10387)
-* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 13733)
-* ellipsis, in Unicode (U+2026): Dots. (line 10447)
-* ellipsis, traditional (three periods): Dots. (line 10447)
-* em: Units of length. (line 8476)
-* em <1>: Units of length. (line 8475)
-* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 13821)
-* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 13903)
-* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 13909)
-* emphasis: Font styles. (line 1757)
-* enclosure list: \encl. (line 15499)
+ (line 983)
+* dvilualatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 599)
+* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 493)
+* dvips command: Output files. (line 493)
+* dvitype command: Output files. (line 493)
+* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 14264)
+* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 545)
+* e-TeX, and robust commands: \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8173)
+* ellipses: Dots. (line 10772)
+* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 14170)
+* ellipsis, in Unicode (U+2026): Dots. (line 10832)
+* ellipsis, traditional (three periods): Dots. (line 10832)
+* em: Units of length. (line 8860)
+* em <1>: Units of length. (line 8861)
+* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 14258)
+* em-dash, as ligature: Ligatures. (line 680)
+* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 14340)
+* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 14346)
+* emphasis: Font styles. (line 1635)
+* en-dash, as ligature: Ligatures. (line 680)
+* enclosure list: \encl. (line 15931)
* encoding, font: \DeclareFontEncoding.
- (line 1386)
-* encoding, of input files: inputenc package. (line 14123)
+ (line 1264)
+* encodings, input: Input encodings. (line 635)
* end matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
-* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 3906)
+ (line 2989)
+* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 3784)
* ending and starting: Starting and ending.
- (line 433)
-* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6895)
-* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 3922)
-* enumi counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* enumii counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* enumiii counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* enumitem package: itemize. (line 4355)
-* enumitem package <1>: list. (line 4654)
-* enumiv counter: Counters. (line 8117)
+ (line 457)
+* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6783)
+* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 3800)
+* enumi counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* enumii counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* enumiii counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* enumitem package: itemize. (line 4232)
+* enumitem package <1>: list. (line 4532)
+* enumiv counter: Counters. (line 8502)
* environment: Starting and ending.
- (line 452)
-* environment form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 1883)
-* environment, abstract: abstract. (line 3572)
-* environment, array: array. (line 3618)
-* environment, center: center. (line 3694)
-* environment, description: description. (line 3784)
-* environment, displaymath: displaymath. (line 3840)
-* environment, displaymath <1>: Math formulas. (line 9012)
-* environment, document: document. (line 3884)
-* environment, enumerate: enumerate. (line 3922)
-* environment, eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3989)
-* environment, equation: equation. (line 4043)
-* environment, equation <1>: Math formulas. (line 9012)
-* environment, figure: figure. (line 4063)
-* environment, filecontents: filecontents. (line 4121)
-* environment, filecontents*: filecontents. (line 4121)
-* environment, flushleft: flushleft. (line 4186)
-* environment, flushright: flushright. (line 4248)
-* environment, itemize: itemize. (line 4295)
-* environment, letter: letter. (line 4383)
-* environment, list: list. (line 4388)
-* environment, math: math. (line 4754)
-* environment, math <1>: Math formulas. (line 9012)
-* environment, minipage: minipage. (line 4766)
-* environment, picture: picture. (line 4924)
-* environment, quotation: quotation & quote. (line 5469)
-* environment, quote: quotation & quote. (line 5469)
-* environment, sloppypar: sloppypar. (line 6710)
-* environment, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5499)
-* environment, table: table. (line 5648)
-* environment, tabular: tabular. (line 5706)
-* environment, thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6030)
+ (line 476)
+* environment form of font size commands: Font sizes. (line 1761)
+* environment, abstract: abstract. (line 3450)
+* environment, array: array. (line 3496)
+* environment, center: center. (line 3572)
+* environment, description: description. (line 3662)
+* environment, displaymath: displaymath. (line 3718)
+* environment, displaymath <1>: Math formulas. (line 9397)
+* environment, document: document. (line 3762)
+* environment, enumerate: enumerate. (line 3800)
+* environment, eqnarray: eqnarray. (line 3867)
+* environment, equation: equation. (line 3921)
+* environment, equation <1>: Math formulas. (line 9397)
+* environment, figure: figure. (line 3941)
+* environment, filecontents: filecontents. (line 3999)
+* environment, filecontents*: filecontents. (line 3999)
+* environment, flushleft: flushleft. (line 4064)
+* environment, flushright: flushright. (line 4126)
+* environment, itemize: itemize. (line 4172)
+* environment, letter: letter. (line 4261)
+* environment, list: list. (line 4266)
+* environment, math: math. (line 4632)
+* environment, math <1>: Math formulas. (line 9397)
+* environment, minipage: minipage. (line 4644)
+* environment, picture: picture. (line 4802)
+* environment, quotation: quotation & quote. (line 5347)
+* environment, quote: quotation & quote. (line 5347)
+* environment, sloppypar: sloppypar. (line 6598)
+* environment, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5377)
+* environment, table: table. (line 5526)
+* environment, tabular: tabular. (line 5584)
+* environment, thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 5908)
* environment, theindex: Produce the index manually.
- (line 14915)
-* environment, theorem: theorem. (line 6297)
-* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 7785)
-* environment, titlepage: titlepage. (line 6327)
-* environment, verbatim: verbatim. (line 6366)
-* environment, verse: verse. (line 6460)
-* environments: Environments. (line 3555)
+ (line 15347)
+* environment, theorem: theorem. (line 6175)
+* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 7679)
+* environment, titlepage: titlepage. (line 6205)
+* environment, verbatim: verbatim. (line 6244)
+* environment, verse: verse. (line 6337)
+* environments: Environments. (line 3433)
* environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 7651)
-* envlab package: \makelabels. (line 15573)
-* EPS files: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
-* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 3989)
-* equation counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* equation environment: equation. (line 4043)
-* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 9012)
-* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3472)
+ (line 7545)
+* envlab package: \makelabels. (line 16005)
+* EPS files: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
+* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 3867)
+* equation counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* equation environment: equation. (line 3921)
+* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 9397)
+* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3350)
* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options.
- (line 790)
-* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 4022)
-* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 3989)
-* equations, environment for: equation. (line 4043)
+ (line 997)
+* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 3900)
+* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 3867)
+* equations, environment for: equation. (line 3921)
* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options.
- (line 784)
+ (line 991)
* error messages, from BibTeX: BibTeX error messages.
- (line 6270)
+ (line 6148)
* errorstopmode: Command line options.
- (line 16174)
+ (line 16606)
* es-zet German letter: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14103)
-* etex command: TeX engines. (line 521)
+ (line 14540)
+* escaping special characters: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14037)
+* etex command: TeX engines. (line 545)
* eth, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14071)
-* etoolbox package: Class and package commands.
- (line 1022)
-* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 13830)
-* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 13830)
-* eurosym package <1>: Text symbols. (line 13831)
-* ex: Units of length. (line 8472)
-* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 8471)
-* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 13838)
+ (line 14508)
+* etoolbox package: \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8173)
+* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 14267)
+* eurosym package: Text symbols. (line 14267)
+* eurosym package <1>: Text symbols. (line 14268)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 8856)
+* ex <1>: Units of length. (line 8857)
+* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 14275)
+* exclamation points, ending a sentence: \@. (line 12068)
* executivepaper option: Document class options.
- (line 746)
+ (line 953)
* expl3 package: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 626)
+ (line 803)
* expl3 package <1>: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13677)
+ (line 14110)
* exponent: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 9078)
-* expressions: Expressions. (line 8672)
+ (line 9463)
+* expressions: Expressions. (line 9057)
* extended Latin: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14057)
-* external commands: \write18. (line 16033)
-* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 4121)
-* fallback jobname: Jobname. (line 16322)
+ (line 14494)
+* external commands: \write18. (line 16465)
+* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 3999)
+* f-ligatures: Ligatures. (line 680)
+* fallback jobname: Jobname. (line 16754)
* families, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1914)
-* fancyhdr package: Page styles. (line 11163)
-* fancyhdr package <1>: \pagestyle. (line 11306)
-* fancyvrb package: tabbing. (line 5639)
-* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 6401)
-* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 13869)
-* figure counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* figure dash character: Text symbols. (line 13841)
-* figure environment: figure. (line 4063)
-* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3472)
-* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 4867)
-* figures, inserting: figure. (line 4063)
+ (line 1792)
+* fancyhdr package: Page styles. (line 11555)
+* fancyhdr package <1>: \pagestyle. (line 11706)
+* fancyvrb package: tabbing. (line 5517)
+* fancyvrb package <1>: verbatim. (line 6279)
+* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 14306)
+* figure counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* figure dash character: Text symbols. (line 14278)
+* figure environment: figure. (line 3941)
+* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3350)
+* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 4745)
+* figures, inserting: figure. (line 3941)
* file, closing: \openin & \openout.
- (line 15671)
+ (line 16103)
* file, opening: \openin & \openout.
- (line 15671)
-* file, reading: \read. (line 15735)
+ (line 16103)
+* file, reading: \read. (line 16167)
* file, root: Splitting the input.
- (line 14237)
-* file, root <1>: Jobname. (line 16301)
-* filecontents environment: filecontents. (line 4121)
-* filecontents* environment: filecontents. (line 4121)
+ (line 14669)
+* file, root <1>: Jobname. (line 16733)
+* filecontents environment: filecontents. (line 3999)
+* filecontents* environment: filecontents. (line 3999)
* filename for current job: Command line options.
- (line 16190)
+ (line 16622)
* final option: Document class options.
- (line 776)
+ (line 983)
* first-latex-doc document: About this document.
- (line 392)
-* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 1794)
-* flafter package: Floats. (line 2488)
+ (line 417)
+* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 1672)
+* flafter package: Floats. (line 2366)
* fleqn option: Document class options.
- (line 776)
-* float package: Floats. (line 2458)
-* float page: Floats. (line 2464)
+ (line 983)
+* float package: Floats. (line 2336)
+* float page: Floats. (line 2342)
* flush left equations: Document class options.
- (line 784)
+ (line 991)
* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 6820)
-* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 4186)
-* flushright environment: flushright. (line 4248)
+ (line 6708)
+* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 4064)
+* flushright environment: flushright. (line 4126)
* font catalogue: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1914)
+ (line 1792)
* font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1899)
-* font dimension, slant: \/. (line 11869)
-* font encoding: fontenc package. (line 1300)
+ (line 1777)
+* font dimension, slant: \/. (line 12301)
+* font encoding: fontenc package. (line 1178)
* font encoding <1>: \DeclareTextAccent.
- (line 1420)
+ (line 1298)
* font encoding, declaring: \DeclareFontEncoding.
- (line 1386)
+ (line 1264)
* font size: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1994)
-* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 1842)
-* font styles: Font styles. (line 1703)
+ (line 1872)
+* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 1720)
+* font styles: Font styles. (line 1581)
* font symbols, by number: Symbols by font position.
- (line 13688)
-* fontenc: fontenc package. (line 1300)
-* fonts: Fonts. (line 1263)
-* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 7897)
-* fonts, script: Calligraphic. (line 10126)
-* fontspec package: fontenc package. (line 1311)
+ (line 14121)
+* fontenc: fontenc package. (line 1178)
+* fonts: Fonts. (line 1141)
+* fonts, new commands for: \newfont. (line 7791)
+* fonts, script: Calligraphic. (line 10511)
+* fontspec package: fontenc package. (line 1189)
* fontspec package <1>: OpenType bold math.
- (line 10073)
-* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 11299)
+ (line 10458)
+* footer style: \pagestyle. (line 11699)
* footer, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2185)
-* footnote counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3472)
-* footnote parameters: \footnote. (line 7014)
+ (line 2063)
+* footnote counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* footnote number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3350)
+* footnote parameters: \footnote. (line 6902)
* footnote, in a table: Footnotes in a table.
- (line 7143)
+ (line 7036)
* footnote, in section headings: Footnotes in section headings.
- (line 7124)
+ (line 7017)
* footnote, of a footnote: Footnotes of footnotes.
- (line 7213)
-* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 4867)
-* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6967)
-* footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 7042)
-* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 7004)
-* force option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4146)
-* format files, TeX: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 4043)
-* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 9012)
-* forward reference: Cross references. (line 3371)
-* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 492)
-* fraction: \frac. (line 11040)
-* fragile commands: \protect. (line 7929)
-* frame rule width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12348)
-* frame, line width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12348)
-* frame, separation from contents: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12353)
-* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13727)
+ (line 7106)
+* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 4745)
+* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6854)
+* footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 6934)
+* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 6892)
+* force option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4024)
+* format files, TeX: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* format, requiring: \NeedsTeXFormat. (line 8275)
+* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 3921)
+* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 9397)
+* forward reference: Cross references. (line 3249)
+* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 516)
+* fraction: \frac. (line 11432)
+* fragile commands: \protect. (line 7823)
+* frame rule width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12780)
+* frame, line width: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12780)
+* frame, separation from contents: \fbox & \framebox. (line 12785)
+* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 14162)
* front matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
-* functions, math: Math functions. (line 10501)
+ (line 2989)
+* functions, math: Math functions. (line 10886)
* geometry package: Document class options.
- (line 767)
-* geometry package <1>: Document class options.
- (line 771)
+ (line 974)
* global options: Document class options.
- (line 733)
-* global options <1>: Additional packages.
- (line 841)
-* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 15230)
-* glossary: Glossaries. (line 15230)
-* glossary, entries: \newglossaryentry. (line 15278)
-* glossary, entry reference: \gls. (line 15337)
-* glue plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8342)
-* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 7599)
-* graphics: Graphics. (line 12858)
+ (line 937)
+* global options <1>: \usepackage. (line 1058)
+* global options <2>: \ProcessOptions. (line 8360)
+* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 15662)
+* glossary: Glossaries. (line 15662)
+* glossary, entries: \newglossaryentry. (line 15710)
+* glossary, entry reference: \gls. (line 15769)
+* glue plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8727)
+* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 7493)
+* graphics: Graphics. (line 13034)
* graphics <1>: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 12959)
-* graphics <2>: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
-* graphics package: Graphics. (line 12858)
+ (line 13135)
+* graphics <2>: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
+* graphics package: Graphics. (line 13034)
* graphics package <1>: Graphics package configuration.
- (line 12959)
-* graphics package <2>: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
+ (line 13135)
+* graphics package <2>: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
* graphics package commands: Commands for graphics.
- (line 13149)
+ (line 13325)
* graphics package options: Graphics package options.
- (line 12895)
-* graphics packages: \line. (line 5185)
-* graphics, resizing: \scalebox. (line 13538)
-* graphics, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13570)
-* graphics, scaling: \scalebox. (line 13538)
-* graphics, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13570)
-* graphpap package: \graphpaper. (line 5137)
-* grave accent: Accents. (line 13958)
-* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 10640)
-* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 13848)
-* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 9141)
-* Greek letters: Greek letters. (line 10458)
+ (line 13071)
+* graphics packages: \line. (line 5063)
+* graphics, resizing: \scalebox. (line 13714)
+* graphics, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13746)
+* graphics, scaling: \scalebox. (line 13714)
+* graphics, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13746)
+* graphpap package: \graphpaper. (line 5015)
+* grave accent: Accents. (line 14395)
+* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 11025)
+* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 14285)
+* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 9526)
+* Greek letters: Greek letters. (line 10843)
* grfext package: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
- (line 13067)
-* group, and environments: Environments. (line 3567)
-* group_skip: makeindex. (line 15108)
-* hacek accent: Accents. (line 14007)
-* Halmos symbol: \rule. (line 14174)
-* hard space: ~. (line 11741)
-* hat accent: Accents. (line 13954)
-* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 10643)
-* header style: \pagestyle. (line 11299)
+ (line 13243)
+* group_skip: makeindex. (line 15540)
+* group, and environments: Environments. (line 3445)
+* guillemots, birds: Text symbols. (line 14162)
+* hacek accent: Accents. (line 14444)
+* háček accent, math: Math accents. (line 11016)
+* Halmos symbol: \rule. (line 14606)
+* hard space: ~. (line 12171)
+* hash character (#), meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 761)
+* hat accent: Accents. (line 14391)
+* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 11028)
+* hat character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 755)
+* header style: \pagestyle. (line 11699)
* header, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2185)
+ (line 2063)
* hello, world: Starting and ending.
- (line 433)
-* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 2458)
+ (line 457)
+* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 2336)
+* hilatex: TeX engines. (line 584)
+* HINT format: TeX engines. (line 585)
+* HiTeX: TeX engines. (line 585)
* home page for manual: About this document.
- (line 362)
-* horizontal bar character: Text symbols. (line 13851)
+ (line 386)
+* horizontal bar character: Text symbols. (line 14288)
* horizontal paragraph indentation: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 8930)
-* horizontal space: \hss. (line 11526)
-* horizontal space, stretchable: \hss. (line 11526)
+ (line 9315)
+* horizontal space: \hss. (line 11950)
+* horizontal space, stretchable: \hss. (line 11950)
* horizontal spacing: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
-* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 13983)
-* hyperref package: \footnotemark. (line 7094)
-* hyperref package <1>: \footnotemark. (line 7103)
-* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 11281)
-* hyperref package <3>: \contentsline. (line 14791)
+ (line 11237)
+* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 14420)
+* hyperref package: \footnotemark. (line 6976)
+* hyperref package <1>: \footnotemark. (line 6985)
+* hyperref package <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 11669)
+* hyperref package <3>: \contentsline. (line 15223)
* hyperref package <4>: Command line input.
- (line 16245)
-* hyphen character, non-breaking: Text symbols. (line 13862)
-* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6738)
-* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 6673)
-* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6639)
-* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12227)
-* háček accent, math: Math accents. (line 10631)
+ (line 16677)
+* hyphen character, non-breaking: Text symbols. (line 14299)
+* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6626)
+* hyphenation, discretionary: \discretionary. (line 6561)
+* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6516)
+* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12659)
* Icelandic eth: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14071)
+ (line 14508)
* Icelandic thorn: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14107)
-* idx file: \index. (line 15041)
+ (line 14544)
+* idx file: \index. (line 15473)
* ij letter, Dutch: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14083)
-* immediate \write: \write. (line 15898)
-* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* importing graphics: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
-* in: Units of length. (line 8446)
-* inch: Units of length. (line 8447)
-* including graphics: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
+ (line 14520)
+* immediate \write: \write. (line 16330)
+* implementations of TeX: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* importing graphics: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
+* in: Units of length. (line 8831)
+* inch: Units of length. (line 8832)
+* including graphics: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
+* indent_length: makeindex. (line 15619)
+* indent_space: makeindex. (line 15615)
* indent, forcing: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 8881)
-* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 4863)
-* indentfirst package: \part. (line 2767)
-* indentfirst package <1>: \chapter. (line 2829)
-* indentfirst package <2>: \section. (line 2924)
-* indentfirst package <3>: \subsection. (line 2990)
+ (line 9266)
+* indentation of paragraphs, in minipage: minipage. (line 4741)
+* indentfirst package: \part. (line 2645)
+* indentfirst package <1>: \chapter. (line 2707)
+* indentfirst package <2>: \section. (line 2802)
+* indentfirst package <3>: \subsection. (line 2868)
* indentfirst package <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3065)
+ (line 2943)
* indentfirst package <5>: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 8923)
-* indent_length: makeindex. (line 15187)
-* indent_space: makeindex. (line 15183)
-* index entries, subentries: \index. (line 14959)
-* index entries, ‘see’ and ‘see also’: \index. (line 14991)
-* index entry: \index. (line 14939)
-* index package: \index. (line 15036)
-* index, multiple: Indexes. (line 14902)
-* index, page range: \index. (line 14975)
-* index, printing: \printindex. (line 15215)
-* index, processing: makeindex. (line 15056)
+ (line 9308)
+* index entries, 'see' and 'see also': \index. (line 15423)
+* index entries, subentries: \index. (line 15391)
+* index entry: \index. (line 15371)
+* index package: \index. (line 15468)
+* index, multiple: Indexes. (line 15334)
+* index, page range: \index. (line 15407)
+* index, printing: \printindex. (line 15647)
+* index, processing: makeindex. (line 15488)
* index, producing manually: Produce the index manually.
- (line 14912)
-* index, style file: makeindex. (line 15068)
-* indexes: Indexes. (line 14857)
-* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 11493)
-* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 12141)
-* inline formulas: math. (line 4754)
-* inner paragraph mode: Modes. (line 11124)
+ (line 15344)
+* index, style file: makeindex. (line 15500)
+* indexes: Indexes. (line 15289)
+* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 11917)
+* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 12573)
+* inline formulas: math. (line 4632)
+* inner paragraph mode: Modes. (line 11516)
+* input encodings: Input encodings. (line 635)
* input file: Splitting the input.
- (line 14233)
+ (line 14665)
* input, on command line: Command line input.
- (line 16237)
-* input/output: Input/output. (line 15662)
-* input/output, to terminal: Input/output. (line 15662)
-* inputenc: inputenc package. (line 14114)
-* inserting figures: figure. (line 4063)
+ (line 16669)
+* input/output: Input/output. (line 16094)
+* input/output, to terminal: Input/output. (line 16094)
+* inputenc: inputenc package. (line 14551)
+* inserting figures: figure. (line 3941)
* insertions of special characters: Special insertions.
- (line 13599)
+ (line 14031)
* interface, command line: Command line interface.
- (line 16109)
+ (line 16541)
* interline space: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2318)
-* internal vertical mode: Modes. (line 11114)
+ (line 2196)
+* internal vertical mode: Modes. (line 11506)
+* inverted exclamation mark, as ligature: Ligatures. (line 680)
+* inverted question mark, as ligature: Ligatures. (line 680)
* invisible character: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
-* invisible character <1>: \mathstrut. (line 10908)
-* italic correction: \/. (line 11835)
-* italic font: Font styles. (line 1779)
-* itemize environment: itemize. (line 4295)
-* item_0: makeindex. (line 15132)
-* item_01: makeindex. (line 15141)
-* item_1: makeindex. (line 15135)
-* item_12: makeindex. (line 15150)
-* item_2: makeindex. (line 15138)
-* item_x1: makeindex. (line 15145)
-* item_x2: makeindex. (line 15154)
+ (line 11237)
+* invisible character <1>: \mathstrut. (line 11300)
+* italic correction: \/. (line 12267)
+* italic font: Font styles. (line 1657)
+* item_0: makeindex. (line 15564)
+* item_01: makeindex. (line 15573)
+* item_1: makeindex. (line 15567)
+* item_12: makeindex. (line 15582)
+* item_2: makeindex. (line 15570)
+* item_x1: makeindex. (line 15577)
+* item_x2: makeindex. (line 15586)
+* itemize environment: itemize. (line 4172)
* jobname: Command line options.
- (line 16190)
-* jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 16301)
-* JPEG files: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
-* JPG files: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
-* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 4268)
-* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 4215)
-* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 404)
-* label: Cross references. (line 3350)
-* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 3784)
-* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 425)
-* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 404)
+ (line 16622)
+* jobname <1>: Jobname. (line 16733)
+* JPEG files: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
+* JPG files: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
+* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 4146)
+* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 4093)
+* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 428)
+* label: Cross references. (line 3228)
+* labelled lists, creating: description. (line 3662)
+* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 449)
+* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 428)
* landscape option: Document class options.
- (line 776)
+ (line 983)
* landscape orientation: Document class options.
- (line 787)
-* latex: TeX engines. (line 519)
-* latex command: Output files. (line 469)
-* LaTeX format (.fmt) files: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 13718)
-* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 404)
+ (line 994)
+* latex: TeX engines. (line 543)
+* latex command: Output files. (line 493)
+* LaTeX format (.fmt) files: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 14151)
+* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 428)
* LaTeX Project team: About this document.
- (line 376)
+ (line 400)
* LaTeX vs. LaTeX2e: About this document.
- (line 372)
-* latex-dev: TeX engines. (line 569)
+ (line 396)
+* latex-dev: TeX engines. (line 600)
* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document.
- (line 389)
-* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 13721)
+ (line 414)
+* latex-lab package: \DocumentMetadata. (line 857)
+* LaTeX2e logo: Text symbols. (line 14154)
* LaTeX3 syntax: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 626)
+ (line 803)
* <latexrefman@tug.org> email address: About this document.
- (line 376)
-* latexsym package: Arrows. (line 9987)
+ (line 400)
+* latexsym package: Arrows. (line 10372)
* Latin letters, additional: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14057)
-* layout commands: Layout. (line 2028)
+ (line 14494)
+* layout commands: Layout. (line 1906)
* layout, page parameters for: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2185)
-* leaders, dots in table of contents: \@dottedtocline. (line 14609)
+ (line 2063)
+* leaders, dots in table of contents: \@dottedtocline. (line 15041)
* leading: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2318)
-* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13727)
-* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 13859)
-* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 13789)
-* left quote: Text symbols. (line 13738)
-* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 13878)
-* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 13884)
+ (line 2196)
+* left angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 14162)
+* left arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 14296)
+* left brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 14226)
+* left brace, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 740)
+* left quote: Text symbols. (line 14175)
+* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 14315)
+* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 14321)
* left-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 790)
-* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 4215)
-* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 4186)
-* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 11091)
+ (line 997)
+* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 4093)
+* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 4064)
+* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 11483)
* legalpaper option: Document class options.
- (line 746)
-* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 8526)
-* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 7599)
-* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 8339)
-* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 8497)
+ (line 953)
+* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 8911)
+* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 7493)
+* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 8724)
+* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 8882)
* leqno option: Document class options.
- (line 776)
-* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 13856)
-* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 15115)
-* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 15124)
-* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 15128)
-* letter class: Document classes. (line 703)
-* letter environment: letter. (line 4383)
+ (line 983)
+* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 14293)
+* lethead_flag: makeindex. (line 15547)
+* lethead_prefix: makeindex. (line 15556)
+* lethead_suffix: makeindex. (line 15560)
+* letter class: Document classes. (line 907)
+* letter environment: letter. (line 4261)
* letterpaper option: Document class options.
- (line 746)
-* letters, accented: Accents. (line 13920)
+ (line 953)
+* letters, accented: Accents. (line 14357)
* letters, additional Latin: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14057)
-* letters, ending: \closing. (line 15486)
-* letters, starting: \opening. (line 15591)
-* letters, writing: Letters. (line 15367)
-* line break, forcing: \\. (line 6513)
-* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 6496)
-* line breaks, changing: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6696)
+ (line 14494)
+* letters, ending: \closing. (line 15918)
+* letters, starting: \opening. (line 16023)
+* letters, writing: Letters. (line 15799)
+* ligatures: Ligatures. (line 664)
+* line break, forcing: \\. (line 6390)
+* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 6373)
+* line breaks, changing: \fussy & \sloppy. (line 6584)
* line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 6757)
-* line breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 11024)
+ (line 6645)
+* line breaks, multiplication discretionary: \*. (line 11416)
* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
- (line 6757)
-* lines in tables: tabular. (line 5706)
-* line_max: makeindex. (line 15179)
-* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 1830)
-* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 5706)
-* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 5499)
-* list environment: list. (line 4388)
-* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 8191)
-* list of figures file: Output files. (line 502)
-* list of tables file: Output files. (line 502)
-* listings package: tabbing. (line 5639)
-* listings package <1>: verbatim. (line 6395)
-* listings package <2>: \verb. (line 6445)
-* lists of items: itemize. (line 4295)
-* lists of items, generic: list. (line 4388)
-* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 3922)
-* lmodern package: fontenc package. (line 1330)
-* loading additional packages: Additional packages.
- (line 832)
-* locale information, from system: \write18. (line 16092)
-* log file: Output files. (line 487)
-* log file, writing to: \write. (line 15868)
-* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 13718)
-* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 13721)
-* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 13760)
-* long command: Class and package commands.
- (line 935)
-* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 13750)
+ (line 6645)
+* line_max: makeindex. (line 15611)
+* lines in tables: tabular. (line 5584)
+* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 1708)
+* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 5584)
+* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 5377)
+* list environment: list. (line 4266)
+* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 8576)
+* list of figures file: Output files. (line 526)
+* list of tables file: Output files. (line 526)
+* listings package: tabbing. (line 5517)
+* listings package <1>: verbatim. (line 6273)
+* lists of items: itemize. (line 4172)
+* lists of items, generic: list. (line 4266)
+* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 3800)
+* lmodern package: fontenc package. (line 1208)
+* loading additional packages: \usepackage. (line 1039)
+* local options: \ProcessOptions. (line 8360)
+* locale information, from system: \write18. (line 16524)
+* log file: Output files. (line 511)
+* log file, writing to: \write. (line 16300)
+* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 14151)
+* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 14154)
+* logo, TeX: Text symbols. (line 14197)
+* long command: \CheckCommand. (line 8046)
+* low-9 quotation marks, single and double: Text symbols. (line 14187)
* low-level font commands: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1899)
+ (line 1777)
* lowercase: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13635)
-* LR box: picture. (line 5011)
-* LR mode: Modes. (line 11091)
-* lrbox: lrbox. (line 12560)
+ (line 14068)
+* LR box: picture. (line 4889)
+* LR mode: Modes. (line 11483)
+* lrbox: lrbox. (line 12992)
* lshort document: About this document.
- (line 395)
-* lualatex: TeX engines. (line 537)
-* lualatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 570)
-* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 538)
-* LuaTeX, 256 output streams in: \write. (line 15880)
-* m-width: Units of length. (line 8476)
-* macron accent: Accents. (line 13950)
-* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 10625)
+ (line 420)
+* luainputenc package: inputenc package. (line 14581)
+* lualatex: TeX engines. (line 562)
+* lualatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 601)
+* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 563)
+* LuaTeX, 256 output streams in: \write. (line 16312)
+* m-width: Units of length. (line 8861)
+* macron accent: Accents. (line 14387)
+* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 11010)
* macros2e package: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 7472)
-* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 3989)
-* mail merges: \read. (line 15760)
+ (line 7366)
+* Madsen, Lars: eqnarray. (line 3867)
+* mail merges: \read. (line 16192)
* main matter of a book: \frontmatter & \mainmatter & \backmatter.
- (line 3111)
-* make a box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12227)
-* makeidx package: \printindex. (line 15221)
-* makeindex program: makeindex. (line 15056)
-* makeindex, program: makeindex. (line 15056)
-* makeindex, style file: makeindex. (line 15068)
-* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6327)
-* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 8767)
-* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 8962)
-* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 13869)
-* matching brackets: \left & \right. (line 10193)
-* matching parentheses: \left & \right. (line 10193)
-* math accents: Math accents. (line 10617)
-* math environment: math. (line 4754)
-* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 9012)
-* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 9012)
-* math functions: Math functions. (line 10501)
-* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 10998)
-* math mode: Modes. (line 11101)
-* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 9012)
+ (line 2989)
+* make a box: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12659)
+* makeidx package: \printindex. (line 15653)
+* makeindex program: makeindex. (line 15488)
+* makeindex, program: makeindex. (line 15488)
+* makeindex, style file: makeindex. (line 15500)
+* making a title page: titlepage. (line 6205)
+* making paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 9152)
+* marginal notes: Marginal notes. (line 9347)
+* masculine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 14306)
+* matching brackets: \left & \right. (line 10578)
+* matching parentheses: \left & \right. (line 10578)
+* math accents: Math accents. (line 11002)
+* math environment: math. (line 4632)
+* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 9397)
+* math formulas: Math formulas. (line 9397)
+* math functions: Math functions. (line 10886)
+* math miscellany: Math miscellany. (line 11390)
+* math mode: Modes. (line 11493)
+* math mode, entering: Math formulas. (line 9397)
* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10710)
+ (line 11102)
* math mode, spacing <1>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
-* math mode, spacing <2>: \mathstrut. (line 10908)
-* math mode, vertical space: \smash. (line 10785)
-* math styles: Math styles. (line 10930)
-* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 9141)
-* math, arrows: Arrows. (line 9987)
-* math, bold: Font styles. (line 1826)
+ (line 11237)
+* math mode, spacing <2>: \mathstrut. (line 11300)
+* math mode, vertical space: \smash. (line 11177)
+* math styles: Math styles. (line 11322)
+* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 9526)
+* math, arrows: Arrows. (line 10372)
+* math, bold: Font styles. (line 1704)
* mathematics, boldface: \boldmath & \unboldmath.
- (line 10028)
-* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 9067)
-* mathtools package <1>: Delimiters. (line 10178)
-* mathtools package <2>: \left & \right. (line 10217)
-* mathtools package <3>: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10704)
-* mathtools package <4>: \smash. (line 10839)
+ (line 10413)
+* mathtools package: Math formulas. (line 9452)
+* mathtools package <1>: Delimiters. (line 10563)
+* mathtools package <2>: \left & \right. (line 10602)
+* mathtools package <3>: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11096)
+* mathtools package <4>: \smash. (line 11231)
* mathtools package <5>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10887)
-* MetaPost package: \line. (line 5185)
+ (line 11279)
+* meaning of special characters: Special characters.
+ (line 731)
+* metadata, adding: \DocumentMetadata. (line 847)
+* MetaPost package: \line. (line 5063)
* mfirstuc package: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13674)
+ (line 14107)
* mhchem package: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 9134)
-* millimeter: Units of length. (line 8454)
-* minipage environment: minipage. (line 4766)
-* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 4766)
-* minted package: tabbing. (line 5639)
-* minted package <1>: verbatim. (line 6395)
-* minted package <2>: \verb. (line 6445)
-* mirrors of CTAN: CTAN. (line 689)
-* mm: Units of length. (line 8453)
-* modes: Modes. (line 11079)
-* monospace font: Font styles. (line 1794)
-* moving arguments: \protect. (line 7942)
-* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 7042)
-* mpfootnote counter <1>: Counters. (line 8117)
-* mu: Units of length. (line 8482)
-* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 8483)
-* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 2045)
-* multilingual support: Accents. (line 13920)
-* multind package: Indexes. (line 14902)
-* multiple indexes: Indexes. (line 14902)
-* multiplication, discretionary: \*. (line 11024)
-* name: \newglossaryentry. (line 15315)
-* name of document root: Jobname. (line 16301)
-* NBSP: ~. (line 11741)
+ (line 9519)
+* millimeter: Units of length. (line 8839)
+* minipage environment: minipage. (line 4644)
+* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 4644)
+* minted package: tabbing. (line 5517)
+* minted package <1>: verbatim. (line 6273)
+* mirrors of CTAN: CTAN. (line 893)
+* mm: Units of length. (line 8838)
+* mobile output: TeX engines. (line 585)
+* modes: Modes. (line 11471)
+* monospace font: Font styles. (line 1672)
+* moving arguments: \protect. (line 7833)
+* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 6934)
+* mpfootnote counter <1>: Counters. (line 8502)
+* mu: Units of length. (line 8867)
+* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 8868)
+* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 1923)
+* multilingual support: Accents. (line 14357)
+* multind package: Indexes. (line 15334)
+* multiple indexes: Indexes. (line 15334)
+* multiplication, discretionary: \*. (line 11416)
+* name: \newglossaryentry. (line 15747)
+* name of document root: Jobname. (line 16733)
+* NBSP: ~. (line 12171)
* nested \include, not allowed: \include & \includeonly.
- (line 14408)
-* new class commands: Class and package construction.
- (line 848)
-* new command, checking: Class and package commands.
- (line 933)
-* new command, definition: Class and package commands.
- (line 1008)
+ (line 14840)
+* new class commands: Class and package creation.
+ (line 1065)
+* new command, checking definition of: \CheckCommand. (line 8046)
+* new command, definition: \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8147)
* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7234)
-* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 7411)
+ (line 7127)
+* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 7305)
* new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr.
- (line 6575)
-* new line, starting: \\. (line 6513)
-* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6615)
-* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6862)
-* newline, in \write: \write. (line 15932)
-* noheader option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4149)
-* non-breaking hyphen character: Text symbols. (line 13862)
+ (line 6452)
+* new line, starting: \\. (line 6390)
+* new line, starting (paragraph mode): \newline. (line 6492)
+* new page, starting: \newpage. (line 6750)
+* newline, in \write: \write. (line 16364)
+* no-break space, Unicode U+00A0: ~. (line 12175)
+* noheader option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4027)
+* non-breaking hyphen character: Text symbols. (line 14299)
* non-English characters: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14057)
+ (line 14494)
+* non-sentence-ending punctuation: \@. (line 12035)
* nonstopmode: Command line options.
- (line 16174)
-* nosearch option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4152)
-* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 8962)
+ (line 16606)
+* nosearch option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4030)
+* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 9347)
* notitlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 776)
-* null delimiter: \left & \right. (line 10193)
-* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 8191)
-* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 1830)
-* oblique font: Font styles. (line 1791)
+ (line 983)
+* null delimiter: \left & \right. (line 10578)
+* number sign character (#), meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 761)
+* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 8576)
+* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 1708)
+* oblique font: Font styles. (line 1669)
* oe ligature: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14099)
-* ogonek: Accents. (line 13987)
-* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 1830)
-* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 2033)
+ (line 14536)
+* ogonek: Accents. (line 14424)
+* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 1708)
+* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 1911)
* onecolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 805)
+ (line 1012)
* oneside option: Document class options.
- (line 805)
+ (line 1012)
* open a file: \openin & \openout.
- (line 15671)
+ (line 16103)
* openany option: Document class options.
- (line 805)
+ (line 1012)
* openbib option: Document class options.
- (line 776)
-* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 13738)
+ (line 983)
+* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 14175)
* openright option: Document class options.
- (line 805)
-* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* operating system information: \write18. (line 16092)
+ (line 1012)
+* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* operating system information: \write18. (line 16524)
+* option clash: \PassOptionsToClass & \PassOptionsToPackage.
+ (line 8314)
+* option processing by default: \DeclareOption. (line 8120)
+* option, currently being processed: \CurrentOption. (line 8101)
* optional arguments, defining and using: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7277)
-* options, class: Class and package commands.
- (line 978)
+ (line 7171)
+* options, class: \DeclareOption. (line 8108)
* options, color package: Color package options.
- (line 12617)
+ (line 13790)
* options, command line: Command line options.
- (line 16153)
+ (line 16585)
* options, document class: Document class options.
- (line 733)
+ (line 937)
* options, document class <1>: Class and package structure.
- (line 871)
-* options, global: Additional packages.
- (line 841)
+ (line 1091)
+* options, global: \usepackage. (line 1058)
+* options, global and local: \ProcessOptions. (line 8360)
* options, graphics package: Graphics package options.
- (line 12895)
+ (line 13071)
+* options, list of unused: \OptionNotUsed. (line 8298)
* options, package: Class and package structure.
- (line 871)
-* options, package <1>: Class and package commands.
- (line 978)
-* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 13869)
+ (line 1091)
+* options, package <1>: \DeclareOption. (line 8108)
+* options, processing: \ProcessOptions. (line 8351)
+* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 14306)
* oslash: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14095)
-* OT1: fontenc package. (line 1300)
-* outer paragraph mode: Modes. (line 11124)
+ (line 14532)
+* OT1: fontenc package. (line 1178)
+* OT1 encoding: fontenc package. (line 1222)
+* outer paragraph mode: Modes. (line 11516)
* output directory for all external files: Command line options.
- (line 16195)
-* overbar accent: Accents. (line 13950)
-* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 10637)
-* overlining: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10666)
-* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 404)
-* overwrite option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4146)
+ (line 16627)
+* overbar accent: Accents. (line 14387)
+* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 11022)
+* overlining: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11051)
+* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 428)
+* overwrite option for filecontents: filecontents. (line 4024)
+* package and class commands: Class and package commands.
+ (line 8008)
* package file layout: Class and package structure.
- (line 871)
+ (line 1091)
* package options: Class and package structure.
- (line 871)
-* package options <1>: Class and package commands.
- (line 978)
-* package, abstract: abstract. (line 3593)
-* package, adjustbox: Boxes. (line 12221)
-* package, algorithm2e: tabbing. (line 5639)
-* package, amscd: Arrows. (line 10022)
-* package, amsfonts: Math formulas. (line 9067)
-* package, amsfonts <1>: Arrows. (line 9987)
-* package, amsmath: array. (line 3667)
-* package, amsmath <1>: array. (line 3675)
-* package, amsmath <2>: displaymath. (line 3856)
-* package, amsmath <3>: equation. (line 4057)
-* package, amsmath <4>: theorem. (line 6319)
-* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 9067)
-* package, amsmath <6>: \left & \right. (line 10217)
+ (line 1091)
+* package options <1>: \DeclareOption. (line 8108)
+* package, abstract: abstract. (line 3471)
+* package, adjustbox: Boxes. (line 12653)
+* package, algorithm2e: tabbing. (line 5517)
+* package, amscd: Arrows. (line 10407)
+* package, amsfonts: Math formulas. (line 9452)
+* package, amsfonts <1>: Arrows. (line 10372)
+* package, amsmath: array. (line 3545)
+* package, amsmath <1>: array. (line 3553)
+* package, amsmath <2>: displaymath. (line 3734)
+* package, amsmath <3>: equation. (line 3935)
+* package, amsmath <4>: theorem. (line 6197)
+* package, amsmath <5>: Math formulas. (line 9452)
+* package, amsmath <6>: \left & \right. (line 10602)
* package, amsmath <7>: \bigl & \bigr etc..
- (line 10362)
-* package, amsmath <8>: Dots. (line 10419)
-* package, amsmath <9>: Math functions. (line 10606)
+ (line 10747)
+* package, amsmath <8>: Dots. (line 10804)
+* package, amsmath <9>: Math functions. (line 10991)
* package, amsmath <10>: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10727)
+ (line 11119)
* package, amsmath <11>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10895)
+ (line 11287)
* package, amsmath <12>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 11013)
+ (line 11405)
* package, amsmath <13>: Colon character & \colon.
- (line 11017)
+ (line 11409)
* package, amsmath <14>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 11826)
-* package, amsthm: theorem. (line 6319)
-* package, amsthm <1>: \rule. (line 14179)
-* package, answers: \write. (line 15937)
-* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 3101)
-* package, array: array. (line 3686)
-* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 5185)
-* package, Asymptote <1>: \strut. (line 12061)
-* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12294)
-* package, Asymptote <3>: \write18. (line 16040)
-* package, babel: \chapter. (line 2842)
-* package, babel <1>: thebibliography. (line 6077)
-* package, babel <2>: Accents. (line 13920)
-* package, babel <3>: \today. (line 14209)
+ (line 12258)
+* package, amsthm: theorem. (line 6197)
+* package, amsthm <1>: \rule. (line 14611)
+* package, answers: \write. (line 16369)
+* package, appendix: \appendix. (line 2979)
+* package, array: array. (line 3564)
+* package, Asymptote: \line. (line 5063)
+* package, Asymptote <1>: \strut. (line 12493)
+* package, Asymptote <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12726)
+* package, Asymptote <3>: \write18. (line 16472)
+* package, atenddvi: \AtBeginDvi & \AtEndDvi.
+ (line 8023)
+* package, babel: \chapter. (line 2720)
+* package, babel <1>: thebibliography. (line 5955)
+* package, babel <2>: Accents. (line 14357)
+* package, babel <3>: \today. (line 14641)
* package, babel <4>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14582)
-* package, babel <5>: \index. (line 14991)
-* package, beamer: beamer template. (line 16411)
+ (line 15014)
+* package, babel <5>: \index. (line 15423)
+* package, beamer: beamer template. (line 16843)
* package, bigfoot: Footnotes of footnotes.
- (line 7213)
-* package, bm: bm. (line 10058)
-* package, caption: \caption. (line 2628)
-* package, cleveref: Cross references. (line 3382)
-* package, cleveref <1>: \ref. (line 3495)
-* package, cleveref <2>: \footnotemark. (line 7094)
-* package, cm-super: fontenc package. (line 1330)
-* package, comprehensive: Math symbols. (line 9141)
-* package, cprotect: verbatim. (line 6385)
-* package, cprotect <1>: \verb. (line 6448)
-* package, datatool: \read. (line 15760)
-* package, datetime: \today. (line 14223)
-* package, dcolumn: array. (line 3686)
-* package, enumitem: itemize. (line 4355)
-* package, enumitem <1>: list. (line 4654)
-* package, envlab: \makelabels. (line 15573)
-* package, etoolbox: Class and package commands.
- (line 1022)
-* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 13830)
-* package, eurosym <1>: Text symbols. (line 13831)
+ (line 7106)
+* package, bm: bm. (line 10443)
+* package, caption: \caption. (line 2506)
+* package, cleveref: Cross references. (line 3260)
+* package, cleveref <1>: \ref. (line 3373)
+* package, cleveref <2>: \footnotemark. (line 6976)
+* package, cm-super: fontenc package. (line 1208)
+* package, comprehensive: Math symbols. (line 9526)
+* package, cprotect: verbatim. (line 6263)
+* package, cprotect <1>: \verb. (line 6325)
+* package, cprotect <2>: \protect. (line 7868)
+* package, datatool: \read. (line 16192)
+* package, datetime: \today. (line 14655)
+* package, dcolumn: array. (line 3564)
+* package, enumitem: itemize. (line 4232)
+* package, enumitem <1>: list. (line 4532)
+* package, envlab: \makelabels. (line 16005)
+* package, etoolbox: \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8173)
+* package, eurosym: Text symbols. (line 14267)
+* package, eurosym <1>: Text symbols. (line 14268)
* package, expl3: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 626)
+ (line 803)
* package, expl3 <1>: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13677)
-* package, fancyhdr: Page styles. (line 11163)
-* package, fancyhdr <1>: \pagestyle. (line 11306)
-* package, fancyvrb: tabbing. (line 5639)
-* package, fancyvrb <1>: verbatim. (line 6401)
-* package, flafter: Floats. (line 2488)
-* package, float: Floats. (line 2458)
-* package, fontspec: fontenc package. (line 1311)
+ (line 14110)
+* package, fancyhdr: Page styles. (line 11555)
+* package, fancyhdr <1>: \pagestyle. (line 11706)
+* package, fancyvrb: tabbing. (line 5517)
+* package, fancyvrb <1>: verbatim. (line 6279)
+* package, flafter: Floats. (line 2366)
+* package, float: Floats. (line 2336)
+* package, fontspec: fontenc package. (line 1189)
* package, fontspec <1>: OpenType bold math.
- (line 10073)
+ (line 10458)
* package, geometry: Document class options.
- (line 767)
-* package, geometry <1>: Document class options.
- (line 771)
-* package, graphpap: \graphpaper. (line 5137)
+ (line 974)
+* package, graphpap: \graphpaper. (line 5015)
* package, grfext: \DeclareGraphicsExtensions.
- (line 13067)
-* package, hyperref: \footnotemark. (line 7094)
-* package, hyperref <1>: \footnotemark. (line 7103)
-* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 11281)
-* package, hyperref <3>: \contentsline. (line 14791)
+ (line 13243)
+* package, hyperref: \footnotemark. (line 6976)
+* package, hyperref <1>: \footnotemark. (line 6985)
+* package, hyperref <2>: \pagenumbering. (line 11669)
+* package, hyperref <3>: \contentsline. (line 15223)
* package, hyperref <4>: Command line input.
- (line 16245)
-* package, indentfirst: \part. (line 2767)
-* package, indentfirst <1>: \chapter. (line 2829)
-* package, indentfirst <2>: \section. (line 2924)
-* package, indentfirst <3>: \subsection. (line 2990)
+ (line 16677)
+* package, indentfirst: \part. (line 2645)
+* package, indentfirst <1>: \chapter. (line 2707)
+* package, indentfirst <2>: \section. (line 2802)
+* package, indentfirst <3>: \subsection. (line 2868)
* package, indentfirst <4>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3065)
+ (line 2943)
* package, indentfirst <5>: \indent & \noindent.
- (line 8923)
-* package, index: \index. (line 15036)
-* package, latexsym: Arrows. (line 9987)
-* package, listings: tabbing. (line 5639)
-* package, listings <1>: verbatim. (line 6395)
-* package, listings <2>: \verb. (line 6445)
-* package, lmodern: fontenc package. (line 1330)
+ (line 9308)
+* package, index: \index. (line 15468)
+* package, latex-lab: \DocumentMetadata. (line 857)
+* package, latexsym: Arrows. (line 10372)
+* package, listings: tabbing. (line 5517)
+* package, listings <1>: verbatim. (line 6273)
+* package, lmodern: fontenc package. (line 1208)
+* package, luainputenc: inputenc package. (line 14581)
* package, macros2e: \makeatletter & \makeatother.
- (line 7472)
-* package, makeidx: \printindex. (line 15221)
-* package, mathtools: Math formulas. (line 9067)
-* package, mathtools <1>: Delimiters. (line 10178)
-* package, mathtools <2>: \left & \right. (line 10217)
-* package, mathtools <3>: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10704)
-* package, mathtools <4>: \smash. (line 10839)
+ (line 7366)
+* package, makeidx: \printindex. (line 15653)
+* package, mathtools: Math formulas. (line 9452)
+* package, mathtools <1>: Delimiters. (line 10563)
+* package, mathtools <2>: \left & \right. (line 10602)
+* package, mathtools <3>: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11096)
+* package, mathtools <4>: \smash. (line 11231)
* package, mathtools <5>: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10887)
-* package, MetaPost: \line. (line 5185)
+ (line 11279)
+* package, MetaPost: \line. (line 5063)
* package, mfirstuc: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13674)
+ (line 14107)
* package, mhchem: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 9134)
-* package, minted: tabbing. (line 5639)
-* package, minted <1>: verbatim. (line 6395)
-* package, minted <2>: \verb. (line 6445)
-* package, multind: Indexes. (line 14902)
-* package, pict2e: \line. (line 5185)
-* package, polyglossia: Accents. (line 13920)
-* package, polyglossia <1>: \today. (line 14209)
+ (line 9519)
+* package, minted: tabbing. (line 5517)
+* package, minted <1>: verbatim. (line 6273)
+* package, multind: Indexes. (line 15334)
+* package, pict2e: \line. (line 5063)
+* package, polyglossia: Accents. (line 14357)
+* package, polyglossia <1>: \today. (line 14641)
* package, polyglossia <2>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14582)
-* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 14991)
-* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 5185)
+ (line 15014)
+* package, polyglossia <3>: \index. (line 15423)
+* package, PSTricks: \line. (line 5063)
* package, setspace: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2392)
-* package, shellesc: \write18. (line 16098)
-* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 14902)
-* package, siunitx: minipage. (line 4897)
-* package, siunitx <1>: ~. (line 11777)
-* package, suffix: \@ifstar. (line 7544)
+ (line 2270)
+* package, shellesc: \write18. (line 16530)
+* package, showidx: Indexes. (line 15334)
+* package, siunitx: minipage. (line 4775)
+* package, siunitx <1>: ~. (line 12209)
+* package, suffix: \@ifstar. (line 7438)
* package, tablefootnote: Footnotes in a table.
- (line 7190)
-* package, texosquery: \write18. (line 16092)
+ (line 7083)
+* package, texosquery: \write18. (line 16524)
* package, textcase: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13671)
-* package, textcomp: Text symbols. (line 13700)
-* package, TikZ: \line. (line 5185)
-* package, TikZ <1>: \strut. (line 12061)
-* package, TikZ <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12294)
-* package, tikz-cd: Arrows. (line 10022)
-* package, titlesec: Sectioning. (line 2690)
-* package, titlesec <1>: \part. (line 2771)
-* package, titlesec <2>: \chapter. (line 2850)
-* package, titlesec <3>: \section. (line 2928)
-* package, titlesec <4>: \subsection. (line 2994)
+ (line 14104)
+* package, textcomp: Text symbols. (line 14133)
+* package, TikZ: \line. (line 5063)
+* package, TikZ <1>: \strut. (line 12493)
+* package, TikZ <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12726)
+* package, tikz-cd: Arrows. (line 10407)
+* package, titlesec: Sectioning. (line 2568)
+* package, titlesec <1>: \part. (line 2649)
+* package, titlesec <2>: \chapter. (line 2728)
+* package, titlesec <3>: \section. (line 2806)
+* package, titlesec <4>: \subsection. (line 2872)
* package, titlesec <5>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3069)
+ (line 2947)
* package, tocbibbind: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14569)
+ (line 15001)
* package, tocloft: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14569)
-* package, tocloft <1>: \contentsline. (line 14788)
-* package, ulem: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10675)
+ (line 15001)
+* package, tocloft <1>: \contentsline. (line 15220)
+* package, ulem: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11062)
* package, unicode-math: OpenType bold math.
- (line 10087)
-* package, unicode-math <1>: Dots. (line 10440)
-* package, unicode-math <2>: Greek letters. (line 10489)
-* package, url: \verb. (line 6442)
-* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 6401)
+ (line 10472)
+* package, unicode-math <1>: Dots. (line 10825)
+* package, unicode-math <2>: Greek letters. (line 10874)
+* package, url: \verb. (line 6322)
+* package, verbatimbox: verbatim. (line 6279)
* package, xparse: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 626)
-* package, xparse <1>: \@ifstar. (line 7544)
-* package, xr: xr package. (line 3501)
-* package, xr-hyper: xr package. (line 3501)
-* package, xspace: xspace package. (line 8056)
-* package, xstring: Jobname. (line 16348)
-* packages, loading additional: Additional packages.
- (line 832)
+ (line 803)
+* package, xparse <1>: \@ifstar. (line 7438)
+* package, xr: xr package. (line 3379)
+* package, xr-hyper: xr package. (line 3379)
+* package, xspace: xspace package. (line 7956)
+* package, xstring: Jobname. (line 16780)
+* packages, loading additional: \usepackage. (line 1039)
* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6920)
+ (line 6808)
* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6920)
-* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 6789)
-* page counter: Counters. (line 8117)
+ (line 6808)
+* page breaking: Page breaking. (line 6677)
+* page counter: Counters. (line 8502)
* page layout parameters: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2185)
-* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 3448)
-* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 11241)
-* page style, this page: \thispagestyle. (line 11384)
-* page styles: Page styles. (line 11157)
-* page, colored: Colored pages. (line 12837)
-* page_precedence: makeindex. (line 15192)
-* paired delimiters: \left & \right. (line 10193)
-* paragraph: Sectioning. (line 2636)
+ (line 2063)
+* page number representation: \thepage. (line 11818)
+* page number, cross referencing: \pageref. (line 3326)
+* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 11633)
+* page style, this page: \thispagestyle. (line 11785)
+* page styles: Page styles. (line 11549)
+* page_precedence: makeindex. (line 15624)
+* page, colored: Colored pages. (line 14010)
+* paired delimiters: \left & \right. (line 10578)
+* paragraph: Sectioning. (line 2514)
* paragraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3012)
-* paragraph counter: Counters. (line 8117)
+ (line 2890)
+* paragraph counter: Counters. (line 8502)
* paragraph indentation: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 8930)
-* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 4863)
-* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation & quote. (line 5469)
+ (line 9315)
+* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 4741)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation & quote. (line 5347)
* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation & quote.
- (line 5469)
-* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 11085)
-* paragraph mode <1>: \parbox. (line 12383)
-* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 13742)
-* paragraph, ending: \par. (line 8828)
-* paragraph, in a box: \parbox. (line 12383)
-* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 8767)
-* parameters, for footnotes: \footnote. (line 7014)
+ (line 5347)
+* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 11477)
+* paragraph mode <1>: \parbox. (line 12815)
+* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 14179)
+* paragraph, ending: \par. (line 9213)
+* paragraph, in a box: \parbox. (line 12815)
+* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 9152)
+* parameters, for footnotes: \footnote. (line 6902)
* parameters, page layout: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2185)
+ (line 2063)
* parameters, substituting: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7309)
+ (line 7203)
* parent directories, cannot write to: \write and security.
- (line 15961)
-* parentheses: Delimiters. (line 10143)
-* part: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* part <1>: \part. (line 2723)
-* part counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* pattern, current tab stops, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5544)
-* pc: Units of length. (line 8443)
-* PDF graphic files: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
-* pdflatex: TeX engines. (line 520)
-* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 479)
-* pdflatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 571)
-* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 479)
-* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 521)
-* period, abbreviation-ending: \@. (line 11610)
-* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 13872)
-* period, sentence-ending: \@. (line 11610)
-* period, spacing after: \@. (line 11610)
-* pica: Units of length. (line 8444)
-* pict2e package: \line. (line 5185)
-* picture environment: picture. (line 4924)
-* pictures, creating: picture. (line 4924)
-* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 13742)
-* placement of floats: Floats. (line 2437)
-* platex: TeX engines. (line 559)
-* platex-dev: TeX engines. (line 572)
-* plural: \newglossaryentry. (line 15323)
-* PNG files: \includegraphics. (line 13155)
-* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6460)
-* point: Units of length. (line 8440)
+ (line 16393)
+* parentheses: Delimiters. (line 10528)
+* parentheses and ends of sentences: \@. (line 12053)
+* part: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* part <1>: \part. (line 2601)
+* part counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* pattern, current tab stops, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5422)
+* pc: Units of length. (line 8828)
+* PDF graphic files: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
+* PDF, tagged: \DocumentMetadata. (line 847)
+* pdflatex: TeX engines. (line 544)
+* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 503)
+* pdflatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 602)
+* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 503)
+* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 545)
+* percent character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 744)
+* period, abbreviation-ending: \@. (line 12035)
+* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 14309)
+* period, sentence-ending: \@. (line 12035)
+* period, spacing after: \@. (line 12035)
+* pica: Units of length. (line 8829)
+* pict2e package: \line. (line 5063)
+* picture environment: picture. (line 4802)
+* pictures, creating: picture. (line 4802)
+* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 14179)
+* placement of floats: Floats. (line 2315)
+* platex: TeX engines. (line 590)
+* platex-dev: TeX engines. (line 603)
+* plural: \newglossaryentry. (line 15755)
+* PNG files: \includegraphics. (line 13331)
+* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6337)
+* point: Units of length. (line 8825)
* polish l: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14087)
-* polyglossia package: Accents. (line 13920)
-* polyglossia package <1>: \today. (line 14209)
+ (line 14524)
+* polyglossia package: Accents. (line 14357)
+* polyglossia package <1>: \today. (line 14641)
* polyglossia package <2>: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14582)
-* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 14991)
+ (line 15014)
+* polyglossia package <3>: \index. (line 15423)
* portrait orientation: Document class options.
- (line 787)
-* position, in picture: picture. (line 4982)
-* postamble: makeindex. (line 15104)
-* PostScript point: Units of length. (line 8450)
-* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 15603)
-* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 13746)
-* preamble: makeindex. (line 15100)
+ (line 994)
+* position, in picture: picture. (line 4860)
+* postamble: makeindex. (line 15536)
+* PostScript point: Units of length. (line 8835)
+* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 16035)
+* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 14183)
+* preamble: makeindex. (line 15532)
* preamble, defined: Starting and ending.
- (line 449)
-* prerelease testing: TeX engines. (line 575)
+ (line 473)
+* prerelease testing: TeX engines. (line 606)
+* printing special characters: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14037)
+* processing options: \ProcessOptions. (line 8351)
* prompt, *: Recovering from errors.
- (line 16383)
-* pronunciation: Overview. (line 425)
-* PSTricks package: \line. (line 5185)
-* pt: Units of length. (line 8439)
+ (line 16815)
+* pronunciation: Overview. (line 449)
+* PSTricks package: \line. (line 5063)
+* pt: Units of length. (line 8824)
+* punctuation, sentence-ending: \@. (line 12035)
* quad: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10773)
-* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 13875)
-* quotation environment: quotation & quote. (line 5469)
-* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 13727)
-* quote environment: quotation & quote. (line 5469)
-* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 13890)
-* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 13894)
+ (line 11165)
+* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 14312)
+* question marks, ending a sentence: \@. (line 12068)
+* quotation environment: quotation & quote. (line 5347)
+* quotation marks, as ligatures: Ligatures. (line 680)
+* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 14162)
+* quote environment: quotation & quote. (line 5347)
+* quote, single straight: Text symbols. (line 14327)
+* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 14331)
* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
- (line 5469)
+ (line 5347)
* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation & quote.
- (line 5469)
-* radical: \sqrt. (line 11052)
-* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 4268)
-* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 4248)
-* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 4215)
-* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 4186)
-* read a file: \read. (line 15735)
+ (line 5347)
+* quotes and ends of sentences: \@. (line 12053)
+* radical: \sqrt. (line 11444)
+* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 4146)
+* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 4126)
+* ragged right text: \raggedright. (line 4093)
+* ragged right text, environment for: flushleft. (line 4064)
+* read a file: \read. (line 16167)
* redefining a command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7234)
+ (line 7127)
* redefining environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 7651)
-* reference, forward: Cross references. (line 3371)
-* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 492)
-* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 13897)
-* relation, text above: \stackrel. (line 11069)
-* release candidates: TeX engines. (line 575)
-* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 8962)
-* report class: Document classes. (line 703)
+ (line 7545)
+* reference, forward: Cross references. (line 3249)
+* references, resolving forward: Output files. (line 516)
+* registered symbol: Text symbols. (line 14334)
+* relation, text above: \stackrel. (line 11461)
+* release candidates: TeX engines. (line 606)
+* remarks in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 9347)
+* report class: Document classes. (line 907)
* reporting bugs: About this document.
- (line 380)
-* reserved characters: Reserved characters.
- (line 13605)
-* resizing: \scalebox. (line 13538)
-* resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13570)
-* restricted shell access: \write18. (line 16080)
-* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13727)
-* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 13900)
-* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 13793)
-* right quote: Text symbols. (line 13753)
-* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 13881)
-* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 13887)
+ (line 404)
+* reserved characters, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 731)
+* reserved characters, printing: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14037)
+* resizing: \scalebox. (line 13714)
+* resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13746)
+* restricted shell access: \write18. (line 16512)
+* right angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 14162)
+* right arrow, in text: Text symbols. (line 14337)
+* right brace, in text: Text symbols. (line 14230)
+* right brace, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 740)
+* right parentheses/quotes, and spacing: \@. (line 12053)
+* right quote: Text symbols. (line 14190)
+* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 14318)
+* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 14324)
* right-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 790)
-* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 4268)
-* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 4248)
-* rigid lengths: Lengths. (line 8342)
-* ring accent: Accents. (line 13991)
-* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 10646)
-* robust commands: \protect. (line 7929)
-* roman font: Font styles. (line 1782)
+ (line 997)
+* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 4146)
+* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 4126)
+* rigid lengths: Lengths. (line 8727)
+* ring accent: Accents. (line 14428)
+* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 11031)
+* robust command, defining: \DeclareRobustCommand.
+ (line 8147)
+* robust commands: \protect. (line 7823)
+* roman font: Font styles. (line 1660)
* root file: Splitting the input.
- (line 14237)
-* root file <1>: Jobname. (line 16301)
-* roots: \sqrt. (line 11052)
-* rotating graphics: \rotatebox. (line 13470)
-* rotating text: \rotatebox. (line 13470)
-* rotation: \rotatebox. (line 13470)
-* row, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5539)
-* rubber lengths: Lengths. (line 8342)
-* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 7599)
+ (line 14669)
+* root file <1>: Jobname. (line 16733)
+* roots: \sqrt. (line 11444)
+* rotating graphics: \rotatebox. (line 13646)
+* rotating text: \rotatebox. (line 13646)
+* rotation: \rotatebox. (line 13646)
+* row, tabbing: tabbing. (line 5417)
+* rubber lengths: Lengths. (line 8727)
+* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 7493)
* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2185)
-* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 11299)
+ (line 2063)
+* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 11699)
* samepage environment: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
- (line 6958)
-* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 1788)
-* scaled point: Units of length. (line 8466)
-* scaling: \scalebox. (line 13538)
-* scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13570)
-* script fonts: Calligraphic. (line 10126)
-* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 1776)
-* script style: Math styles. (line 10947)
-* scriptscript style: Math styles. (line 10950)
+ (line 6846)
+* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 1666)
+* scaled point: Units of length. (line 8851)
+* scaling: \scalebox. (line 13714)
+* scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13746)
+* script fonts: Calligraphic. (line 10511)
+* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 1654)
+* script style: Math styles. (line 11339)
+* scriptscript style: Math styles. (line 11342)
* scrollmode: Command line options.
- (line 16174)
-* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 2700)
-* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2701)
-* section: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* section <1>: \section. (line 2870)
-* section counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3472)
-* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 2701)
-* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 13757)
-* section, redefining: \@startsection. (line 3147)
-* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* sectioning, part: \part. (line 2723)
+ (line 16606)
+* secnumdepth: Sectioning. (line 2578)
+* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2579)
+* section: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* section <1>: \section. (line 2748)
+* section counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 3350)
+* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 2579)
+* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 14194)
+* section, redefining: \@startsection. (line 3025)
+* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* sectioning, part: \part. (line 2601)
* security and \write: \write and security.
- (line 15945)
-* see and see also index entries: \index. (line 14991)
-* self-contained sources: filecontents. (line 4157)
+ (line 16377)
+* see and see also index entries: \index. (line 15423)
+* self-contained sources: filecontents. (line 4035)
+* sentence-ending punctuation: \@. (line 12035)
* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1941)
+ (line 1819)
* setspace package: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2392)
-* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 8250)
-* sh, used by \write18: \write18. (line 16087)
+ (line 2270)
+* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 8635)
+* sh, used by \write18: \write18. (line 16519)
* shapes, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1981)
+ (line 1859)
+* sharp character (#), meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 761)
* sharp S letters: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14103)
-* shell access: \write18. (line 16033)
+ (line 14540)
+* shell access: \write18. (line 16465)
* shell escape: Command line options.
- (line 16208)
-* SHELL, environment variables: \write18. (line 16087)
-* shellesc package: \write18. (line 16098)
-* showidx package: Indexes. (line 14902)
-* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6366)
-* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 13727)
-* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 13727)
-* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 13884)
-* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 13750)
-* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 13890)
-* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 13887)
-* siunitx package: minipage. (line 4897)
-* siunitx package <1>: ~. (line 11777)
-* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 1842)
-* skip plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8342)
-* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 7599)
-* slanted font: Font styles. (line 1791)
-* slides class: Document classes. (line 703)
-* sloppypar environment: sloppypar. (line 6710)
-* sloppypar environment <1>: sloppypar. (line 6710)
+ (line 16640)
+* SHELL, environment variables: \write18. (line 16519)
+* shellesc package: \write18. (line 16530)
+* showidx package: Indexes. (line 15334)
+* simulating typed text: verbatim. (line 6244)
+* single angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 14162)
+* single guillemets: Text symbols. (line 14162)
+* single left quote: Text symbols. (line 14321)
+* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 14187)
+* single quote, straight: Text symbols. (line 14327)
+* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 14324)
+* siunitx package: minipage. (line 4775)
+* siunitx package <1>: ~. (line 12209)
+* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 1720)
+* skip plain TeX: Lengths. (line 8727)
+* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 7493)
+* slanted font: Font styles. (line 1669)
+* slash character, breakable: \slash. (line 6550)
+* slides class: Document classes. (line 907)
+* sloppypar environment: sloppypar. (line 6598)
+* sloppypar environment <1>: sloppypar. (line 6598)
* slot, font: \DeclareTextAccent.
- (line 1427)
-* small caps font: Font styles. (line 1785)
-* sort: \newglossaryentry. (line 15327)
-* source files, making self-contained: filecontents. (line 4157)
-* sp: Units of length. (line 8465)
+ (line 1305)
+* small caps font: Font styles. (line 1663)
+* sort: \newglossaryentry. (line 15759)
+* source files, making self-contained: filecontents. (line 4035)
+* sp: Units of length. (line 8850)
* space between lines: \baselineskip & \baselinestretch.
- (line 2318)
-* space, inserting horizontal: \hss. (line 11526)
-* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 12170)
+ (line 2196)
+* space factor: \spacefactor. (line 11976)
+* space, inserting horizontal: \hss. (line 11950)
+* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 12602)
* space, negative thin: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 11806)
+ (line 12238)
* space, thin: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 11806)
-* space, unbreakable: ~. (line 11741)
-* space, vertical: \vspace. (line 12090)
-* spaces: Spaces. (line 11412)
+ (line 12238)
+* space, unbreakable: ~. (line 12171)
+* space, vertical: \vspace. (line 12522)
+* spaces: Spaces. (line 11836)
* spaces, ignore around commands: \ignorespaces & \ignorespacesafterend.
- (line 7981)
-* spaces, ignore around commands <1>: xspace package. (line 8056)
+ (line 7881)
+* spaces, ignore around commands <1>: xspace package. (line 7956)
* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10710)
+ (line 11102)
* spacing, inter-sentence: \frenchspacing & \nonfrenchspacing.
- (line 11656)
-* spacing, inter-sentence <1>: \normalsfcodes. (line 11677)
+ (line 12084)
+* spacing, inter-sentence <1>: \normalsfcodes. (line 12108)
* spacing, math mode: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
-* spacing, math mode <1>: \mathstrut. (line 10908)
-* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 13869)
-* special characters: Reserved characters.
- (line 13605)
-* special characters <1>: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14057)
+ (line 11237)
+* spacing, math mode <1>: \mathstrut. (line 11300)
+* Spanish exclamation mark, as ligature: Ligatures. (line 680)
+* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 14306)
+* Spanish question mark, as ligature: Ligatures. (line 680)
+* special characters: Additional Latin letters.
+ (line 14494)
+* special characters, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 731)
+* special characters, printing: Printing special characters.
+ (line 14037)
* special insertions: Special insertions.
- (line 13599)
-* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 2437)
+ (line 14031)
+* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 2315)
* splitting the input file: Splitting the input.
- (line 14233)
-* square root: \sqrt. (line 11052)
-* stack math: \stackrel. (line 11069)
-* star-variants, commands: \@ifstar. (line 7486)
+ (line 14665)
+* square root: \sqrt. (line 11444)
+* stack math: \stackrel. (line 11461)
+* star-variants, commands: \@ifstar. (line 7380)
* starred form, defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 7256)
-* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6862)
+ (line 7149)
+* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6750)
* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 6820)
+ (line 6708)
* starting and ending: Starting and ending.
- (line 433)
+ (line 457)
* starting on a right-hand page: \clearpage & \cleardoublepage.
- (line 6820)
-* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 13746)
-* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 13894)
-* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 13894)
-* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 13890)
-* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 11493)
-* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 12141)
-* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 2174)
-* strut: \footnote. (line 7027)
-* strut <1>: \strut. (line 12005)
-* strut, math: \mathstrut. (line 10908)
-* styles of text: Font styles. (line 1703)
-* styles, page: Page styles. (line 11157)
-* subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 2636)
+ (line 6708)
+* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 14183)
+* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 14331)
+* straight quote, base: Text symbols. (line 14331)
+* straight single quote: Text symbols. (line 14327)
+* stretch, infinite horizontal: \hfill. (line 11917)
+* stretch, infinite vertical: \vfill. (line 12573)
+* stretch, omitting vertical: \raggedbottom. (line 2052)
+* strut: \footnote. (line 6919)
+* strut <1>: \strut. (line 12437)
+* strut, math: \mathstrut. (line 11300)
+* styles of text: Font styles. (line 1581)
+* styles, page: Page styles. (line 11549)
+* subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 2514)
* subparagraph <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3012)
-* subparagraph counter: Counters. (line 8117)
+ (line 2890)
+* subparagraph counter: Counters. (line 8502)
* subscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 9078)
-* subsection: Sectioning. (line 2636)
-* subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2948)
-* subsection counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 2636)
+ (line 9463)
+* subsection: Sectioning. (line 2514)
+* subsection <1>: \subsection. (line 2826)
+* subsection counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 2514)
* subsubsection <1>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3012)
-* subsubsection counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* suffix package: \@ifstar. (line 7544)
+ (line 2890)
+* subsubsection counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* suffix package: \@ifstar. (line 7438)
* superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
- (line 9078)
-* symbol: \newglossaryentry. (line 15331)
+ (line 9463)
+* symbol: \newglossaryentry. (line 15763)
* symbol, defining: \DeclareTextSymbol.
- (line 1595)
-* symbols, arrows: Arrows. (line 9987)
-* symbols, boldface: bm. (line 10058)
-* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 9141)
-* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 13700)
-* system commands, run from LaTeX: \write18. (line 16033)
-* system information: \write18. (line 16092)
-* T1: fontenc package. (line 1300)
-* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 5499)
-* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 5499)
-* table counter: Counters. (line 8117)
-* table environment: table. (line 5648)
-* table of contents: \contentsline. (line 14760)
+ (line 1473)
+* symbols, arrows: Arrows. (line 10372)
+* symbols, boldface: bm. (line 10443)
+* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 9526)
+* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 14133)
+* system commands, run from LaTeX: \write18. (line 16465)
+* system information: \write18. (line 16524)
+* T1: fontenc package. (line 1178)
+* T1 encoding: fontenc package. (line 1229)
+* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 5377)
+* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 5377)
+* table counter: Counters. (line 8502)
+* table environment: table. (line 5526)
+* table of contents: \contentsline. (line 15192)
* table of contents entry, create dotted line: \@dottedtocline.
- (line 14588)
+ (line 15020)
* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline.
- (line 14623)
-* table of contents file: Output files. (line 502)
+ (line 15055)
+* table of contents file: Output files. (line 526)
* table of contents, avoiding footnotes: Footnotes in section headings.
- (line 7124)
+ (line 7017)
* table of contents, creating: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14465)
+ (line 14897)
+* table of contents, page numbers in: \thepage. (line 11818)
* table of contents, sectioning numbers printed: Sectioning.
- (line 2712)
+ (line 2590)
* tablefootnote package: Footnotes in a table.
- (line 7190)
-* tables, creating: table. (line 5648)
-* tabular environment: tabular. (line 5706)
-* template (simple), article: article template. (line 16441)
-* template, beamer: beamer template. (line 16411)
-* template, book: book template. (line 16464)
+ (line 7083)
+* tables, creating: table. (line 5526)
+* tabular environment: tabular. (line 5584)
+* tagged PDF: \DocumentMetadata. (line 847)
+* template (simple), article: article template. (line 16873)
+* template, beamer: beamer template. (line 16843)
+* template, book: book template. (line 16896)
* template, book <1>: Larger book template.
- (line 16488)
+ (line 16920)
* templates, document: Document templates.
- (line 16404)
-* terminal input/output: Input/output. (line 15662)
-* terminal, writing to: \write. (line 15868)
-* TeX format (.fmt) files: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 13760)
-* texosquery package: \write18. (line 16092)
-* texput, jobname default: Jobname. (line 16322)
-* text style: Math styles. (line 10945)
-* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 13700)
-* text, resizing: \scalebox. (line 13538)
-* text, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13570)
-* text, scaling: \scalebox. (line 13538)
-* text, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13570)
+ (line 16836)
+* terminal input/output: Input/output. (line 16094)
+* terminal, writing to: \write. (line 16300)
+* TeX format (.fmt) files: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 14197)
+* texosquery package: \write18. (line 16524)
+* texput, jobname default: Jobname. (line 16754)
+* text style: Math styles. (line 11337)
+* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 14133)
+* text, resizing: \scalebox. (line 13714)
+* text, resizing <1>: \resizebox. (line 13746)
+* text, scaling: \scalebox. (line 13714)
+* text, scaling <1>: \resizebox. (line 13746)
* textcase package: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13671)
-* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 13700)
-* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 11220)
-* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 6030)
+ (line 14104)
+* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 14133)
+* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 11612)
+* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 5908)
* theindex: Produce the index manually.
- (line 14912)
+ (line 15344)
* theindex environment: Produce the index manually.
- (line 14915)
-* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6297)
-* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 7785)
-* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 7785)
-* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6297)
+ (line 15347)
+* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6175)
+* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 7679)
+* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 7679)
+* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6175)
* thin space: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10751)
+ (line 11143)
* thin space <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 11806)
+ (line 12238)
* thin space, negative: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 10765)
+ (line 11157)
* thin space, negative <1>: \thinspace & \negthinspace.
- (line 11806)
+ (line 12238)
* thorn, Icelandic letter: Additional Latin letters.
- (line 14107)
-* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 13903)
-* tie: ~. (line 11741)
-* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 13997)
-* TikZ package: \line. (line 5185)
-* TikZ package <1>: \strut. (line 12061)
-* TikZ package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12294)
-* tikz-cd package: Arrows. (line 10022)
-* tilde accent: Accents. (line 13962)
-* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 10649)
-* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 13766)
+ (line 14544)
+* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 14340)
+* tie: ~. (line 12171)
+* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 14434)
+* TikZ package: \line. (line 5063)
+* TikZ package <1>: \strut. (line 12493)
+* TikZ package <2>: \mbox & \makebox. (line 12726)
+* tikz-cd package: Arrows. (line 10407)
+* tilde accent: Accents. (line 14399)
+* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 11034)
+* tilde character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 765)
+* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 14203)
* title page, separate or run-in: Document class options.
- (line 798)
-* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6327)
-* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 11227)
-* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6327)
+ (line 1005)
+* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6205)
+* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 11619)
+* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6205)
* titlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 776)
-* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 11169)
-* titlesec package: Sectioning. (line 2690)
-* titlesec package <1>: \part. (line 2771)
-* titlesec package <2>: \chapter. (line 2850)
-* titlesec package <3>: \section. (line 2928)
-* titlesec package <4>: \subsection. (line 2994)
+ (line 983)
+* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 11561)
+* titlesec package: Sectioning. (line 2568)
+* titlesec package <1>: \part. (line 2649)
+* titlesec package <2>: \chapter. (line 2728)
+* titlesec package <3>: \section. (line 2806)
+* titlesec package <4>: \subsection. (line 2872)
* titlesec package <5>: \subsubsection & \paragraph & \subparagraph.
- (line 3069)
+ (line 2947)
* tocbibbind package: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14569)
-* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 2711)
-* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2712)
+ (line 15001)
+* tocdepth: Sectioning. (line 2589)
+* tocdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 2590)
* tocloft package: Table of contents etc..
- (line 14569)
-* tocloft package <1>: \contentsline. (line 14788)
-* today’s date: \today. (line 14202)
-* tombstone: \rule. (line 14174)
+ (line 15001)
+* tocloft package <1>: \contentsline. (line 15220)
+* today's date: \today. (line 14634)
+* tombstone: \rule. (line 14606)
* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
- (line 2304)
-* topnumber: Floats. (line 2544)
-* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2545)
-* totalnumber: Floats. (line 2548)
-* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2549)
-* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 13906)
-* transcript file: Output files. (line 487)
-* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* TS1 encoding: Text symbols. (line 13700)
-* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 2045)
-* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 13909)
+ (line 2182)
+* topnumber: Floats. (line 2422)
+* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2423)
+* totalnumber: Floats. (line 2426)
+* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 2427)
+* trademark symbol: Text symbols. (line 14343)
+* transcript file: Output files. (line 511)
+* TrueType fonts: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* TS1 (text companion) encoding: fontenc package. (line 1235)
+* TS1 encoding: Text symbols. (line 14133)
+* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 1923)
+* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 14346)
* twocolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 805)
+ (line 1012)
* twoside option: Document class options.
- (line 805)
-* type styles: Font styles. (line 1703)
-* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6366)
-* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 1842)
-* typefaces: Fonts. (line 1263)
-* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 1794)
-* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 3814)
-* ulem package: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10675)
-* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 13939)
-* unbreakable space: ~. (line 11741)
-* underbar: Accents. (line 13967)
-* underlining: Over- and Underlining.
- (line 10666)
-* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 13912)
-* Unicode: inputenc package. (line 14123)
-* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 511)
+ (line 1012)
+* type styles: Font styles. (line 1581)
+* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6244)
+* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 1720)
+* typefaces: Fonts. (line 1141)
+* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 1672)
+* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 3692)
+* ulem package: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11062)
+* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 14376)
+* unbreakable space: ~. (line 12171)
+* underbar: Accents. (line 14404)
+* underlining: Over- or under math.
+ (line 11051)
+* underscore character, meaning of: Special characters.
+ (line 755)
+* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 14349)
+* Unicode: Input encodings. (line 641)
+* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 535)
* unicode-math package: OpenType bold math.
- (line 10087)
-* unicode-math package <1>: Dots. (line 10440)
-* unicode-math package <2>: Greek letters. (line 10489)
-* units, of length: Units of length. (line 8436)
+ (line 10472)
+* unicode-math package <1>: Dots. (line 10825)
+* unicode-math package <2>: Greek letters. (line 10874)
+* units, of length: Units of length. (line 8821)
* unofficial nature of this manual: About this document.
- (line 376)
-* unordered lists: itemize. (line 4295)
-* uplatex: TeX engines. (line 560)
-* uplatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 573)
+ (line 400)
+* unordered lists: itemize. (line 4172)
+* Unused global option warning, handling: \DeclareOption. (line 8120)
+* unused options, adding to list: \OptionNotUsed. (line 8298)
+* uplatex: TeX engines. (line 591)
+* uplatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 604)
* uppercase: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13635)
-* url package: \verb. (line 6442)
-* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6208)
-* UTF-8, default LaTeX input encoding: Overview. (line 410)
-* UTF-8, engine support for: TeX engines. (line 511)
-* UTF-8, font support for: fontenc package. (line 1300)
-* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 8108)
-* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 10652)
-* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6366)
-* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 6366)
-* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 6409)
-* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 6401)
-* verse environment: verse. (line 6460)
-* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 13783)
-* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 13780)
-* vertical mode: Modes. (line 11109)
-* vertical space: \vspace. (line 12090)
-* vertical space <1>: \addvspace. (line 12170)
+ (line 14068)
+* url package: \verb. (line 6322)
+* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6086)
+* UTF-8, default LaTeX input encoding: Overview. (line 434)
+* UTF-8, engine support for: TeX engines. (line 535)
+* UTF-8, font support for: fontenc package. (line 1178)
+* variables, a list of: Counters. (line 8493)
+* vector symbol, math: Math accents. (line 11037)
+* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6244)
+* verbatim text: verbatim. (line 6244)
+* verbatim text, inline: \verb. (line 6289)
+* verbatimbox package: verbatim. (line 6279)
+* verse environment: verse. (line 6337)
+* version of format, requiring: \NeedsTeXFormat. (line 8275)
+* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 14220)
+* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 14217)
+* vertical mode: Modes. (line 11501)
+* vertical space: \vspace. (line 12522)
+* vertical space <1>: \addvspace. (line 12602)
* vertical space before paragraphs: \parindent & \parskip.
- (line 8930)
+ (line 9315)
* vertical spacing: \phantom & \vphantom & \hphantom.
- (line 10845)
-* vertical spacing <1>: \mathstrut. (line 10908)
-* vertical spacing, math mode: \smash. (line 10785)
-* visible space: \verb. (line 6434)
-* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 13915)
+ (line 11237)
+* vertical spacing <1>: \mathstrut. (line 11300)
+* vertical spacing, math mode: \smash. (line 11177)
+* visible space: \verb. (line 6314)
+* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 14352)
* weights, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1951)
-* whatsit item: \write. (line 15903)
-* white space: Spaces. (line 11412)
-* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 10655)
-* wide tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 10658)
+ (line 1829)
+* whatsit item: \write. (line 16335)
+* white space: Spaces. (line 11836)
+* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 11040)
+* wide tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 11043)
* widths, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
- (line 1963)
+ (line 1841)
* Wright, Joseph: Upper and lower case.
- (line 13677)
-* writing external files: filecontents. (line 4121)
-* writing letters: Letters. (line 15367)
-* x-height: Units of length. (line 8472)
-* xdvi command: Output files. (line 469)
-* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 547)
-* xelatex: TeX engines. (line 546)
-* xelatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 574)
-* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 547)
-* xindex program: makeindex. (line 15209)
-* xindy program: makeindex. (line 15202)
+ (line 14110)
+* writing external files: filecontents. (line 3999)
+* writing letters: Letters. (line 15799)
+* x-height: Units of length. (line 8857)
+* xdvi command: Output files. (line 493)
+* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 572)
+* xelatex: TeX engines. (line 571)
+* xelatex-dev: TeX engines. (line 605)
+* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 572)
+* xindex program: makeindex. (line 15641)
+* xindy program: makeindex. (line 15634)
* xparse package: LaTeX command syntax.
- (line 626)
-* xparse package <1>: \@ifstar. (line 7544)
-* xr package: xr package. (line 3501)
-* xr-hyper package: xr package. (line 3501)
-* xspace package: xspace package. (line 8056)
-* xstring package: Jobname. (line 16348)
+ (line 803)
+* xparse package <1>: \@ifstar. (line 7438)
+* xr package: xr package. (line 3379)
+* xr-hyper package: xr package. (line 3379)
+* xspace package: xspace package. (line 7956)
+* xstring package: Jobname. (line 16780)